Abstract image of a woman sitting on books and studying on a laptop

Document

R
referral traffic

The document discusses strategies for The New York Times to grow its digital audience. It recommends that the Times make developing its audience a core part of its mission by having a senior newsroom leader focus on audience development. It also recommends better collaborating with business-side units focused on the reader experience, and creating a small newsroom strategy team to advise leadership on competitors, technology, and reader trends. This would help the Times strengthen its newsroom for the digital era and seize the momentum created by recent successes. The report contains two chapters with more details on growing the audience and strengthening the newsroom.

1 of 97
Downloaded 15 times
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
Innovation March 24, 2014
Executive Summary Innovation  March 24, 2014
Executive Summary2 Executive Summary
3 The New York Times is winning at journalism. Of all the challenges facing a media company in the digi- tal age, producing great journalism is the hardest. Our daily report is deep, broad, smart and engaging ­— and we’ve got a huge lead over the competition. At the same time, we are falling behind in a sec- ond critical area: the art and science of getting our journalism to readers. We have always cared about the reach and impact of our work, but we haven’t done enough to crack that code in the digital era. This is where our competitors are pushing ahead of us. The Washington Post and The Wall Street Journal have announced aggressive moves in re- cent months to remake themselves for this age. First Look Media and Vox Media are creating newsrooms custom-built for digital. The Guardian and USA Today have embraced emerging best practices that have helped grow readership. And Huffington Post and Flipboard often get more traffic from Times journalism than we do. In contrast, over the last year The Times has watched readership fall significantly. Not only is the audience on our website shrinking but our audience on our smartphone apps has dipped, an extremely worrying sign on a growing platform. Our core mission remains producing the world’s best journalism. But with the endless upheaval in technology, reader habits and the entire busi- ness model, The Times needs to pursue smart new strategies for growing our audience. The urgency is only growing because digital media is getting more crowded, better funded and far more innovative. The first section of this report explores in detail the need for the newsroom to take the lead in get- ting more readers to spend more time reading more of our journalism. It offers specific strategies and tactics to accomplish this goal, often called audience development. Introduction Pulitzer Day, April 2013
Executive Summary4 Simply offering recommendations for improving our efforts to get our journalism to readers is not enough, however. The difficulties we face in audi- ence development are symptomatic of our need to become a more nimble, digitally focused newsroom that can thrive in a landscape of constant change. The second part of this report examines specific recommendations that we believe will help strength- en our newsroom for the digital era. That means taking more time to assess the landscape and chart the road ahead, rethink print-centric traditions, use experiments and data to inform decisions, hire and empower the right digital talent and work hand in hand with reader-focused departments on the busi- ness side. These needs are all deeply intertwined — getting better at one will help all the others. This is a moment we are well positioned to seize. The anxiety that filled the newsroom only a few years ago has mostly dissipated. The success of the paywall has provided financial stability as we be- come more digitally focused. The sale of other prop- erties like The Boston Globe has allowed the leader- ship to focus squarely on The New York Times. Both Mark Thompson and Jill Abramson have established themselves as willing and eager to push the compa- ny in new, sometimes uncomfortable directions. Indeed, all of us have been struck by the news- room’s momentum in many critical areas that we discuss throughout the report — key digital pro- motions, promising product initiatives, the mobile imperative, and productive collaborations with the business side. The masthead recently embraced an- alytics and is in the process of building up a team that will help the newsroom use data to inform deci- sions, which would have been one of our main rec- ommendations. That momentum has contributed to a new sense of openness and opportunity across the organiza- tion. Our company goals speak volumes: Strategy for Growth, Speed and Agility, Unlocking the Power of Data, and One NYT. The newsroom, once resis- tant to change, is energized by these recent success- es and eager to tackle difficult questions and try new things. And the business side, with a growing bench of talent and an increasingly shared mission of serv- ing readers, is eager for the newsroom lead the way. Our overarching goal is to help the masthead build on that momentum and take advantage of that openness. For this report, we have pulled together informa- tion and insights to help you do that, based on hun- dreds of interviews, a deep dive into our operations, a close look at the competitive landscape and, with that rarest of journalistic privileges, the time to step The Times Reaches A Vast Print And Digital Audience.... 1.25M Print Subscribers 760K Digital Subscribers 30M Web readers in U.S. per month 20M Mobile readers in U.S. per month 6.5M E-Mail Newsletters Subscribers 11.3M Twitter followers 5.7M Facebook followers 13.5M News Alerts audience
5 back and think. Some of these recommendations will seem obvi- ous; others may seem more controversial at first glance. All were developed with full commitment to the values of The Times and with the understanding that we have few extra resources lying around. The few new roles we have proposed are not fo- cused on creating new journalism; their goal is to get more out of the journalism we are already creating. We want to help tune the newsroom engine to get all the cylinders firing more efficiently. It should be stated explicitly that there is no single transformational idea in this report. Transforma- tion can be a dangerous word in our current envi- ronment because it suggests a shift from one solid state to another; it implies there is an end point. In- stead, we have watched the dizzying growth of smart phones and tablets, even as we are still figuring out the web. We have watched the massive migration of readers to social media even as we were redesigning our home page. Difficult new questions will arrive with each new shift. In all likelihood, we will spend the rest of our careers wrestling with them. The leader of another organization called this era, “A period of muddling through.” Not a single person among the hundreds we inter- viewed ever suggested tinkering with the journalistic values and integrity that make the Times the great- est journalistic institution in the world. But we must evolve, and quickly, to maintain that status over the coming decades. ...But Many Competitors Are Growing Faster Huffington Post USA Today BuzzFeed New York Times Wall Street Journal Vox Media 20M 40M 60M 80M 100M 120M JUN 2013APR 2013 AUG 2013 OCT 2013 DEC 2013 JAN 2014 Readers (Millions) Huffington Post surpassed us years ago in reader traffic, and BuzzFeed pulled ahead in 2013.
Executive Summary6 More than ever, the hard work of growing our audi- ence falls squarely on the newsroom. The realities of a cluttered Internet and distracted mobile world require extra effort to get our journalism to readers. This work requires creativity, editorial judgment and offers us the chance to ensure that our journal- ism lands with even greater impact. There should be a senior newsroom leader in charge of Audience Development, but this effort Our Proposals, In Brief MAKE DEVELOPING OUR AUDIENCE A CORE AND URGENT PART OF OUR MISSION should be everyone’s job. We explore several ar- eas that we believe can position us for continued growth: discovery (how we package and distribute our journalism), promotion (how we call attention to our journalism) and connection (how we create a two-way relationship with readers that deepens their loyalty). At both digital and traditional com- petitors, these functions are now considered part of the newsroom’s responsibilities. This shift would provide the newsroom, virtually overnight, with many of the necessary skills and insights to take our digital report to the next level. There are a number of departments and units, most of which are considered part of the business side, that are explicitly focused on the reader experience, including Design, Technology, Consumer Insight Group, R&D and Product. These functions represent a clear opportunity COLLABORATE WITH BUSINESS-SIDE UNITS FOCUSED ON READER EXPERIENCE for better integration. Recent initiatives, including NYT Now, have shown the benefits of collaboration across these departments. We are not proposing a wholesale reorganization. But we do believe simply issuing a new policy ­— collaborating with our col- leagues focused on reader experience is encouraged and expected ­— would send a powerful signal and unlock a huge store of creative energy and insights. Many newsroom leaders are so consumed with the demands of the daily report that they have little time to step back and think about long-term questions. When we were simply a newspaper, this singular fo- cus made sense. But we must now juggle print, the web, apps, newsletters, news alerts, social media, video, an international edition and a range of stand- alone products. Our suggestion is to create a small strategy team with the central role of advising the masthead. The CREATE A NEWSROOM STRATEGY TEAM team would keep newsroom leaders apprised of competitors’ strategies, changing technology and shifting reader behavior. It would help track proj- ects around the company that affect our digital re- port, help the masthead set and evaluate priorities and conduct occasional deep dives to answer spe- cific questions. And it would facilitate desk-level ex- periments and communicate the results back to the newsroom to ensure we’re exploring new areas and learning from our efforts. CHAPTER 1: GROWING OUR AUDIENCE CHAPTER 2: STRENGTHENING OUR NEWSROOM
7 Stories are typically filed late in the day. Our mobile apps are organized by print sections. Desks metic- ulously lay out their sections but spend little time thinking about social strategies. Traditional report- ing skills are the top priority in hiring and promo- tion. The habits and traditions built over a century and a half of putting out the paper are a powerful, conservative force as we transition to digital ­­­— none more so than the gravitational pull of Page One. Some of our traditional competitors have aggres- MAP A STRATEGY TO MAKE THE NEWSROOM A TRULY DIGITAL-FIRST ORGANIZATION sively reorganized around a digital-first rather than a print-first schedule. The health and profitability of our print paper means we don’t yet need to fol- low them down this path. But it is essential to begin the work of questioning our print-centric traditions, conducting a comprehensive assessment of our digi- tal needs, and imagining the newsroom of the future. This means reassessing everything from our roster of talent to our organizational structure to what we do and how we do it.
Executive Summary8 Six months ago, you asked A.G. Sulzberger to pull together some of the most forward-thinking minds from around the newsroom to develop smart, sound ways to lift our fortunes through our journalism. The eight-person team – with the help of two col- leagues from the strategy group – included digital, design and business skills anchored to a rock-solid journalistic foundation. We spent the first few months reporting. We went on a listening tour of the business side, we met with hundreds of employees from around the newsroom, we interviewed leaders at dozens of other news or- ganizations and spent time with readers. We pored over internal analytics, studied competing web sites, and read more reports, presentations and articles about changes in digital media than we can count. In effect, we did a deep-dive reporting project on our own paper and industry. By the end, we had a strong sense of both the opportunities and internal roadblocks that need to be addressed to thrive in a rapidly changing digital media landscape. This report reflects a critical shift from the origi- nal mission. Though the initial assumption was that we would emerge with ideas for a stand-alone prod- uct — such as NYT Now — our reporting showed us that the more urgent need was to focus on the core of The New York Times. Helping The Times adjust to this moment of promise and peril, we concluded, would have great- er journalistic and financial impact than virtually any product idea we might have suggested. That insight was supported almost unanimously by the digital newsroom, our leadership and our business colleagues. Focusing on the core is harder than starting some- thing new because every proposal threatens tradi- tion and turf. But the need is more urgent because of the accelerating pace of change and the over- stretched newsroom resources. Since that pivot from the original mission, we have focused our work around new challenges: Let’s find ways to leverage The Times’ journalism and tal- ents in even smarter and more effective ways. Let’s think through the most persistent and difficult ques- tions that have nagged at The Times. Let’s identify and share emerging opportunities and best practic- es. Let’s identify the roadblocks and suggest ways to remove them. This report represents our best attempt to pro- vide answers. Our hope is that helping the masthead identify some of the most pressing problems and most promising opportunities will smooth the way for innovators inside the building. Finally, we are well aware that this newsroom has invested a lot of talent and time in this group. The report is just one return on that investment. Another is that you have produced eight committed evange- lists to help push the newsroom to embrace its digi- tal future. We will do our part to spread the lessons and insights captured here across the organization. Our Mission (And How It Evolved)
9 The Team Adam B. Ellick Senior Video Journalist Studied Disruptive Innovation, Design Thinking, and Social Television at the Harvard Business School/MIT Media Lab. Bahrain and Pakistan coverage won consecutive Overseas Press Club awards. Adam Bryant Business Columnist Interviewed more than 300 C.E.O.s for Corner Office, and wrote two books on leadership, management and culture. Edited Pulitzer-winning series on the dangers of distracted driving. A.G. Sulzberger Metro Assistant Editor Worked on Continuous News, Times Topics, and Video before joining the City Room blog. Opened the Kansas City bureau to expand coverage of the Midwest. Amy O’Leary Technology Reporter Worked as an editor, producer, reporter and manager in her seven years at The Times. Her work has been nominated for three Emmy awards, and won both a Loeb and Knight-Batten award. Jon Galinsky Strategy Manager Managing Editor of Williams College newspaper. Interned at a newspaper in Ethiopia. Led the strategy team’s planning for selling our digital subscriptions in 2014. Ben Peskoe Strategy Manager Wrote presentation to NYT Board of Directors that recommended building NYT Now, Opinion and Cooking products. Elena Gianni User Experience Designer Design innovation consultant with a background in engineering and media studies. Worked on the NYT5 redesign, conducting research and prototyping interactions. Andrew Phelps Mobile Assistant Editor Worked in radio, television and print, and covered media for a digital startup. Spearheaded the launch of Today’s Paper, and led a project to enhance the breaking news experience on mobile devices. Louise Story Investigations Reporter Yale M.B.A. Former media reporter. Covered Wall Street during the financial crisis, anchored Times video show, and business correspondent on “The Takeaway” Charles Duhigg Business Reporter Harvard M.B.A., former founder and C.E.O. of SWPA Education Management. Part of the team that wrote the Pulitzer-winning “The iEconomy” series. Advisers Larry Ingrassia Deputy Managing Editor Ian Fisher Assistant Managing Editor
Executive Summary10 The New York Times: AJ Chavar, Al Ming, Alex Hardiman, Alex MacCallum, Alex Minkow, Alexis Lloyd, Allen Tan, Amanda Cox, Amy Harmon, Andrew Keh, Andrew Kueneman, Andrew Rosenthal, Andrew Ross Sorkin, Andy Wright, Anh Dang, Ann Derry, Annie Lowrey, Ariane Bernard, Aron Pilhofer, Arthur Sulzberger, Ashley Southall, Ashwin Seshagiri, Barbara De Wilde, Ben French, Ben Koski, Ben Monnie, Bill Brink, Bill Carter, Bill Schmidt, Blake Wilson, Boris Chen, Brad Kagawa, Brian Ham- man, Brian Murphy, Bruce Headlam, C.J. Chivers, Carl Hulse, Carolyn Ryan, Catrin Einhorn, Chad Ghastin, Cheryl Yau, Chris Wiggins, Christine Haughney, Christine Hung, Christine Kay, Chrys Wu, Cliff Levy, Coral Davenport, Craig Hunter, Cynthia Collins, Damien Cave, Damon Darlin, Dan Watkin, Dana Canedy, Danielle Mattoon, Danielle Rhodes Ha, David Carr, David Gelles, David Leonhardt, David Perpich, David Scull, Dean Baquet, Dean Chang, Dean Murphy, Deborah Acosta, Deborah Needleman, Deborah Sontag, Denise Warren, Desiree Shoe, Eileen Murphy, Elizabeth Rosenthal, Elliot Malkin, Emily Rueb, Eric Lipton, Erik Hinton, Erik Piepenburg, Ethan Bronner, Evan Sandhaus, Gabe Johnson, Geoff Isenman, Gerry Marzorati, Gina Kolata, Ginger Thompson, Glenn Kramon, Hamilton Boardman, Hannah Farfield, Heather Murphy, Hugh Mandeville, Hugo Lindgren, Ian Adelman, Ian Fisher, Jacky Myint, James Estrin, James Robinson, Jamie Abir, Jan Hoffman, Janet Elder, Jason Spingarn-Koff, Jason Stallman, Jeff Marcus, Jenna Wortham, Jennifer Parrucci, Jennifer Steinhauer, Jeremy Peters, Jill Abramson, Jim Boehmer, Jim Dao, Jim Dryfoos, Jim Glanz, Jim Rutenberg, Joan Huang, Jodi Kantor, Joe Kahn, John Geddes, John Geraci, John Niedermeyer, John Schwartz, Jon Huang, Jon Kelly, Jonathan Ellis, Jonathan Martin, Jonathan Weisman, Joseph Burgess, Josh Haner, Josh Williams, Julie Bloom, Julie Bosman, Justin Stile, Kim Severson, KJ Dell’Antonia, Kristi Reilly, Laura Chang, Laura Holson, Lauren Kern, Lawrence Ingrassia, Leslie Kaufman, Lexi Mainland, Libby Gery, Libby Rosenthal, Marc Frons, Marc Lavalle, Margaret Sullivan, Mark Bittman, Mark Mazetti, Mark Silver, Mark Thompson, Martin Nisenholtz, Mary Suh, Matt Apuzzo, Matt Boggie, Matt Erikson, Matt Purdy, Matthew Boggie, Meaghan Looram, Meghan Louttit, Meredith Levien, Michael Corkery, Michael Dewar, Michael Golden, Michael Greenspon, Michael Luo, Michael Schmidt, Michael Shear, Michael Slackman, Michele McNally, Mike McIntire, Mike Zimablist, Monica Davey, Monica Drake, Nancy Donaldson, Nathan Ashby-Kuhlman, Nick Bilton, Nick Kristof, Nicole Breskin, Noam Cohen, Pamela Paul, Patrick La- Forge, Paul Smurl, Paul Werdel, Paul Yorke, Peter Baker, Peter Lattman, Peter Renz, Rachel Golden, Rajiv Pant, Rajiv Pant, Rebecca Corbett, Rebecca Howard, Rebecca Ruiz, Renda Morton, Rich Meislin, Rob Mackey, Roland Caputo, Sam Dolnick, Sam Manchester, Sam Sifton, Samantha Henig, Santiago Alfonso-Lord, Sarah Cohen, Sewell Chan, Shane Murray, Shayla Harris, Sheryle Stolberg, Shreeya Sinha, Stephanie Saul, Steve Duenes, Steven Rocker, Susan Chira, Susan Edgerly, Susan Wessling, Tahir Khan, Tara Parker Pope, Tom Bodkin, Tom Carley, Tom Jolly, Tony Brancato, Tony Scott, Torben Brooks, Tyson Evans, Victoria Shannon, Walt Bogdanich, Wendell Jamieson, Will Bardeen, William Goss, Willie Rashbaum, Yasmin Namini, Zander Baron, Zena Bakarat. External: Brian Mcandrews, Adam Davidson, Adam Moss, Adam Orme, Al Anstey, Alex How- ard, Alexis Madrigal, Ali Gharib, Ali Velshi, Amanda Michel, Amanda Zamora, Anders Fink, Andrea Shiah, Andrew Fitzgerald, Andrew Ginsburg, Andrew Jaspan, Ann Mack, Anna Bryant, Annie Wamke, Anthea Watson-Strong, Ben Leher, Bob Pittman, Braxton Mckee, Brianna Cotter, Chris Anderson, Chris Cunningham, Chris Mckee , Christina Cacioppo, Dan Collarusso, Dani- elle Gould, Dave Kliman, Dave Morgan, David Callaway, David Gehring, David Kenny, Dayna Grayson, Don Graham, Doreen Lorenzo, Eddie Kim, Eilidh Dickson, Elisabeth Job, Ellen Rubeefalls, Ellena Lee, Emily Brill, Enrique Acevdeo, Esther Dyson, Ethan Zuckerman, Fabio, Farhan Zafar, Gabe Dance, Gary Portuesi, Gideon Lichfield, Henry Abbott, Henry Blodget, Herb Kim, Jacek Barcikowski, Jacob Weisberg, Jake Levine, James Bennett, Jane Fritsch, Janet Camp, Jed Alpert, Jeremy Tarling, Jesse Shapsins, Jigar Mehta, John Lee, Josh Cohen, Josh Miller, Josh Quittner, Joshua Noble, Judy Winitzer, Julia Thompkins, Justin Smith, Kate Lee, Ken Lerer, Ken Loveless, Kevin Delaney, Laura Evans, Libby Brittain, Lina Srivastava, Ludwig Siegele, Magid Abraham, Mahira Chishty, Marcus Mckee, Mark Allen, Matt Mullin, Matt Singer, Mayo Nissen, Megan White, Meghan Peters, Michael Lebowitz, Michael Wertheim, Miriam Elder, Nick Beim, Norman Pollack, Paul Berry, Peter Goodman, Philippe Browning, Prascilla, Randi Zuckerberg, Ray Day, Richard Ii Hornos, Richard Luettgen, Rick Berke, Rishad Tobaccowala, Rob Grimshaw, Robert Krulwich, Robin Pembrooke, Robin Sloan, Ryan Jacoby, Siena Giraldi, Soraya Dorabi, Sravanthi Agrawal, Steve Brill, Stine Hoeck Forsberg, Susan Taing, Tim Carmody, Tom Conrad, Tony Haile, Vadim Lauruskik, Valerie Streit, Van- essa Arantes Nuzzo, Vivian Schiller, Wesley Morris, Zach Seward, Zach Wise. We Interviewed:
11
Executive Summary12 In the pages that follow, you will find a brief discus- sion of our competitors and the disruptive forces that have taken hold of our industry. The rest of the report is in two chapters — Growing Our Audience and Strengthening Our Newsrroom — that flesh out the themes in this executive summary, with more detail, context and specific recommen- dations, based on our reporting inside and outside the building. We offer long-term goals and some possible short-term steps to get there. In nearly every case, the questions we explore are more important than the solutions we offer. And there can be legitimate debate around the best solu- tions to many of them. We have done our best not to overwhelm read- ers with our reporting. We’ve attached appendices that list all the people we’ve interviewed. The quotes we’ve used are each representative of a dozen or more conversations; they’re not outliers. Many are anonymous — not ideal, but essential to encourag- ing frank conversation. As much as possible we’ve distilled information into charts and graphs. We have also included side- bars to explore topics and share key insights from our reporting. A User’s Guide to This Report
13 Disruption: A Quick Overview Of The Competitive Landscape Vox Media’s Chicago office. Vox surpassed The Wall Street Journal in total digital readership in 2013.
Executive Summary14 As a reminder of just how rapidly new players are disrupting our business, consider what has hap- pened in the six months since our group’s work be- gan. Not long ago, it would have been hard to imag- ine The Washington Post controlled by anyone but the Graham family. Now we are waiting to see what Jeff Bezos does to remake this storied institution. “Even if the Post lost $100 million a year,” wrote Farhad Manjoo, “Bezos’ personal fortune could fund it for 252 years.” Soon after Bezos bought the Post for $250 million, Pierre Omidyar, the eBay co-founder, pledged $250 million to create First Look Media, a hybrid operation with a nonprofit newsroom and for-profit technol- ogy company. It hired well-known journalists like Glenn Greenwald and Laura Poitras to launch several digital magazines with top-notch data analysts, visual designers and technologists. “Our goal is to experiment, innovate and overcome existing obstacles — to make it easier for journalists to deliver the transformative stories we all need,” Omidyar said in his announcement. Other digital media companies poured more money into the news business, luring talent from established players. Vox Media — which raised an- other $40 million in October — wooed Ezra Klein from The Post. Yahoo hired David Pogue to create a consumer tech vertical and signed up Katie Couric to become a “global anchor.” Kara Swisher and Walt Mossberg left the Journal to launch Re/code. BuzzFeed and Upworthy continued their relent- less growth while making new investments in qual- ity journalism. And Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn waded deeper into the journalism business by hiring editors and announcing new products, like Face- book’s Paper, aimed at news consumers. Traditional media outlets were just as active. The Washington Post started the Upworthy-inspired Know More, which took just three weeks to become the company’s biggest blog. In March, the company opened an outpost in Manhattan, called WPNYC, to attract top digital talent. “The thing about the site is that it’s a very classic legacy media site — a repre- sentation of the print medium in digital,” said The Post’s Greg Franczyk. “We’re shifting the paradigm to designing a website that works for our users and building the technology that meets the need.” Digital-first is the new mantra from the old guard. The Financial Times and USA Today have made the switch, and The Journal has pledged to join those ranks, staffing a new “real-time news desk” with 60 people and an “audience-engagement desk” with social-media editors and analytics specialists. One of the largest chains of local newspapers in the United States, which tellingly renamed itself Digital First Media, announced Project Unbolt, explain- ing that its goal is “to take a massive wrench to the culture and work- flow of our newsrooms and unbolt them,” since “newsrooms are still largely print newsrooms with digi- tal operations ‘bolted on.’” And The San Francisco Chronicle launched “an off-site startup-style incubator.” As Audrey Cooper, the managing editor, explained, “We hope to even- tually get to the point where instead of being a news- paper company that produces websites, we think of ourselves as a digital company that also produces a newspaper. Unless you flip that switch, I don’t think any newspaper will be truly successful at negotiating the digital switchover.” The Times has hardly been idle, of course. Over the last six months, the company unveiled a major redesign of NYTimes.com, the first in seven years. We launched The International New York Times. We pushed into the new world of native advertising (as did Hearst, The Post, BBC, The Guardian and The Wall Street Journal). And we completed the sale of The Boston Globe to John Henry, ushering in an era in which The New York Times is the Times Com- pany’s only business. News in the News: A Busy Six Months A relentless run of headlines from new and old media companies. | Competitive Landscape
15 NOVEMBER Yahoo hires a series of high-profile journalists, including David Pogue and Katie Couric. Digital First Media rolls out metered paywalls for all 75 of its Media News and Journal Register sites. DECEMBER The Journal launches an “audience engagement team,” combining social-media and analytics experts. An interactive news app — not an article — becomes The Times’s most popular story of all time. BuzzFeed expands its foreign and investigative reporting staff. FEBRUARY Upworthy announces “attention minutes” as its new algorithm for measuring reader engagement. ProPublica begins selling data gathered from its reporting projects in the ProPublica Data Store. JANUARY Kara Swisher and Walt Mossberg leave the Journal to launch Re/code. Ezra Klein leaves The Post to join Vox Media. Marty Baron announces major new digital initiatives at The Post, including a breaking- news desk. The Wall Street Journal creates a digital-first “real-time news desk.” Digital First Media announces Project Unbolt. Facebook introduces Paper, a Flipboard-like mobile news-reading app. San Francisco Chronicle launches “an off-site startup-style incubator.” Business Insider surpasses The Journal in combined digital audience. The Huffington Post announced a global partnership with a think tank at Davos. OCTOBER Washington Post closes sale to Jeff Bezos for $250 million. Pierre Omidyar pledges $250 million to a new digital-first venture, First Look Media. Times Co. closes sale of The Boston Globe to John Henry for $70 million. Vox Media raises $40 million in venture capital. The Post launches Upworthy-inspired Know More, which takes only three weeks to become the company’s biggest blog. MARCH The Post launches WPNYC, a Manhattan outpost for design and development. Vice News launched with a staff of roughly 100 journalists. The new FiveThirtyEight is unveiled. NYT Now, Cooking and The Upshot are prepared for launch.
Executive Summary16 What Is Disruption? Disruption is a predictable pattern across many in- dustries in which fledgling companies use new tech- nology to offer cheaper and inferior alternatives to products sold by established players (think Toyota taking on Detroit decades ago). Today, a pack of news startups are hoping to “disrupt” our industry by attacking the strongest incumbent — The New York Times. How does disruption work? Should we be defending our position, or disrupting ourselves? And can’t we just dismiss the BuzzFeeds of the world, with their listicles and cat videos? Here’s a quick primer on the disruption cycle: 1.Incumbents treat innovation as a series of incre- mental improvements. They focus on improving the quality of their premium products to sustain their current business model. For The Times, a sustaining innovation might be “Snowfall.” 2.Disruptors introduce new products that, at first, do not seem like a threat. Their products are cheap- er, with poor quality — to begin with. For BuzzFeed, a disruptive innovation might be social media distribution. 3. Over time, disruptors improve their product, usually by adapting a new technology. The flash- point comes when their products become “good enough” for most customers. They are now poised to grow by taking market share from incumbents. sustaining innovations disruptive innovations minimum customer need TIME TIME TIME QUALITYQUALITYQUALITY minimum customer need minimum customer need HALLMARKS OF DISRUPTIVE INNOVATORS Introduced by an “outsider” Less expensive than existing products Targeting underserved or new markets Initially inferior to existing products Advanced by an enabling technology | Competitive Landscape
17 Kodak and its film-based cameras were the classic incumbents: a traditional, respected company offer- ing a high-quality product to a mass market. Then came digital cameras. Film companies laughed at the poor shutter speed and fuzzy images of early digital cameras. The photos weren’t great, but digital cameras bet- ter addressed the user’s primary need: to capture and share moments. It was easier and cheaper to take a digital picture, download it onto your com- puter and email it to many people than it was to buy film, print dozens of high quality photos at a shop and mail copies to friends. When the inferior and cheaper digital product became “good enough” for customers, it disrupted the incumbent. Digital cameras seemed poised to own the mar- ket. Then came flip-phone cameras. They offered even lower quality photos. And digital camera com- panies mocked their grainy images. But again, us- ers opted for a lesser product that was more conve- nient. They’d rather have a “good enough” camera in their phone then lug a better but bulky digital camera. When the flip-phone camera became “good enough,” it disrupted the incumbent. A CASE STUDY IN DISRUPTION: KODAK The first digital cameras were mocked for poor shutter speed and fuzzy images. Now, “Kodak memories” are a distant memory. What did you take your last picture with? “Culturally, I think we have operated as if we had the formula figured out, and it was all about optimizing, in its various constituent parts, the formula. Now it is about discovering the new formula.” — Satya Nadella, Microsoft’s new CEO “The world of business really separates into two groups. Entrepreneurs who are disrupting the status quo are attackers. Large organizations are defenders.” —Steve Case, CEO of Revolution, and a founder of AOL
Executive Summary18 A Competitor Cheat Sheet Founded by Jonah Peretti in 2006, BuzzFeed built a huge audience by using data to help stories go viral. The company is known for rapidly experimenting with story formats and is now hiring journalists to move into traditional news coverage. BUZZFEED KNOWN FOR Aggressive social distribution Highly shareable content Experimental story forms KEY STATS 130M unique visitors $40M in 2013 revenue ESPN ESPN is expanding its digital offerings, with vid- eo and audio (live and on-demand), sports-relat- ed tools (fantasy football, score alerts) and sub- brands based on star journalists (Grantland with Bill Simmons, FiveThirtyEight with Nate Silver). KNOWN FOR Mobile push alerts User tools/service journalism “Pulling back the curtain” on big stories KEY STATS 56M unique visitors CIRCA Circa is a mobile news app that aggregates report- ing from a variety of sources and repackages each story into running story threads for smartphones. The app allows users to follow ongoing stories and subscribe to alerts for updates. KNOWN FOR Bullet-point summaries Mobile push alerts Allowing users to follow stories KEY STATS $3.4M in funding FIRST LOOK MEDIA First Look Media is a new digital journalism venture backed with $250 million from eBay co-founder Pierre Omidyar. It has recruited brand-name jour- nalists like Glenn Greenwald, Laura Poitras and Matt Taibbi to aggressively cover hard news. KNOWN FOR Brand-name journalists Developers on every desk Single-topic digital magazines KEY STATS $250M in funding guarantees; $50M already invested About 20 veteran journalists | Competitive Landscape KNOWN FOR Beautiful user interface Built on users’ social networks KEY STATS 90M users Raised $50M round; valued at $800M Third-largest driver of mobile traffic to NYT Flipboard is a highly visual news aggregator designed for phones and tablets. Content is aggregated from a variety of publishers and grouped into themed collections. Readers can follow collections, topics or publications. FLIPBOARD
19 KNoWN FOR Promotion and outreach “Comment Is Free” platform Data visualizations KEY STATS Avg. 2013 non-U.S. audience: 27M (vs.17M for NYT) Avg. 2013 U.S. audience: 12M (vs. 33M for NYT) The Guardian is expanding its digital-only U.S. newsroom, which now has approximately 60 journalists. It led early coverage of the Snowden leaks, largely through the work of columnist Glenn Greenwald. THE GUARDIAN KNOWN FOR Open commenting platform Aggressive use of SEO and social media KEY STATS Avg. 2013 U.S. audience: 32M, reaching high of 40M in November (vs. 33M for NYT) The Huffington Post, sold to AOL in 2011 for $315 mil- lion, surged in popularity during the 2008 presidential campaign. In addition to original reporting, the site pub- lishes the work of outside contributors and aggregates content from The Times and other sources. THE HUFFINGTON POST KNOWN FOR “Influencer” publishing platform Allowing users to follow topics KEY STATS 65M unique U.S. visitors, 180M globally $1.5B in total revenue, $360M in advertising LinkedIn is a social network for professionals. It entered publishing in earnest through its acquisition of Pulse in 2013 and is building out its “Influencer” network of contributors who post original content. LINKEDIN KNOWN FOR Simple publishing platform Smart writers and editors Rich visual design KEY STATS Average 250K monthly users Founded by former Twitter CEO Evan Williams, Medium is an open publishing platform that allows anyone to write and distribute content. Medium’s editorial team curates the best content into “col- lections.” Readers can follow collections and indi- vidual writers. MEDIUM KNOWN FOR Chartbuilder tool for journalists Responsive design “Obsessions” in lieu of traditional beats or sections KEY STATS 5M unique visitors 50K daily email subscribers Quartz is a business-news site owned by Atlantic Media and edited by Kevin Delaney, a former managing editor at The Wall Street Journal. It operates a mobile-opti- mized website, rather than native apps, and drives audi- ence growth through daily email newsletters. QUARTZ KNoWN FOR Promotion and outreach “Comment Is Free” platform Data visualizations KEY STATS Avg. 2013 non-U.S. audience: 27M (vs.17M for NYT) Avg. 2013 U.S. audience: 12M (vs. 33M for NYT) The Guardian is expanding its digital-only U.S. newsroom, which now has approximately 60 journalists. It led early coverage of the Snowden leaks, largely through the work of columnist Glenn Greenwald. THE GUARDIAN KNOWN FOR Open commenting platform Aggressive use of SEO and social media KEY STATS Avg. 2013 U.S. audience: 32M, reaching high of 40M in November (vs. 33M for NYT) The Huffington Post, sold to AOL in 2011 for $315 mil- lion, surged in popularity during the 2008 presidential campaign. In addition to original reporting, the site pub- lishes the work of outside contributors and aggregates content from The Times and other sources. THE HUFFINGTON POST
Executive Summary20 KNOWN FOR Live blogging Visual story treatments Highly engaged community KEY STATS Raised $40M round in 2013 $200M valuation SB Nation has 40M unique visitors Vox Media operates a collection of vertical publi- cations, including SB Nation (sports), The Verge (tech), Curbed (real estate), Polygon (gaming), Racked (fashion) and Eater (food). The company recently hired Ezra Klein to create Vox, a general- interest news site. VOX KNOWN FOR High-profile journalism hires Huge traffic to news content Newly released Digest app KEY STATS 65M unique U.S. visitors, 180M globally $1.5B in total revenue, $360M in advertising Yahoo is expanding its journalistic capacity by making big hires. It released a smartphone app called Yahoo News Digest that updates twice daily with the top eight news stories from around the web. YAHOO NEWS | Competitive Landscape
Chapter 1 Growing Our Audience Innovation  March 24, 2014
22 Growing Our Audience |
23 Long ago, we decided to go to extraordinary lengths to get our journalism into the hands of as many readers as possible. Each night, we printed our best work. Then we loaded it onto trucks to drive it to cities and towns. Then we enlisted kids to bike from house to house to deliver our papers to readers’ doorsteps. For non- subscribers, we dropped off bundles of papers at corner stores and newspaper racks, and painstak- ingly tracked sales to see where more copies were needed. We take this work for granted now, but our home delivery and single-sales efforts represented one of the most sophisticated consumer-outreach opera- tions in history. But when the time came to put our journalism on the web, we adopted a much more passive approach. We published stories on our home page and assumed that most people would come to us. The realities of a cluttered Internet and distracted mobile world now require us to make even more of an effort to get our journalism to readers. Perhaps because the path forward is not clear and requires very different skills, we are putting less effort into reaching readers’ digital doorsteps than we ever did in reaching their physical doorsteps. This effort to reach more readers — known as Au- dience Development — is where our competitors are pushing ahead of us. Audience Development is the work of expanding our loyal and engaged audience. It is about getting more people to read more of our journalism. The work can be broken down into steps like discovery (how we package and distribute our journalism), promotion (how we call attention to our journalism) and connection (how we create a two-way relation- ship with readers that deepens their loyalty). Audience Development needs to be a goal for the whole company. But the newsroom, in particular, must seize a leadership position. At our new and traditional competitors, Audience Development is seen not just as the responsibility Introduction of the newsroom but as the responsibility of every editor and reporter. They adopt this approach be- cause the work happens story by story and platform by platform, requiring creativity and editorial judg- ment. These efforts can be compared to using an en- gaging lede, compelling headline, or gripping photo TOUGH TRENDS Some key measures of traffic and engagement point to an inescapable truth: The Times needs to work harder to reach and hold onto readers. MAY 2012 JAN 2013 MAY 2013 35 30 25 20 15 40 MinutesTime Spent: JAN 2014JAN 2013 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 1 MillionsiPhone App Active Users: MAY 2012 JAN 2013 MAY 2013 10 5 0 15 MillionsPage Views: 2011 2012 2013 80 80 100 120 140 160 MillionsHome Page Visitors:
24 Growing Our Audience | REACHING READERS The Times has worked hard since its earliest days to turn occasional readers into loyal subscribers. to draw readers into a story. “The hardest part for me has been the realization that you don’t automatically get an audience,” said Janine Gibson, editor-in-chief of The Guardian’s website. “For someone with a print background, you’re accustomed to the fact that if it makes the edi- tor’s cut ­— gets into the paper — you’re going to find an audience. It’s entirely the other way around as a digital journalist. The realization that you have to go find your audience ­— they’re not going to just come and read it — has been transformative.” The need is urgent. Our home page has been our main tool for getting our journalism to readers, but its impact is waning. Only a third of our read- ers ever visit it. And those who do visit are spending less time: page views and minutes spent per reader dropped by double-digit percentages last year. Readers are finding and engaging with our jour- nalism in vastly different ways. More readers ex- pect us to find them on Twitter and Facebook, and through email and phone alerts. But the newsroom pays less attention to these platforms, even though they offer our main, and sometimes only, channels to tens of millions of readers. Here, too, we are lag- ging our competitors. Because we are journalists, we tend to look at our competitors through the lens of content rather than strategy. But BuzzFeed, Huffington Post and USA Today are not succeeding simply because of lists, quizzes, celebrity photos and sports coverage. They are succeeding because of their sophisticated social, search and community-building tools and strate- gies, and often in spite of their content. “At The New York Times, far too often for writers and editors the story is done when you hit publish,” said Paul Berry, who helped found The Huffington Post. “At Huffington Post, the article begins its life when you hit publish.” The Guardian is just one example of a traditional competitor that has adopted digital best practices in Audience Development to drive rapid growth, allow- ing it to close in on our position as the world’s best- read quality newspaper. USA Today has put such practices at the heart of its reorganization. And The Wall Street Journal recently created a new “audi- ence-engagement team,” bringing social editors and
25 data scientists together in the newsroom. “I tell most reporters, ‘Three percent of the people who want to see your work are seeing it,’” said a top editor at The Washington Post. “So if we can get that to even 4.5 percent, it’s worth the effort, it’s worth the struggle.” But at The Times, discovery, promotion and en- gagement have been pushed to the margins, typical- ly left to our business-side colleagues or handed to small teams in the newsroom. The business side still has a major role to play, but the newsroom needs to claim its seat at the table because packaging, pro- moting and sharing our journalism requires edito- rial oversight. This effort needs to be unified under a single lead- er. We recommend hiring a head of Audience De- velopment who works in the newsroom and collabo- rates with a counterpart on the business side. Indeed, in recent months, the most qualified can- didate for such a position on the business side, Mi- chael Wertheim, the former head of promotion for Upworthy, turned down the job. He explained that for anyone in that role to succeed, the newsroom PROMOTION, DISTRIBUTION TAGGING, SEARCH ENGINE OPTIMIZATION BREAKING NEWS, VIRAL HITS, PACKAGES DISCOVERY, PERSONALIZATION, EMAIL CONNECTION, EVENTS READER CONTRIBUTIONS NON- READER REPEAT READER DRIVE BY REGISTERED READER SUBSCRIBER LOYALIST OUR GOAL There are many good ideas for innovation in the newsroom, but we focused on those that will help us find more readers for more of our journalism. QUALITY JOURNALISM THE CURRENT NEWSROOM APPROACH The main newsroom strategy for attracting more readers is to produce excellent journalism. OUR FOCUS In this report, we explored additional ideas to attract new readers and deepen our connection with loyal subscribers. What Are We Trying to Do? needed to be fully committed to working with the business side to grow our audience. Audience Development is not a task we should view as a chore – the opportunities are truly excit- ing. Imagine coming back from an unplugged vaca- tion and having the best pieces you missed waiting for you. Or strolling through Rome and having an article on the best museums pop up on your phone. Or watching a year-old story go viral on social. Or having Science Times become a lively platform for expert debate. There is no single solution like home delivery that will solve the challenges of digital distribution. But our competitors have been experimenting aggres- sively, and some best practices have emerged that we will share in the following pages. We should track them closely, and adopt those that meet our standards. And we should unleash the creativity of our staff by experimenting quickly and constantly to discover next-generation solutions. “If The New York Times could get this right — could reach the right audiences for all its content — it would change the world,” said Wertheim.
26 Growing Our Audience | We recognize that “audience development” can eas- ily be dismissed as one of those “sounds-good-in- theory” notions. So we’ve packed a lot into the fol- lowing pages to show how it works in practice. We’ll provide the context for why these strategies deserve our attention, explain our current approach, assess the competitive landscape and address concerns. We’ll also offer a few key recommendations and a proposed experiment for each area. However, the details of any specific suggestion matter less than the underlying questions. Our goal is to start a dis- cussion. Improving technology provides us with more and better tools to ensure that we get our work in front of the right readers at the right place and at the right time. But we still ask too much of readers — they must navigate a website and apps that are modeled on our print structure. We need to think more about resurfacing evergreen content, organizing and pack- aging our work in more useful ways and pushing rel- evant content to readers. And to power these efforts, we should invest more in the unglamorous but es- sential work of tagging and structuring data. Our Proposals, In Brief 1. DISCOVERY We need to be better advocates of our own work. This means creating newsroom structures to make sure our most important work has maximum readership and impact. And it means identifying and sharing best practices at the ground level, and encouraging reporters and editors to promote their stories. In addition, we must take the process of optimization, for search and social, more seriously and ensure we are updating our tools and workflow along with our changing needs. 2. PROMOTION Our readers are perhaps our greatest untapped re- source. Deepening our connection with them both online and offline is critical in a world where content so often reaches its broadest audience on the backs of other readers. And many readers have come to expect a two-way relationship with us, so they can engage with our journalism and our journalists. This means the newsroom as a whole must take the reins in pursuing user-generated content, events and other forms of engagement in a way that reflects our standards and values. 3.CONNECTION Our readers’ habits are changing faster than ever. How can we make sure our news is reaching them in the digital age?
27 The Times produces more than 300 URLs every day. Because of this bounty, readers easily miss stories and features. This has long been true for readers who come to our home page, because of limited real estate and constantly shifting presentation. This is also true on our mobile apps, where a tiny screen makes it even harder to sift through our offerings. The readers who don’t come to us at all — and in- stead expect us to reach them through social media and our alerts — have even less of an appreciation of the richness of our work. A more reader-centric approach to packaging and surfacing our journalism offers us a huge opportu- nity to extend our reach. Exploiting better web and mobile tools will also help us get each story to every reader who might want to see it. We need to make better use of these tools and tactics because the current structures for organiz- ing our digital journalism, many of which are based on the traditions and limitations of print, are losing potency. Traffic to the home page has been declin- ing, month after month, for years. Traffic to sec- tion fronts is negligible. Traffic on our mobile apps, which are mostly downstream replicas of our home page and section fronts, has declined as well. One great example of the power of a new tool for connecting with readers is our news alert system, which now reaches as many as 13.5 million people, about a dozen times our print subscriber base. Here are four opportunities for getting more read- ers for the work we’re already producing, with a proposed experiment for each idea to make it more concrete. SOCIAL POWER It’s not just The Times. The entire digital media industry is seeing a big shift in behavior. Reader visits to home pages are declining while traffic from social media is rising. (­Source: BuzzFeed) Social ReferralsHome Page JAN 2013 20 0 40 60 80 100 % of Visitors DEC 2013 Social Facebook Other Portals Search News Sites (1.5%) Total Internet traffic by type of site. 1 Discovery
28 Growing Our Audience | Discovery On Oscar night, The Times tweeted a 161-year-old story about Solomon Northup, whose memoir was the basis for “12 Years a Slave.” After it started going viral on social media, Gawker pounced, and quickly fashioned a story based on excerpts from our piece. It ended up being one of their best-read items of the year. But little of that traffic came to us. In a digital world, our rich archive offers one of our clearest advantages over new competitors. As of the printing of this report, we have 14,723,933 ar- ticles, dating back to 1851, that can be resurfaced in useful or timely ways. But we rarely think to mine our archive, largely because we are so focused on news and new features. “You have a huge advantage,” said Henry Blodget, the founder of Business Insider. “You have a tre- mendous amount of high-quality content that you have a perpetual license to.” The Cooking team is providing a fresh reminder of our treasure trove of evergreen content. For de- cades, we published and promoted a handful of new recipes each week. The new Cooking product better reflects the fact that recipes are timeless and best or- ganized in other ways: by meal, ingredients, season and our critics’ favorites. The opportunities are not limited to service jour- nalism. We can be both a daily newsletter and a li- brary — offering news every day, as well as providing context, relevance and timeless works of journalism. In breaking news and long-running stories, read- ers can struggle to quickly get up to speed or to un- derstand why something matters. Many of our com- petitors are tackling this challenge, just as we did with Times Topics. “Journalists are better than ever at telling people what’s happening, but not nearly good enough at giving them the crucial contextual information nec- essary to understand what’s happened,” said Ezra Klein, in announcing his new venture at Vox Media. “We treat the emphasis on the newness of informa- tion as an important virtue rather than a painful compromise.” Opportunity: Evergreen GAWKERED When this 161-year-old Times story started going viral on Oscar night, Gawker did what Gawker does —it repackaged our content and won huge traffic gains.
29 Our committee ran a study of article readership during the last six months of 2013. Arts and culture stories were among those that were consistently read long after their publication dates, even though they can be difficult to find once they are more than a few days old. A new approach would be to take cultural and life- style content — about books, museums, food, the- ater — and organize it more by relevance than by publication date. Erik Piepenburg, the web producer for theater, noted that visitors coming to us for the “Wicked” theater review can’t easily find it because we re- viewed it a long time ago. But that review is still rel- evant to the many readers who are considering buy- ing tickets this week. One possible solution, envisioned by Ben Koski and Erik Hinton of our Interactive News team, is to add landing pages for our cultural content that are more like guides. These pages would supplement, not replace, our existing arts pages. Optimized for search and social, these guides would serve the reader who wants to use us as a more timeless resource. The best opportunities are in areas where The Times has comprehensive coverage, where informa- tion doesn’t need to be updated regularly, and where competitors haven’t saturated the market. For now, museums, books and theater fit that description. Travel and music would present significantly more hurdles. “So far, there’s been much enthusiasm from the desks,” said Koski. “But getting these on the official agenda to be built and made real is an ongoing chal- lenge. It’s hard for ideas like these to compete with enterprise, major events and story work.” Experiment: Culture Guides DAYS 20 6040 80 100 120 140 160 180 DAYS1 10% 20% 30% 40% % OF TOTAL VIEWS PAGE VIEWS 2000 4000 6000 8000 20 6040 80 100 120 140 160 1801 Traffic on most of our stories falls dramatically after the first day they’re published. But enterprise and feature stories can have long lives. For example, Libby Rosenthal’s colonoscopy story from last year, below, attracted new readers months after it was published. GIFTS THAT KEEP ON GIVING
30 Growing Our Audience | Discovery THE ART OF CURATION The Times dominates coverage of books, museums and theater. And the evergreen nature of those subjects makes them a natural for being repackaged as culture guides. Here are two proposals from the Interactive News department.
31 If you were to ask most people in the newsroom about how The New York Times experiments, they might talk about a new story format like “Snowfall” or a recent crowdsourcing effort like “Paying Till It Hurts.” But “experimentation” is about much more than simply trying something new. Real experimentation is about adopting a rigor- ous, scientific method for proving new concepts and constantly tweaking them to be as successful as pos- sible. This is how every major digital innovator — in- cluding Google and Amazon — works today. Unlike a printed newspaper (which is polished to near-perfection and “launched” once a day), a digital experiment should be released quickly and refined through a cycle of continuous improvement ­— mea- suring performance, studying results, shuttering losers and building on winners. The Verge, for ex- ample, redesigned its home page 53 times in two years. We must push back against our perfectionist impulses. Though our journalism always needs to be polished, our other efforts can have some rough edges as we look for new ways to reach our readers. Best Practices In Experimenting KEY EXPERIMENTS IN PROGRESS: NYT Now: Our first experiment in packaging news specifically for a mobile audience. NY Today: An ongoing experiment to assess read- ers’ appetite for tip sheets. Cooking: An experiment to build a world-class service-journalism app, leveraging the archive. Watching: An experiment in curating a news feed on our homepage. NYT Now & Watching.
32 Growing Our Audience | Discovery Launch efforts quickly, then iterate. We often hold back stories for publication, as we should, because they’re “not quite there yet.” Outside our journalism, though, we can adopt the “minimal viable product” model, which calls for launching something in a more basic form so that we can start getting feedback from users and improve it over time. Set goals and track progress. Every new project should be launched with a specific goal and met- ric for success. In many cases, our main goal is high-quality journalism. But readership and en- gagement are usually important, too. All man- agers should be clear on what a new initiative is aiming to accomplish. Editors in charge of exper- iments should track their progress in real time. Reward experimentation. Currently, the risk of failing greatly outweighs the reward of succeed- ing at The Times. We must reward people who show initiative, even when their experiments fail. Share lessons from both successes and failures. We need to do a better job of communicating our digital goals, and sharing what we know about best practices to achieve them. No project should be declared a success, or shuttered, without a de- brief on what we’ve learned, so that we can apply those insights more broadly. A LIST OF BEST PRACTICES FOR EXPERIMENTATION: Kill off mediocre efforts. To free up resources for new initiatives, we need to be quicker and smart- er about pulling resources from efforts that aren’t working. And we must do it in a way that is trans- parent so that people understand the reasons be- hind the decision, so that they will be willing to experiment again. Plan for “version 2.0” and beyond. Often, the re- source plan for new projects stops at launch. As we learn from readers about what is working and not working, we have to continue our efforts to refine and develop our new initiatives. Make it easier to launch an experiment than to block one. At many companies, people are able to test ideas on a small percentage of users with mid-level approval. Elsewhere, you must write a memo about why an experiment should not hap- pen in order to block it. Our journalistic stan- dards always need to be protected, but tradition alone shouldn’t be a justification for blocking ex- periments. testING, TESTING Earlier this year, the newsroom analytics team conducted an “A/B Test” on a science article, showing different headlines and photos to readers. Of the options below, number three performed best. More important, it showed that this kind of test is possible — and that The Times should use it as another tool to drive traffic to our journalism. 1 The Color Of Pressure 2 The Color Of Pressure 3 The Big Squeeze 4 The Big Squeeze
33 Readers who visit our site for the first time natu- rally might assume that if they click on “New York,” they’re likely to find restaurant reviews, theater re- views, local sports coverage, museum coverage or real estate coverage. That assumption would be wrong, of course. This is but one example of the many opportuni- ties we have for repackaging our content so that it’s more useful, relevant and shareable for readers. We can point to successes already. On a whim, Andrew Phelps created a Flipboard magazine of our most important obits of the year and it became the best-read collection in the history of the platform. Other colleagues have tackled similar projects to re- package our work. But because our systems are dif- ficult for them experiment on, they usually turn to Flipboard, Pinterest and other sites. “It’s crazy that we’re doing this on a third-party platform and letting them reap many of the bene- fits,” said a senior digital editor. NOTABLE EXPERIMENTS Millions of people flipped through this collection of New York Times obits, developed on a whim by Andrew Phelps. Opportunity: Packaging Flipboard has created a tool that lets readers make collections with content on their app, including stories from The Times.
34 Growing Our Audience | Discovery Our committee ran a couple of experiments with repackaging and found that even old content can generate significant traffic without ever appearing on the home page. The first was a page featuring a collection of nine videos related to love, chosen from our archives by the weddings editor, for Valentine’s Day. The sec- ond was a collection of Nick Kristof articles and col- umns from the archives about sex trafficking. We created no new articles, only new packaging. We explicitly requested that they be kept off the home page and then we launched a strategic campaign to promote the pages elsewhere. The result? Both were huge hits, exclusively because our readers shared them on social. The video unit, eager to repeat those wins, is already pushing to create a template. Sasha Koren, our social and community editor, said these collections forced a change in thinking about what’s new. “Maybe it’s, ‘what’s new to some- one now,’” Koren said. “It’s still timely, it’s still rel- evant to this moment, it’s not dated.” Collections would allow us to curate or automati- cally group our content in many different ways: by section, topic, byline, etc. They can be used to put a new frame around old content and connect the dots between pieces written over time in a way that day-to-day coverage typically does not. A Collections format is being developed by Product and Design to improve our ability to or- ganize content in ways that are more intuitive and useful. The newsroom should support that work and consider creating a tool for reporters, web produc- ers, video journalists and editors — and eventually readers — to create collections and repackage our content in ways beyond the usual news format. For example, we could package stories about Putin’s tightening grip on Russia, or the best round- up of climate-science explainers, or service pieces about the science of sleep, or all the four-star res- taurant reviews from the last year. Currently, these TIMELY AND TIMELESS For Valentine’s Day, we worked with our weddings editor and other colleagues around the building to repackage nine videos from our archives. The result: a big hit with readers. Experiment: Collections types of collections are created almost exclusively off-site, on Flipboard. The key to making Collections scalable is for the newsroom to introduce a widget-like tool that any reporter or editor could use to drag and drop stories and photos. (The R&D department and, more re- cently, New Products have already built such tools.) Because Collections are created with content that has already been vetted and published, they require few resources and limited oversight. If our Collection tool were intuitive and easy to use, we could encourage readers to drag and drop a group of stories into their own collections, which they could then share. This is an opportunity to em- power readers to make something on our site with less risk to our brand.
35 New Again (And Popular) The “Inside the Brothels” collection that we devel- oped with Nick Kristof’s help provides a case study in how, without too much effort, we can repackage material in our archives and make it relevant again. Until we published “Inside the Brothels,” the seven stories in the collection had not drawn any traffic in years. But, as the chart at bottom left shows, all the stories saw a spike in visits after be- ing repackaged, with several getting more traffic than a typical new story on the day it’s published. NEW TRAFFIC “Inside the Brothels” rose to the No. 8 most- viewed article on launch day, and it sustained its traffic several days longer than typical daily stories. Over six days, the traffic to the collection page and the associated articles totaled 468,106 page views. Very few articles from a typical day’s paper will garner this much traffic in a month. ENGAGED READERS Articles in the “Inside the Brothels” collection were among those that readers spent the most time with that day. The 1996 Kristof article in our collection was third on this list, with the average user spending 2 minutes, 35 seconds. THE RECIRCULATION EFFECT “Recirculation” refers to a story’s effectiveness in driving readers to other stories, as opposed to their leaving the site. On launch day, “Inside the Brothels” ranked No. 1 on the recirculation list. LESSONS LEARNED Evergreen content is appealing to readers if resurfaced in a way that is smart. Such work can find a large audience without home page attention. The newsroom can fall into old habits about ex- periments like this one, raising concerns about turf, quality control and precedents. One-offs are laborious, so we should focus on making such efforts replicable and scalable. APR 14, 1996 JAN 21, 2004 MAR 26, 2006 APR 22, 2007 NOV 18, 2010 MAR 31, 2012 OCT 12, 2013 Pub Date Article Page Views Children For Sale Bargaining For Freedom A Woman Without [...] The 21st Century Slave [...] A Woman. A Prostitute. [...] Sex Trafficking Comes [...] From the Brothels [...] Collection Page TOTAL 37,803 29,238 21,962 14,075 33,240 24,255 25,230 282,303 468,106
36 Growing Our Audience | Discovery Balancing Act: One-offs vs. Replicability The surprising popularity of The Times dialect quiz — the most popular piece of content in the paper’s history, with more than 21 million page views — prompted weeks of internal discussions about ways to build on that remarkable success. But over at BuzzFeed, they were busy perfecting a template so they could pump out quiz after quiz after quiz. “We wanted to have interactive games,” explained one BuzzFeed editor, “but not have the developers build them every time, so that we could experiment freely.” This contrast helps illustrate one of the biggest obstacles to our digital success. We have a tendency to pour resources into big one-time projects and work through the one-time fixes needed to create them, and overlook the less glamorous work of creating tools, templates and permanent fixes that cumulatively can have a bigger im- pact by saving our digital journalists time and elevating the whole report. We greatly un- dervalue replicability. Driven in part by the success of Snowfall, we have gone to extraordinary lengths in recent years to sup- port huge single-story efforts. The ambitions of such projects are central to our brand. But Graphics, In- teractive, Design and Social are spending a dispro- portionate amount of time on these labor-intensive one-offs. Meanwhile, we have repeatedly put off making the necessary improvements to allow our graphics to appear on mobile. That runs counter to the approach at so many of our digital competitors. “We are focused on build- ing tools to create Snowfalls everyday, and getting them as close to reporters as possible,” said Kevin Delaney, editor of Quartz, which is known for inno- vative storytelling formats. “I’d rather have a Snow- fall builder than a Snowfall.” When we have created tools, the benefits are clear. For example, the slideshow tool has become one of our most popular features, the dashboard sys- tem has elevated our ability to respond to breaking news, and our blog platforms helped train an entire generation of Times reporters and editors to write for the web. “It’s actually been a long time since we had platform innovation on that scale,” said Nathan Ashby-Kuhlman. Several digital leaders in the newsroom said they believe we need to reprioritize the kind of incremen- tal improvements that can elevate the whole report and allow our journalists to, for example, build their own collections from our archives. “We’ve reached a point now where platform innovation is a require- ment,” said one editor. We also need to prioritize sustain- able solutions over time-consuming hacks, short-term fixes and work- arounds to problems that emerge repeatedly, sometimes daily. For example, platform editors spend hours on Sunday mornings trying to fix stories that don’t work on mobile devices. They know the problems that will emerge but are unable to get the Technology re- sources to fix them. Since the newsroom does not control those resources, it is very difficult to priori- tize even small changes that cause trouble day after day. Our competitors, particularly digital-native ones, treat platform innovation as a core function. Vox and First Look Media have lured talent with the pitch that they have built the tools and templates to elevate journalists. That was the advantage that BuzzFeed C.E.O. Jonah Peretti cited in a recent company memo, saying that the company had spent years investing in formats, analytics, optimization and testing frameworks. “This is a massive invest- ment that is very difficult to replicate,” he said. Tools, templates and permanent fixes can elevate the whole report.
37 We already personalize our content for individual readers in subtle ways: a front-page story about New York may be substituted for a National story, the global home page curates our news report with an international sensibility, and the iPad app grays out the stories you’ve already read. Embracing personalization does not mean flip- ping a switch that gives different stories to every person. Nor should it. Research shows that readers come to us in part to find out what we consider the top stories of the day. But personalization offers countless opportunities to surface content in smarter ways. It means using technology to ensure that the right stories are find- ing the right readers in the right places at the right times. For example, letting you know when you’re walk- ing by a restaurant we just reviewed; knowing that you prefer to get stories by email; and making sure you never miss a story about your alma mater. Even with the home page there is an opportunity for a measured approach — in effect, serve everyone the same dinner but at least give them their favorite desserts. For basketball fans who never read about baseball, that means showing them the story about the Knicks game rather than the Yankees game (un- less the baseball story has been flagged as impor- tant, such as a story on a perfect game). Readers have come to expect this personalization. Facebook’s new Paper app, for example, is built on news feeds tailored to each user. Yahoo has recently used personalization technology to drive growth in news readership. Other media sites, like BuzzFeed and The Wash- ington Post, alter what readers see based on how they arrive on their sites. For example, they will look at data in real time to track which stories are draw- ing readers from Twitter, and then they show those same stories to other people who visit from Twitter. This practice tends to keep them reading more sto- ries. In the absence of newsroom input, the business side has been leading our approach to personaliza- tion. Currently, our main tool for personalizing content is our “Recommended For You” tab, which is not up to our standards and has provoked many reader complaints. The list occupies a prominent spot on our homepage but the newsroom has not been very involved in discussions. As a result, the formula we use offers content that would otherwise be hid- den on the site — but it often shows smaller-bore items. “It’s possible we’re using the entirely wrong algorithm,” said Boris Chen, a data scientist on The Times’s personalization team. But editors, he said, must help him understand what is wrong so he can create a better alternative. Another significant tool for personalization — a section of the home page for content that readers missed but would likely want to see, based on their reading patterns — is being planned by Design for NYT5 and the iPhone app. The newsroom should consider devoting more at- tention to these new initiatives. And the newsroom should clarify how much personalization we want on our home page and on our apps. Until then, the uncertainty about what is acceptable will limit our creativity and initiative on this front. Opportunity: Personalization
38 Growing Our Audience | Discovery A BETTER ENGINE Readers have come to expect smart personalization online. But our current recommendation engine, right, uses an algorithm to serve up content that leaves many readers puzzled about our judgment. “Based on what The New York Times thinks I’m interested in, I am not a fun person,” wrote Margaret Sullivan, our public editor. The Times is planning to add other features that help personalize the reading experience in more subtle ways. One example, below, which we’ve illustrated with the help of a gray box, would show individual readers the stories they missed on the home page since their last visit. Though all readers would see the same top news stories, the other articles we show them would be customized to reflect what they haven’t seen.
39 We’ve heard time and again that younger readers are moving away from browsing and that they in- creasingly expect news to come to them, on social, through alerts and through personalization. There is a sense that “if something is important, it will find me.” We are far behind in adjusting to these trends. We could create a “follow” button that offers read- ers a variety of ways to curate and receive their own news feeds, ensuring they never miss a Modern Love or Maureen Dowd column. With a single click, their favorite topics, features and writers could automati- cally be collected in a Following Inbox. We could also offer readers the opportunity to have alerts about new stories sent to their phone or email. Until the feature was recently discontinued as part of the NYT5 redesign, the only way for Times read- ers to be notified of new favorites was by email. This feature was hard to find, hidden at the bottom of stories below the comment section, and required readers to plow through multiple sign-up pages. Even so, it had 338,000 users and unusually high engagement rates. Some technically savvy readers are so eager not to miss stories that they have even written code so that certain stories are sent to them automatically. Such “following” features have been critical to the success of YouTube, Spotify and Twitter. But increasingly Circa, Breaking News, The Verge and other digital outlets are doing this with news. The Design and Product teams have been exploring such a feature for columnists, and should have the news- room’s support. Experiment: Following TOUGH AUDIENCE We’ve always had a sense that readers were loyal followers of their favorite columnists. And the paper makes it easy to catch certain bylines (Monday morning? Time for David Carr). On the Internet, however, readers are far more fickle. The accompanying charts show that readers don’t come back often to the same columnist. The quality of their work isn’t the issue. Making it easier for readers to discover what they already like – by creating a “follow” feature for each columnist, for example – could make these charts look very different. 50 STORIES N° OF STORIES 2051 10 15 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 20% A.O. Scott Melissa Clark David Carr Floyd Norris Holland Cotter Ginia Bellafante 40% 60% 80% 100% OF READERS*0% 50% 40% 30% 20% 10% 0% % OF READERS**This data is based on registered users and subscribers 1 2 3 4 5 6-10 11-20 21+ Paul Krugman Gail Collins Maureen Dowd David Brooks Joe Nocera Bill Keller
40 Growing Our Audience | Discovery BUILDING A FOLLOWING TOP STORIES President Obama’s gesture to Raúl Castro of Cuba at the memorial for Nelson Mandela instantly raised questions about its deeper meaning. Will Handshake With Castro Lead to Headache for Obama? POLITICS INVESTIGATIVE Nelson Mandela’s memorial service in Soweto, South Af- rica, drew a remarkable crowd of global V.I.P.’s, including President Obama and at least 91 other heads of state and The Great and The Humble Honor Mandela MANDELA FOLLOWING 14 TODAY The Italian Parliament has been deadlocked on major changes for years, unable or unwilling to enact bills to overhaul the political system or unshackle the economy, which has barely grown in two decades. Rise of Young Leaders Signals a Mandate for Political Change in Italy ITALY Dasani, one of New York’s 22,000 homeless chil- dren, lives on the margins of a gentrified city. A Neighborhood’s Profound Divide INVISIBLE CHILD Melissa Clark serves a sophisticated roasted apple, shallot and blue cheese tart at her holiday cocktail party. Roasted Apple and Blue Cheese Tart MELISSA CLARK Restaurant Review: Sushi Naka- zawa in the West Village The Student Does the Master Proud RESTAURANT REVIEWS Early results for large-scale e-learning courses are disap- pointing, forcing a rethinking of how college instruction can best You’ve read 4 Melissa Clark Articles this month. Tap to Follow her. METRO NORTH UPDATE: 3 dead and 60 wounded. At least 6 others in critical condition. GET LIVE UPDATES The NYTimes will keep covering the Metro North Crash over the next few hours as the news unfolds. BREAKINGBREAKING: Metro North Train Crashes in the Bronx. A news alert arrives for breaking news. These are some examples of features we could add to our mobile app to help readers follow their favorite topics, bylines and stories. Tapping on the alert brings the reader to a developing story. At the end of the article, the reader is prompted with the option of following the story. The reader is notified of new updates.
41 “The Paper of Record,” Version 2.0 A century ago, The Times began the laborious pro- cess of identifying and tagging the major and mi- nor topics and characters of every story it produced. Each year, it compiled these listings in the massive “New York Times Index,” the only complete index of a U.S. newspaper. This effort made us indispens- able to librarians, historians and academics. And it earned us a nickname: “The Paper of Record.” The many opportunities described in this report — and others that will only become clear over time — require us to focus on this humble art we helped pioneer, which we still call “tagging.” In the digital world, tagging is a type of structured data — the in- formation that allows things to be searched and sorted and made useful for analysis and innova- tion. Some of the most success- ful Internet companies, including Netflix, Facebook and Pandora, have so much structured data — by tagging dozens or even hundreds of different ele- ments of every movie, song and article — that they have turned the science of surfacing the right piece of content at the right time into the core of thriving businesses. The Times, however, hasn’t updated its structured data to meet the changing demands of our digital age and is falling far behind as a result. Without better tagging, we are hamstrung in our ability to allow readers to follow developing stories, discover nearby restaurants that we have reviewed or even have our photos show up on search engines. “Everyone forgets about metadata,” said John O’Donovan, the chief technology officer for The Financial Times. “They think they can just make stuff and then forget about how it is organized in terms of how you describe your content. But all your assets are useless to you unless you have metadata — your archive is full of stuff that is of no value because you can’t find it and don’t know what it’s about.” And here is an ugly truth about structured data: there are substantial costs to waiting. For example, because our recipes were never properly tagged by ingredients and cooking time, we floundered about for 15 years trying to figure out how to create a useful recipe database. We can do it now, but only after spending a huge sum to ret- roactively structure the data. The lack of structured data also helps explain why we are unable to auto- mate the sale of our photos and why we continually struggle to attain higher rankings on search engines. We need to reclaim our industry- leading position, but right now our needs are far more basic. We must expand the structured data we cre- ate, which is still defined by the needs of the Times Index rather than our modern digital capabili- ties. For example, at a time when nearly 60 percent of our readers access us via mo- bile devices, we are missing an opportunity to serve up content that’s relevant to their locations because we are not tagging stories with geographic coordi- nates. The Boston Globe is among the many publi- cations doing this. Similarly, to enable readers to follow updates on running news stories, we need to be using tags that tie together articles, photos, and videos about a news event, like “Boston Marathon Bombing.” It took seven years for us to start tagging stories “September 11.” “We never made a tag for Benghazi, and I wish we had because the story just won’t die,” said Kristi Reilly of our Archive, Metadata and Search team. Her boss, Evan Sandhaus, framed the opportunity more strongly: “We don’t tag the one thing” — news events — “that people use to navigate the news.” Our competitors are a full step ahead of us in us- ing structured data. The Washington Post and The The structured data we create is still defined by the Times Index.
42 Growing Our Audience | Discovery NEW TAG BIGGER DATA SAMPLE TAGS POTENTIAL BENEFIT Surface new and old content relevant to readers’ locations, particularly for mobile usage. Geographic location of story content Gramercy Restaurant 40.7386° N, 73.9885° W Surface old content in a smart way, including adding sophistication to our recommendation engines and easier ways for editors to feature relevant older stories. Timeliness Timely forever Timely for a year Timely for a month Timely for a day Make better use of evergreen content well after publica- tion. Conduct more granular analysis of users’ reading behavior. Story type Breaking news Profile News analysis Enable readers to follow ongoing stories and news events. Better organize our archives. Story threads Crisis in Ukraine Improve content discovery by letting users surface stories based on their mood. Story tone Uplifting Serious Display photos in search results on our site and our apps. Tagging photos by topic would improve the ranking of our content in search results. Photos: topics Ukraine Viktor Yanukovych Create a ‘news in photos’ experience that lets users start with a photo and click through to a related article. Photos: articles where photo appeared “A Kiev Question: What Became of the Missing?” Sell prints of all rights-cleared photos on our site.Photos: usage rights Rights cleared No resale rights Here are some examples of structured data that would allow us to make better use of our content: Wall Street Journal use it for insight into how read- ers are using their websites. At Circa, each article is broken into “atoms of news,” such as facts, quotes, and statistics. That allows editors to quickly surface relevant content and context during breaking news. Expanding our structured data capabilities would require us to address some technology and work- flow issues. Notably, it would put greater demands on our copy editors, web producers and librarians. That means we may need to build out those teams, and we will certainly need to go to great lengths to explain how crucial this effort is to our long-term success. Every day we wait, we fall further behind our competitors. The Times considered increasing its tagging efforts in 2010 and passed. The cost of catching up has only grown.
43 At The Times, we generally like to let our work speak for itself. We’re not ones to brag. Our competitors have no such qualms, and many are doing a better job of getting their journalism in front of new readers through aggressive story pro- motion. They regard this as a core function of re- porters and editors, and they react with amazement that the same is not true here. “A lot of the institutions that are doing well are marketing themselves well,” said Amanda Michel, head of social media for The Guardian. “People may think that’s dirty, but it’s reality.” The Guardian has a promotion team inside the newsroom and an ambitious social strategy that has helped rapidly expand its readership in the United States. The Huffington Post expects all reporters and editors to be fully fluent in social media, includ- ing the kinds of headlines and photos that tend to perform best on different platforms. The Atlantic and its digital properties expect reporters to pro- mote their own work and mine traffic numbers to look for best practices. Even ProPublica, that bastion of old-school jour- nalism values, goes to extraordinary lengths to give stories a boost. An editor meets with search, social and public relations specialists to develop a promo- tion strategy for every story. And reporters must submit five tweets along with each story they file. By contrast, our approach is muted. After we spent more than a year producing a signature piece of journalism — the “Invisible Child” series — we alerted our marketing and PR colleagues too late for them to do any promotion ahead of time. The reporter didn’t tweet about it for two days. (Though the pieces still had massive reach and impact, we don’t know how many more readers we could have attracted with additional effort.) “I don’t feel like we sit down when we have a big project, a big story, and say, ‘How do we roll this out?’” said one top editor. “It would require an en- tirely different way of thinking. It would be about saying, ‘This is what is running on Sunday.’” A key tool is social media. Our institutional ac- counts reach tens of millions of people and the ac- counts of individual reporters and editors reach mil- lions more. The size of our social team reflects our eagerness to succeed in this arena. But with less than 10 percent of our digital traffic coming to us through social media we are still figuring out how to best engage readers. The percentage of readers who visit BuzzFeed through social, for example, is more than six times greater than at The Times. They have learned, among other things, that a great Facebook post has become a better promotional device than a head- line and that the impact of social is even greater on mobile. Many outlets place a team in the newsroom to track the most popular stories in real time. As those stories spike, the team helps desks take steps to draw more traffic and to keep visitors on the site longer. Other sites also look for unexpectedly poor performers and repackage them to give them a lift. Reuters, for instance, recently hired two employees to scour the site to find up to seven hidden gems per day, which they then repackage and republish 2 Promotion
44 Growing Our Audience | Promotion NEW TOOLS Promotion doesn’t just mean using social media sites like Twitter and Facebook. Email and search are also powerful drivers of traffic. Another is optimization, the use of specialized tools and tactics to draw readers and keep them reading. At competitors, this is done story by story and platform by platform, before and after publication. The dialect quiz had 21 million visits and still gets around 10,000 per day. But the simply designed page did little to keep visitors on our site. Here are some features that we could have added to help the quiz drive more traffic to other parts of the site. to give them a second chance. We need to create structures inside the newsroom that broaden the reach and impact of our most im- portant work. In addition, we need to identify and share best practices at the ground level so that re- porters and editors feel encouraged and empowered to promote their own work. And we need to focus more attention on the be- hind-the-scenes process of optimization. Just add- ing structured data, for example, immediately in- creased traffic to our recipes from search engines by 52 percent. Companies like Huffington Post and BuzzFeed have, in just a few years, eclipsed our traffic by building best practices for search and social into their workflow. For example, at The Huffington Post, a story cannot be published unless it has a photo, a search headline, a tweet and a Facebook post. Now The Huffington Post regularly outperforms us in these areas — sometimes even with our own content. An executive there described watching their aggregation outperform our original content after Nelson Mandela’s death. “You guys got crushed,” he said. “I was queasy watching the numbers. I’m not proud of this. But this is your competition. You should defend the digital pick-pockets from steal- ing your stuff with better headlines, better social.” Other competitors, like The Atlantic and Politico, are also using emails as direct channels to readers. This basic tool has become one of the most popular and efficient ways to cut through all the noise of the social web and reach readers directly. The Times is reaching 6.5 million readers by email, even though this tool has largely been treated as an afterthought. Sign up for emails to future New York Times quizzes. Ask a question of the professors behind the quiz, Bert Vaux and Scott Golder. Q&A Add a link to NYT home page. Add a related article. Add a form where readers can sign up to receive notices about future quizzes. Add a link to a social site that is driving heavy traffic to this feature. Add a Q&A.
45 GOING MOBILE Most of the social networks’ traffic comes from smartphones. That’s why our competitors say the key to winning mobile is to win on social. PINTEREST TWITTER FACEBOOK Mobile Traffic Web Traffic FAN BASE The number of Facebook followers counts for a lot. But a more telling indicator of reader engagement is how many of them interact with content, by posting comments and “liking” stories. By this measure, many of our competitors are doing better than us. NYTimes CNN Fox News Huffington Post NPR Washington Post USA Today 0 2,5M 5M 7,5M % of engaged 52 19 16 13 8 5 3 Number of fans Number of ‘engaged fans’ Source: BuzzFeed Our Twitter account is run by the newsroom. Our Facebook account is run by the business side. This unwieldy structure highlights a problem that has bedeviled our promotion efforts. Even though audience development is the kind of work that should be shared across the company, it instead falls into silos, with marketing, public relations, search, and social all answering to different bosses and rarely collaborating. These departments should work together on pro- motion strategies, such as publicizing big stories before and after they are published. We also need to change our tools and workflows to optimize our content for search and social, and exploit other di- rect channels to readers, such as email. There is a widely held assumption in the news- room that promotion is mostly done by the social team. But the team has framed its mission most- ly around using social media as a reporting tool, rather than as a tool for audience development. This approach was an important first step to help the newsroom start exploring social media. But today it means that we are mostly leaving the larger promo- tion question unaddressed. Though many of our competitors also use social for reporting, they mainly view it as an audience development tool. They told us they also use it as a hotbed of experimentation because platforms and user behavior change so quickly. At The Times, the social team collects less data and is less integrated with the rest of the newsroom than at our competitors, hampering our efforts to identify and spread best practices. Others have paired social editors with data experts and then ag- gressively spread lessons through their newsrooms. “When we figured out the Facebook algorithm and that Facebook mattered more than Twitter, traffic exploded,” said Jacob Weisberg of Slate. Opportunity: Institutional Promotion
46 Growing Our Audience | Promotion Experiment: Promotion Squad We could form a promotional team of experts in the newsroom to focus on building and executing strategies for extending the reach of our most im- portant work. The model used by ProPublica is instructive, with a team that creates a specific strategy for each story in advance of its publication. The team includes an expert to focus on ways to boost a story on search through headlines, links and other tactics; a social editor who decides which platforms are best for the story and then finds influential people to help spread LESSONS LEARNED The Magazine promotion experiment was not a success. Here are three lessons we learned. 1. There were disagreements about strategy and no clear leader to resolve them. 2. The promotion specialists seemed unclear about the tools at their disposal, so they gravitated to conservative approaches they knew best. 3. Decisions were made without data, which affected both setting goals and measuring outcomes. the word; a marketer who reaches out through phone calls or emails to other media outlets, as well as organizations that are interested in the topic. The story editor also participates to ensure the journal- ism is being promoted appropriately. And a data analyst evaluates the impact of the promotion. Our committee pulled together such a team from across departments for an experiment with The New York Times Magazine for the February “Voy- ages” issue. We let them run the experiment while we participated as observers. The traffic figures were underwhelming — actually decreasing from the previous year — and the process had numerous stumbles. These results should be instructive for any future efforts.
47 The Times made a smart decision when it decided not to establish rules for using social media, prefer- ring instead to trust reporters and editors to exer- cise their judgment. We gave people the room to ex- periment and adapt to developing mediums. There are no rules, but no real guidance, either. We need to explicitly urge reporters and editors to promote their work and we need to thank those who make the extra effort. Interest in and aptitude for social media should not be required — just as we don’t expect every reporter to be a great writer — but it should be a factor. And we need to help journalists raise their profiles on social by sharing best practic- es. Our journalists want maximum readership and impact but many don’t know how to use social me- dia effectively. Content promotion needs to become more integrated into each desk’s daily workflow. The notion that journalists should be their own promoters has become a bedrock principle at our competitors. For example, Dan Colarusso, executive editor of Reuters Digital, said, “All web editors en- gage on social and are also tasked with identifying related communities and seeding their content.” Other places test approaches to social engage- ment and then actively disseminate the results. That taps into reporters’ competitive instincts, and raises everyone’s game. Reporters and editors are eager to do what is asked of them, as long as they have clarity on both how and why — as well as some assurance that the extra effort will be rewarded. Right now, they are unsure of whether spending time on social repre- sents doing work or avoiding it. For example, A.O. Scott said that his film reviews occasionally get an outsize reaction on social. He is torn between engaging with readers and moving on to the next story. “It raises the question, when is pushing it forward the better substitute for doing more work?” There are countless examples of smart social and community efforts around the building. KJ Dell’Antonia, our Motherlode blogger, spends about an hour every day replying to commenters. Gina Ko- lata writes back to all readers who email her. Chris Chivers makes time, even in war zones, to manage social accounts on eight different platforms. All of these reporters complained that the tactics they use to reach readers are one-offs. They all ex- pressed hope that the broader newsroom could be given tools and support to help journalists connect with their audiences. One approach would be to create an “impact tool- box” and train an editor on each desk to use it. The toolbox would provide strategy, tactics and tem- plates for increasing the reach of an article before and after it’s published. Over time, the editor could teach others. There is compelling evidence that these best prac- tices can be taught. Many of the reporters who are best at social promotion — such as Nick Kristof, Nick Bilton, C.J. Chivers, David Carr and Charles Duhigg — learned these skills from their publishers as part of their book-promotion efforts. Andrea Elliott said she also received this training after signing her book deal at Random House. Opportunity: Front-Line Promotion Bearing witness, and sharing
48 Growing Our Audience | Promotion To help promote the Kristof collection, we pulled together a list of relevant, influential people who could spread the word about it on social media. This work could be automated and turned into an internal tool, which we could use to help promote our best journalism on social media. We’ve mocked Experiment: Influencers Map INFLUENCERS FILTER BY Nick Kristof opinion columnist @NickKristof 1.46 million followers Lydia Polgreen deputy foreign editor and former foreign correspondent in India, South Africa, etc @lpolgreen 38,700 followers Declan Walsh Pakistan bureau chief @declanwalsh 45,300 followers Salman Masood Pakistan correspondent @salmanmasood 18,300 followers Thomas Fuller southeast Asia correspondent @ThomasFullerNYT 4,763 followers Ellen Barry South Asia bureau chief, formerly Russia correspondent @EllenBarryNYT 10,200 followers Sheryl WuDunn co-author of “Half the Sky” @WuDunn 11,200 followers @Half account for “Half the Sky” book on the treatment of women around the world 50,500 followers Restore NYC an NGO @restorenyc 5,963 followers Change.Org an activist platform @change.org 777,000 followers Apne App an India-based NGO fighting sex-trafficking @apneaap 2,114 followers Ashley Judd actress who has spoken out against sex trafficking @ashleyjudd 202,000 followers Becca Stevens priest in Tennessee who has fought sex trafficking @RevBeccaStevens 1,354 followers Liriel Higa social media coordinator for “Half the Sky” @idiplomacy 3,161 followers Andrea Powell Executive Director & Co-Founder, FAIR Girls, non-profit that fights sex trafficking @Fair_Girls 12,200 followers Bradley Myles Executive director of Polaris Project, which fights human trafficking @Polaris_Project 28,600 followers Ken Roth executive director of Human Rights Watch, NGO @KenRoth 50,800 followers NYTIMES EXTERNAL Minky Worden director of Global Initiatives at Human Rights Watch, NGO @minkyshighjinks 5,736 followers Tom Dart Sheriff in Cook County, Illinois active in fighting sex trafficking @TomDart 2,688 Followers Lisa Goldblatt Grace head of My Life My Choice, Boston-based group fighting sex trafficking @mlmcgirls 238 followers Gary Haugen CEO of International Justice Mission @garyhaugen 21,300 followers Somaly Mam Cambodian human rights activist @somalymam 405,000 followers TOPICS: KRISTOF SEX TRAFFICKING INDIA PAKISTAN CAMBODIA up below what an influencer map for “Inside the Brothels” might look like. The work paid off. Someone we had contacted about the collection shared it on Twitter and was retweeted by Ashton Kutcher, who has 15.9 million followers.
49 The Times commands respect, conveys authority and inspires devotion. All of that is captured in the pride with which people identify themselves as de- voted Times readers. This is our huge advantage as we think more about connecting with our audience. This audience is often described as our single most underutilized resource. We can count the world’s best-informed and most influential people among our readers. And we have a platform to which many of them would be willing and honored to contribute. Yet we haven’t cracked the code for engaging with them in a way that makes our report richer. Of all the tasks we discuss in this report, the chal- lenge of connecting with and engaging readers — which extends from online comments to conferenc- es — has been the most difficult. But best practices have emerged on these fronts, as well, and many of our competitors are experimenting aggressively and pulling ahead of us. Aside from social, our main platform for engaging with readers is moderated comments, a forum that is respected for its quality but does not have wide appeal. Only a fraction of stories are opened for comments, only one percent of readers write com- ments and only three percent of readers read com- ments. Our trusted-commenter system, which we hoped would increase engagement, includes just a few hundred readers. That has prompted business- side leaders to question their value and newsroom leaders to wonder whether those resources could be better used elsewhere. Our other efforts for engaging with readers — many of which have been well-received — mostly have been one-offs. Impressive projects rarely lead to replicable tools that could be used to elevate our whole report. And our offline efforts to connect with readers, like conferences and cruises, are largely outdated replicas of competitors’ work, and we have pursued them without much newsroom input. Meanwhile, The Atlantic and The New Yorker have created sig- nature events that deepen loyalty and make money while staying true to their brands. The newsroom needs to take on these questions of connection and engagement. We are in a sub- scriber-driven business, our digital content needs to travel on the backs of readers to find new readers, and there is an appetite to know the people behind our report. We can come up with a Timesian way for connecting with our readers online and offline that deepens their loyalty. The first step is getting more comfortable with the idea of pulling back the curtain and providing readers a bit more insight into how we do our work, which will only deepen their connection to it. Outlets like NPR and The Guardian, which reach similar audiences, have used this approach to good effect. “Few places have that brand, but The New York Times does,” said Vivian Schiller, formerly of The Times and NPR, and now head of news at Twit- ter. 3 Connection
50 Growing Our Audience | Connection Our reporters and columnists are eager to connect with readers in this way but many are going to oth- er platforms to talk about the process behind their work. A recent case in point: Jon Eligon wrote a gripping first-person account on Facebook about his experience as a black reporter approaching a white supremacist in North Dakota. The good news is we are moving to capture some of this conversation. We recently launched the “What We’re Reading” email, which curates recom- mendations of good journalism from around the web from Times editors and writers. We are offering a new “story behind the story” feature for premium subscribers. Similarly, the new Opinion product is focused on fostering reader-columnist discussions. OPENING UP Readers want to connect with Times journalists — to get the back story, learn what we are reading, and join the conversation.
51 SANDBOXES The Huffington Post’s platform allows anyone to publish content on its site. Medium enhanced that model with design and curation. Storify lets users assemble Tweets and videos into storylines. User-generated content, which has provided our competitors with a low-cost way to expand their sites and deepen loyalty, has proved to be a diffi- cult challenge at The Times. But we already are home to one of the most cele- brated forums of user-generated content in publish- ing: Op-Eds. In the digital world, though, we are trailing badly behind our competitors. Many publishers have de- cided to become platforms, as well. Huffington Post and Medium have experienced huge growth in part because they have become a platform for opinion pieces and guest essays. Others, including CNN and The Journal, are moving in the same direction. They have serious quality lapses as a result, but also big wins and a growing and engaged audience. The Times has considerations our competitors don’t — namely, our brand promises readers that every- thing they has been carefully vetted. We are one of the few outlets where even comments meet this standard. But a new generation of startups is training the next generation of readers to expect participation. “Our readers do want to show off and what we could offer them is the imprimatur of greatness,” said Leslie Kaufman, who covers media. Opportunity: User-Generated Content
52 Growing Our Audience | Connection One digital strategist compared the world of online engagement to a cocktail party. Most people, she noted, don’t want to talk to strangers. They want to talk to their friends or important people. Facebook is handling the friend part of that equa- tion. The Times is well-positioned to play host to im- portant people. We receive dozens of Op-Ed submissions every day from top thinkers and leaders, and we publish only a fraction of them. Some of this is quality con- trol. But in many cases, we are simply following the constraints of print. The Times has already expanded our footprint in this area through our new video feature, Op-Docs. The quality of submissions and audience interest both have been extremely high, making Op-Docs one of our most popular and praised verticals. We should experiment with expanding our Op-Ed offerings to include specific sections and verticals, opening up our report to leaders in fields such as politics, business and culture. These guest essays, to use the more conventional term, would help The Times solidify its position as the destination for sophisticated conversation. The world’s smartest and most influential people have long been eager to write for us for the modest pay- day of $150 a piece. These are often some of our best-read works — and often provide us with world- beating scoops. Imagine if the Arts section had daily Op-Eds from leading figures in dance, theater, movies and archi- tecture. Or if David Leonhardt’s new venture includ- ed daily Op-Eds from smart minds in politics and academia. Or if the Science section became the lead- ing arena for ideas from scientists and philosophers. Controversial? Metro does this with Metropolitan Diary. Business, Sports, Styles and Book Review do this, as well, with guest essays and other user-sub- mitted features. Gina Kolata said she frequently receives well- written submissions that are too narrowly focused for the newspaper but perfect for Science. “Often I’m getting people saying, ‘Can I write an Op-ed?’ Most of their stuff goes nowhere, but if it did, there’d be an audience for it.” We would recommend starting with one or two desks and establishing best practices. Experiment: Expand Op-Eds READERS WHO WRITE The Times is an early pioneer of user-generated content. We stirred controversy in 1976 by giving bylines to readers who penned Metropolitan Diary entries. We’ve printed Op-Eds from the likes of Angelina Jolie and Vladimir Putin. And we publish letters to the editor every day.
53 Our events operation is improving but still has a long way to go to meet the standards of The New York Times. Our events are typically built around industry is- sues that are of interest to both sponsors and corpo- rate audiences. Events can be about connecting with readers as much as they are about making money. NPR has made its journalists the centerpiece of shows that travel to large concert spaces in cities and college towns. The Atlantic hosts the well-regarded and lucrative Aspen Ideas Festival. The New Yorker reportedly makes a huge amount of its annual rev- enue from its fun and engaging annual festival. There is no reason that the space filled by TED Talks, with tickets costing $7,500, could not have been created by The Times. “One of our biggest con- cerns is that someone like The Times will start a real conference program,” said a TED executive. Univision recently hosted town halls by report- ers about topics that consistently ranked as the most popular on its website and channels. “We got around 8,000 people to discuss better ways to man- age personal finances,” said Enrique Acevedo, who hosted the event. But before we pursue any of these options, the newsroom needs to be more involved in thinking through our events strategy. This is more urgent because in recent years the events industry has shifted in ways that mirror changes in the newspaper industry: away from a to- tal dependence on advertising and toward readers willing to pay. Rob Grimshaw, the head of digital strategy at FT.com who has made events an extension of his job, said his newsroom now views conference at- tendees much as it does digital subscribers – they are all simply members of its broader audience. Our best effort on this front is Times Talks, but we’ve made little effort to scale them. Those who have studied the industry say that the most success- ful approach is to take such events on tour, with multiple stops for the same line up, or to hold a single large annual event. Instead, we’re building each of ours as a one-off. Many executives and editors at competing outlets said that The Times is in a unique position to in- crease and retain subscribers by shedding its mod- esty and putting forward its best asset: its talent. The Times should create reader-focused events that elevate our brand while meeting our standards. Imagine a New York Times Readers Festival: An annual event in NYC that anyone registered on our site could pay to attend, with a few segments open only to subscribers and premium subscribers. Possible sessions include: panels on the top stories of the year, Q&A’s with reporters and editors on cer- tain topics, training sessions on writing, photogra- phy and video, talks by a handful of outsiders who wrote the most-read Op-Eds of the year, a multi- media showcase of our best videos, photos and in- teractives. We should not underestimate interest in Times reporters and journalism. Experiment: New Events Opportunity: Events
54 Growing Our Audience | Connection Getting to Know Our Readers To provide more relevant and meaningful user ex- periences, we need to first better understand our readers — who they are and how they use our site. Currently, our capabilities for collecting reader data are limited. he information is dispersed hap- hazardly across the organization and rarely put to use for purposes other than marketing. And the newsroom, which is perhaps best positioned to champion this effort because of its close connection to readers, has not played a leading role. The smart use of reader data has been essential to the success of companies like Google, Facebook and Amazon. But traditional media companies are also figuring out this game. The Guardian, for ex- ample, recently launched its “Known Strategy,” with the newsroom leading the effort to improve how it collects, archives and uses reader data. “I don’t think we really understood the power of the data and the audience understanding that came with the subscription model,” said The Financial Times’s C.E.O., John Ridding. “We’ve been able to build a system of understanding our readers.” LinkedIn offers a good example of how to use reader data in smart ways. Last year, it sent out an email to hundreds of thousands of users: “Con- gratulations, you have one of the top 5 percent most viewed LinkedIn profiles.” Other sites, like TripAd- visor, tell unpaid contributors when their work is being widely read and commented on. These feed- back mechanisms increase loyalty. Because the Times has a paywall and has recently taken new steps to encourage readers to register, we’re even better positioned to collect such data. But we don’t do things that our competitors do, like ask readers whether they would be willing to be contact- ed by reporters or if they are willing to share some basic information about their hometown, alma ma- ter and industry so we can send them articles about those topics. When the newsroom does seek reader data, too often we build one-off systems and then we don’t store the information in ways that can be shared or retrieved later. For example, when Libby Rosenthal tried to email all the people who had commented on her first medical-cost story to let them know about a follow-up, someone had to manually pull every com- menter’s email address from registration data. KJ Dell’Antonia paid an assistant out of her own pocket to go through years of her old emails to pull reader addresses to let them know about her newsletter. Readers, though, are eager to share information if they think it will help us or them. In stories where readers are encouraged to leave their email ad- dresses to signal that they would be willing to speak with Times reporters, almost 90 percent agree. Our competitors have pursued this strategy to build up reader databases that can be used for both reporting and promotion. We should pursue this in a scalable, organized fashion in consultation with the business side. MANUAL LABOR When Libby Rosenthal wanted to alert readers about a new story in her series, someone had to pull the email addresses by hand from comments posted on her previous articles. The exercise pointed to an obvious need to create a tool to collect those addresses automatically and help cement our relationships with readers.
Strengthening Our Newsroom Innovation  March 24, 2014 Chapter 2
56 Strenghtening Our Newsroom |
57 It is hard to believe that only seven years ago, The New York Times housed its digital and print opera- tions in separate buildings. Since that time, the newsroom has undergone a slow, steady evolution. Each year, our traditional and digital journalists become more integrated and more aligned. Each year, our leaders invest more resources into our digital operations. Each year, we produce more groundbreaking digital journalism. Despite these concerted efforts, we have not moved far enough or fast enough. There is a split in our digital readiness that is making it harder for us to thrive in this shifting landscape. The digital journalism that readers see each day is exceptional: Graphics, Design and Interactive News have become industry-leading operations and home to some of our most talented journalists. But we’ve made far less progress in the areas that readers can’t see. These are the eat-your-spinach process and structure questions we often perceive as getting in the way of our daily jobs: publishing systems, work- Introduction flow, organizational structures, recruitment efforts and strategy. As one digital leader at The Times noted, the newspaper sets the gold standard not just because we employ world-class journalists but because we also empower them with a world-class support sys- tem. But we have not yet modernized that support system for our digital journalism. “Aspirations have outpaced our technology, templates and workflow,” said another digital leader. We must move quickly. Our competitors, which not long ago were mostly newspapers that lagged far behind us in digital, are growing in number, sophis- tication and gaining ground. The challenge for us is that the new battleground is not where we are strongest — the journalism it- self — but in this second arena that is largely out of sight. Because our digital competitors adapt faster to changing technology and trends, their lesser jour- nalism often gets more traction than our superior journalism. They are ahead of us in building im- pressive support systems for digital journalists, and that gap will grow unless we quickly improve our The Past...
58 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | capabilities. Meanwhile, our journalism advantage is shrinking as more of these upstarts expand their newsrooms. The previous chapter, which explored the urgent need to grow our audience, discussed the impor- tance of experimenting, failing, replicability and in- vesting time in the rote work of structured data and reader data. This chapter focuses more squarely on process and structure questions and lays out three steps — immediate, short-term and long-term — we can pursue to position ourselves to succeed in this changing landscape. To become more of a digital-first newsroom, we have to look hard at our traditions and push our- selves in ways that make us uncomfortable. Too of- ten we’ve made changes and then breathed sighs of relief, as if the challenge had been solved. But the pace of change is so fast that the solutions can quick- ly seem out of date, and the next challenge is just around the corner. For example, Times Topics, once our smartest bet to win search, seems archaic now, and social has emerged as the next critical front for promoting our work. This era demands that even be- fore we finish something, we need to start planning for version 2.0 and 3.0. The good news is that our journalism remains rock solid and our financial position is stable. In- side The Times there is widespread enthusiasm — both from the digitally inclined and more traditional journalists — to do what it takes to make this tran- sition. And on the business side, new talent and a shared mission of serving readers has created the opportunity and enthusiasm to work together and find solutions. “This will be a historic year for the media indus- try. Technology is disrupting every distribution platform. Consumers are redefining decades-old consumption habits,” wrote Justin Smith, C.E.O. of Bloomberg News, in a recent all-staff memo that echoed similar missives from leaders of media com- panies over the last several months. “Seizing this opportunity will require long-term investment and a large appetite for transformation, risk, as well as a tolerance for intermittent failure.” ...The Present
59 Our Proposals, In Brief This shift would provide the newsroom, virtually overnight, with many of the necessary skills and insights to take our digital report to the next level. There are a number of departments and units, most of which are considered part of the business side, that are explicitly focused on the reader experience, including Design, Technology, Consumer Insight Group, R&D and Product. These functions represent a clear opportunity COLLABORATE WITH BUSINESS-SIDE UNITS FOCUSED ON READER EXPERIENCE for better integration. Recent initiatives, including NYT Now, have shown the benefits of collaboration across these departments. We are not proposing a wholesale reorganization. But we do believe simply issuing a new policy ­— collaborating with our col- leagues focused on reader experience is encouraged and expected ­— would send a powerful signal and unlock a huge store of creative energy and insights. Many newsroom leaders are so consumed with the demands of the daily report that they have little time to step back and think about long-term questions. When we were simply a newspaper, this singular fo- cus made sense. But we must now juggle print, the web, apps, newsletters, news alerts, social media, video, an international edition and a range of stand- alone products. Our suggestion is to create a small strategy team with the central role of advising the masthead. The CREATE A NEWSROOM STRATEGY TEAM team would keep newsroom leaders apprised of competitors’ strategies, changing technology and shifting reader behavior. It would help track proj- ects around the company that affect our digital re- port, help the masthead set and evaluate priorities and conduct occasional deep dives to answer spe- cific questions. And it would facilitate desk-level ex- periments and communicate the results back to the newsroom to ensure we’re exploring new areas and learning from our efforts. Stories are typically filed late in the day. Our mobile apps are organized by print sections. Desks metic- ulously lay out their sections but spend little time thinking about social strategies. Traditional report- ing skills are the top priority in hiring and promo- tion. The habits and traditions built over a century and a half of putting out the paper are a powerful, conservative force as we transition to digital ­­­— none more so than the gravitational pull of Page One. Some of our traditional competitors have aggres- MAP A STRATEGY TO MAKE THE NEWSROOM A TRULY DIGITAL-FIRST ORGANIZATION sively reorganized around a digital-first rather than a print-first schedule. The health and profitability of our print paper means we don’t yet need to fol- low them down this path. But it is essential to begin the work of questioning our print-centric traditions, conducting a comprehensive assessment of our digi- tal needs, and imagining the newsroom of the future. This means reassessing everything from our roster of talent to our organizational structure to what we do and how we do it. (This page also appeared in the executive summary.)
60 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Reader Experience The wall dividing the newsroom and business side has served The Times well for decades, allowing one side to focus on readers and the other to focus on advertisers. But the growth in our subscription rev- enue and the steady decline in advertising — as well as the changing nature of our digital operation — now require us to work together. For the first time, both the newsroom and busi- ness side are focused primarily on readers. Exciting new collaborations are already underway. But our historical divide has not fully adjusted to reflect this shift. We still have a large and vital advertising arm that should remain walled off. But the many busi- ness-side departments and roles that are focused on readers — which we refer to as “Reader Experience” throughout this report — need to work more closely with the newsroom, instead of being kept at arm’s length, so that we can benefit from their expertise. These departments and roles, which include large segments of Design, Technology, Consumer Insight Group, R&D and Product, are now critical to the newsroom’s efforts, possessing the skills and in- sights we need to grow our audience and take our digital report to the next level. Working closely with Reader Experience is vital to making sure the experience of finding and engaging WHY “READER EXPERIENCE”? The departments that need to interact with both the news and business sides are sometimes called “operational departments,” “neutral departments” or “green-light departments.” But we believe “Reader Experience” better describes the work of these departments. It also underscores why we need to work with them to fulfill the newsroom’s mission of serving its readers. READERS ARE DRIVING OUR GROWTH NYT revenue by source. Advertising Subscriptions Other 2009 43% 51% 6% 2010 6% 44% 50% 2011 6% 45% 49% 2012 6% 50% 45% 2013 5% 52% 43% 1 Reader Experience
61 with our journalism is as impressive as the journal- ism itself. And greater cooperation will advance our goals of ensuring that our journalism is adjusting to technological and behavioral shifts, reaching a growing audience and landing with maximum im- pact. We want to emphasize that we are not advocating a huge new bureaucracy, disruptive reorganization, or a newsroom takeover of these departments. We are simply recommending a policy shift that explic- itly declares that Reader Experience roles should be treated as an extension of our digital newsroom — allowing for more communication, close collabora- tion and cross-departmental career paths. Such a move would build on the significant im- provement in relations between news and business under the leadership of Jill, Mark and Arthur as The New York Times newspaper and company have be- come one and the same. Embracing Reader Expe- rience as an extension of the newsroom is also the next logical step in Jill’s longstanding goal of creat- ing a newsroom with fully integrated print and digi- tal operations, since these departments have skills to build on our digital successes. In the following pages, we will explain the need for a closer relationship between the newsroom and Reader Experience. In the discussion section, we will explore the lack of clear lines in our current process, the hidden costs of our reluctance to work together, and the recent initiatives that have demon- strated the value of collaboration. And in the “how to get there” section, we will offer some suggested guidelines. The very first step, however, should be a deliberate push to abandon our current metaphors of choice — “The Wall” and “Church and State” — which project an enduring need for division. Increased collabora- tion, done right, does not present any threat to our values of journalistic independence. 1. A DIVIDED COMPANY If you were to ask many Times journalists to draw an org chart of the company, it might look something like this: the newsroom and “business-side” functions on opposite sides of a wall. Even some groups that are technically part of the newsroom, like Digital Design, often are thought to be on the business side. The two sides are generally discouraged from working together to protect the newsroom from financial pressures. 2. A SHARED MISSION But in reality, many of these “business side” groups perform vital functions that have nothing to do with advertisers. They focus mainly on improving the reader experience. These groups are building new products and the infrastructure to support our journalism. NYT Now, Cooking, and the NYT5 redesign have shown the benefit of working with these colleagues. NEWSROOM CONSUMER INSIGHT TECHNOLOGY DIGITAL DESIGN R&D PRODUCT MARKETING FINANCE ADVERTISING LEGAL STRATEGY MARKETING FINANCE ADVERTISING LEGAL STRATEGY NEWSROOM CONSUMER INSIGHT TECHNOLOGY DIGITAL DESIGN R&D PRODUCT
62 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Reader Experience Outside the newsroom, there are many departments that are explicitly focused on reader experience. These include Design (crafting the reader experi- ence), Technology (bringing the reader experience to life), Analytics* (understanding the reader ex- perience), R&D (imagining how the reader experi- ence may change) and Product (crafting a strategy for combining many of these elements into a single, reader-centric experience). There are many examples of how these depart- ments have helped the newsroom achieve its goals. For example, the newsroom tried and failed for more than a decade to clear the logistical hurdles involved in creating a searchable recipe database. But a product manager helped make it happen in a mat- ter of months. The newsroom had also strug- gled to find ways to signal to readers when we had updates to stories that didn’t quite merit a new headline or news alert. De- sign, working with developers, came up with several solutions, including the new Watching feature for the home page and the update bullets on NYT Now. These colleagues have specialized skills that most editors simply do not possess and they are trained in the processes of turning ideas into successes. Everyone we interviewed in these groups — at all levels — told us that they could do their jobs better if they were tied in more with the newsroom and our core report. Indeed, the perception that their roles were “on a different side” was a source of confusion and complaint. “‘News and business’ doesn’t even capture it any- more,” said the leader of one of these departments. “These are neutral functions that technically live on the business side, but they are not business func- tions; they are operational functions. Developers, designers, product managers — you could make the argument that not one of those people belong on the business side.” At many of our competitors, these units report to the newsroom or to both sides, just as design and technology do at the Times. Indeed, a central rea- son that digital-first organizations like Huffington Post and BuzzFeed have succeeded with lackluster content is because of their excellent product and technology operations, which are critical parts of their newsrooms. But at The Times, the current structure dictates that our Read- er Experience experts often can only guess at, or simply ignore, the newsroom’s needs. Consider the Consumer In- sight Group and Business Intel- ligence, which handle analytics, conduct surveys and run focus groups. These groups spend each day thinking about and talking to readers. But they have focused almost exclusively on issues like how to in- crease subscriptions, largely because the newsroom has rarely called on them for help. There are count- less ways this unit could be helpful: Are people more likely to read our new newsletter if it were sent at 6 a.m. or 10 a.m.? Is the newsletter building a loyal au- dience of return readers? What percentage of those readers make it to the last item? Design has long been a critical part of our news- room. Even so, we heard repeatedly from designers who said they were treated as outsiders. They said newsroom editors needed to be more engaged when designers are wrestling with major questions about *We use “Analytics” as shorthand for Consumer Insight and Business Intelligence. The perception that roles were “on a different side” was a source of confusion. Discussion
63 Ready, Willing And Able We have an army of colleagues who are commit- ted to helping deliver cutting-edge journalism and growing our audience. A breakdown of the “Reader Experience” departments: ANALYTICS (Consumer Insight Group and Business Intelligence): ~30 people The Analytics groups use data to learn about our readers’ changing habits as well as the effectiveness of our advertising and marketing. They also gather direct feedback from our readers about what they want from our apps and websites. This group trans- lates those needs for Product and Design. DIGITAL DESIGN: ~30 people Digital design invents, plans and executes new features for our platforms and articles. They work collaboratively with the newsroom, Product, and Marketing to ensure that every aspect of the reader experience meets our standards for excellence. TECHNOLOGY: ~445 people This department includes roughly two dozen teams of engineers who write the code that powers our publishing systems, mobile apps, websites and e- commerce infrastructure. They also build and main- tain the digital pipes that keep those applications running smoothly. PRODUCT (Core, New, Video, Ventures): ~120 people Product managers serve as the link between the newsroom and the business side, balancing various requirements and interests to ensure the best reader experience in new products like apps or web fea- tures. They have come up with ideas like NYT Now and work closely with Design, News, Technology, Marketing, Advertising and Customer Insight. RESEARCH & DEVELOPMENT: ~8 people The R&D group is a hybrid technology and design group with a long-term focus. They develop tools that aim to revolutionize the way we gather and present news, like using drones to shoot video or de- livering morning headlines on a bathroom mirror.
64 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Reader Experience our digital future, like experimenting with person- alization, rethinking how we organize our content, and even changing the architecture of stories to meet new needs. “We can sit around and come up with ideas all day long up here, but they have no legs without editors,” said Ian Adelman, our digital design director. Collaboration is even more difficult for functions that are part of the business side. Several people in R&D expressed frustration over not being informed of newsroom priorities, leaving them focused mostly on business-side projects for advertising. At times, they have tried to guess what may be helpful to the newsroom, but as a result often end up producing work of limited utility. “I’d like to be able to use real information and not make bad assumptions,” said Matt Boggie, the director of R&D. Part of the problem is that editors often don’t un- derstand what colleagues who work in these Reader Experience roles can do to help improve our report. More fundamentally, though, there is widespread concern that it is inappropriate to speak with col- leagues on the business side’s payroll. “The bottom line is that people don’t know the lines,” explained one masthead editor. We heard from editors who said the fear of im- propriety meant that they actively avoided commu- nicating with business colleagues altogether. Others said they simply waited for approval — even when it slowed down projects — because delays are con- sidered a lesser evil than the appearance of crossing lines without permission. “People say to me, ‘You can’t let anyone know I’m talking to you about this; it has to be under the radar,’” said a leader in one Reader Experience de- partment. “Everyone is a little paranoid about being seen as too close to the business side.” This distance means that employees on each side are sometimes unaware that they are duplicating work or taking opposite approaches to the same problem. The lack of communication can be intentional: We heard from people in these Reader Experience units who felt they had to make sure an idea was complet- ed and bulletproofed before it could be presented to the newsroom. And vice versa. This runs directly counter to best practices, which call for collaborat- ing as early as possible to solve problems. “Both sides actively don’t communicate stuff from their side,” said one Reader Experience leader. “I’ve been in meetings when people have been very clear about, ‘We don’t want to bring them in yet.’ That’s how it is — there’s the opposite of transparency. There’s not trust.” A significant amount of distrust and skepticism stems from speaking slightly different languages. People are referring to the same thing when one side says “content” or “brand” and the other side says “journalism” or “The New York Times.” But these word choices foster perceptions that the busi- ness side is crassly commercial and uninterested in BUZZFEED’S SECRET WEAPON Jonah Peretti, the site’s founder, explained how years of close collaboration and investment in the dry stuff — tools, workflow and process — have helped drive the site’s dizzying growth: “Our tech team, product team, and data science team have built a very powerful publishing platform that allows us to serve our readers better. We have spent years building publishing formats (lists, quizzes, video, longform, short-form, breaking news, photo essays, explainers), stats and analytics, optimization and testing frameworks, integrations with social platforms, native-mobile apps, and a user-friendly, visually pleasing design. This is a massive investment that is very difficult to replicate, it is part of the reason that the best editorial talent wants to join BuzzFeed, and it creates a virtuous cycle where a growing number of talented people use increasingly powerful tools to do their job.”
65 the very thing that makes The New York Times so special — or that the newsroom is precious about its work and sanctimonious about its values. The fear that a single stray word can derail a conversation is keenly felt, particularly on the business side. More, better and faster communication is need- ed. If the masthead were to clearly delineate which groups and employees can communicate and col- laborate without first seeking permission, colleagues who reached across the news-business divide could feel more as if they are crossing a state line than nav- igating a national border. The last year in particular has shown the value of collaboration and how quickly productive relation- ships can be formed when people are working side by side. The newsroom requested a member of the Con- sumer Insight Group, James Robinson, to work with Aron Pilhofer on using metrics to help our report. The masthead recently decided to expand the effort. Similarly, Danielle Rhoades Ha from Public Rela- tions, who is helping promote our journalism, and Kelly Alfieri from Product, who is helping coordinate the many moving parts involved in our coverage of the Oscars, Olympics and other tent-pole events, are now based in the newsroom. And the movement is in both directions — Brian Hamman, previously a key member of Interactive News, is now working on the 9th floor. A DEEP BENCH Our colleagues in various Reader Experience departments have a vast range of skills to help us grow our audience and improve our journalism. Torben has led more than 1,000 interviews with our readers to glean insights about their news habits. He is an expert at translating the needs of our audience to our designers, editors and product managers. Torben Brooks Director of User Experience Research Libby specializes in user experience — the art of understanding reader needs and designing solutions. She has has used these skills to redesign NYTimes.com and invent the forthcoming “Watching” home page feature. Libby Gery User Experience Strategist Reed is the lead developer of NYT5 and a newcomer to The Times. His team built a flexible workflow system that has sharply improved the speed with which we create, test and deploy new features on the web. Reed Emmons Director of Web Development Chris is the lead developer for our Cooking app and previously was our lead iPad developer. He is also a former reporter. How many mobile developers can boast an A1 byline in The Boston Globe? Chris Ladd Senior Software Engineer Dan was a producer and host of WNYC’s “Morning Edition” before joining The Times to build our “NYT Everywhere” strategy. Dan has formed crucial partnerships with Flipboard, Google and others to help expand our reach. Dan Blumberg Product Manager Evan is perhaps the most passionate advocate of structured data at The Times. His team ensures that the journalism we produce is tagged and archived for future use. Evan’s work to build TimesMachine has brought life back to millions of old articles. Evan Sandhaus Director of Search, Archives & Semantics
66 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Reader Experience The newsroom mobile team worked closely with their business counterparts to create a proposal for overhauling the company’s mobile strategy. That collaboration gave much more power to recommen- dations like, “We should take this opportunity to challenge ourselves about our audience strategy, namely that our current approach is focused pri- marily on monetizing an existing reader base.” The most promising example has been the col- laborative efforts, led by New Products under David Perpich, that are developing innovative experiments in mobile-first journalism (NYT Now) and digital service journalism (Cooking). Cliff Levy has paired with Ben French on NYT Now and Sam Sifton has joined forces with Alex MacCallum on Cooking, and each group is support- ed by a multidisciplinary team that includes Design and Technology. Working side by side has increased trust and created a sense of shared mission, cap- tured in their mantra, “Product first, department second.” In the process they have created tools, like drag-and-drop and location recognition, that will el- evate our whole report. “It’s the old world where the publisher and the editor work together,” said Sifton. “They each play their position and support one another. It’s not lions lying down with lambs. It’s a mutually beneficial, symbiotic relationship.” This stands in sharp contrast to the old models we sometimes default to, in which one side leads a proj- ect and then simply hands it to the other — the busi- ness side saying, “go make this,” or the newsroom saying, “go sell this.” The original effort for what was then called Need To Know offers a case study in this unbalanced ap- proach. Initially, the project did not have an edi- tor to help shape the vision, which led to a weaker product at the outset that did not meet our editorial standards. (The late addition of Cliff Levy helped to create a product that is poised to be a journalistic success, regardless of whether it meets the business goals.) On the other side, the projects being led by David Leonhardt and Carl Hulse were both newsroom-led initiatives, conceived of and started without input from Reader Experience colleagues. Months into the development of these efforts, Leonhardt and Hulse both worried they were neglecting questions surrounding competitive analysis, audience devel- opment, platform-specific strategies, promotion, and user testing. But they felt ill-equipped to answer them. “I had no idea who to reach out to and it never would have occurred to me to do it,” Leonhardt said. “It would have felt vaguely inappropriate.” (The ad- dition of Kelly Alfieri, a product manager, to the project has helped.) There is another compelling reason for the news- room to engage more with Reader Experience: re- cruiting and retaining talent. We heard many ex- amples of employees who had turned down more money elsewhere to work at The Times — develop- ers, designers and product managers are in particu- larly high demand in this digital world — because of a belief in the value of our journalism. However, we risk losing those employees when we wall them off from our journalism. The divide has been jarring for product managers coming from oth- er organizations where they were considered part of the newsroom. One new product manager who relo- cated to the newsroom said she was shocked when a newsroom colleague told her that her presence was unwelcome because she belonged on “the business side.” This sense of division has prompted the departure of some of our best developers, exacerbating a tal- SIMILAR GOALS Paul Smurl, The Times’s general manager of core digital products, recently sent an email to his team defining their mission. It bears some resemblance to the newsroom’s: “Core Products continuously invents and evolves our core web and app experiences to: 1. Fullfill our journalistic mission, 2. Increase reach among like-minded readers, 3. Build deeper loyal relationships with readers, 4. Grow revenue through paid content, advertising and other services.”
67 In Their Own Words: Reader Experience How important is working with the newsroom to your group and its ability to contribute fully to The Times success? “We’re ultimately providing all these vessels to get our world-class journalism in the hands of our readers, and the newsroom is crucial for that.” “There’s only so much we can do at arm’s length from the newsroom by working through product and technology as proxies.” “If we didn’t serve the newsroom, we wouldn’t be serving one of the most important parts of the company. It wouldn’t be doing our job. The fact that we can help the newsroom is a really great reason for people to come work for us.” How effective is the current collaboration between your group and the newsroom? “There’s a long way to go.” “Right now there is room for a more holistic view of what the newsroom thinks is important for our product direction — there isn’t someone I could talk to about that now who has sway.” “Our single biggest challenge is we don’t know what our goals are at any given time. If we don’t know what we’re trying to get our users to do, it becomes hard to prioritize effort and evaluate in- ternally.” “I don’t yet know, if I had an idea, who I would go to in the newsroom with it.” “On NYT Now and Cooking, the editors and prod- uct managers have worked really well together. It’s really been the ideal partnership.” Ian Adelman (left) Digital Design Paul Smurl (right) Core Digital Products Brad Kagawa Content Management Systems Rajiv Pant Technology Management David Perpich New Digital Products Matthew Boggie Research & Development Sonia Yamada Consumer Insight Group Brian Murphy Web and Mobile Engineering How can we improve collaboration? “Nathan and Jonathan are the perfect partners: they know what is wrong and what needs to hap- pen. They are the perfect partners in terms of what you’d want as a thought partner, but it breaks down beyond that.” “Ideally we need people in the newsroom who are obsessed with social and mobile and digital.” “The newsroom is really easy to work with right now, but I don’t think they’re particularly ambi- tious. There’s not a lot of oomph in terms of artic- ulating where our products should be going. You get into fiefdoms where there’s a little bit of think- ing about it but no bold aspirations.” “My biggest concern within the newsroom is I feel a lot of people like Jonathan and Nathan and Andrew understand how digital works, but you go above that and it becomes really murky in terms of understanding.” “There’s no corollary within the newsroom to the digital general managers on the business side.” We asked eight leaders of Reader Experience teams about their relationships with the newsroom and how they’d like to see them improve. Some clear themes emerged — everyone said that collaboration was criti- cally important but said we were currently falling short. And when asked their main points of contact in the newsroom, we heard the same four names: Ian Fisher, Aron Pilhofer, Nathan Ashby-Kuhlman and Jonathan Ellis (who just left). Here are some of their thoughts about the current state of the relationship: We interviewed:
68 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Reader Experience ent deficit in Technology that slows down projects. The vast majority of developers on the eighth floor we spoke with believed they were not allowed to set foot in the newsroom, creating a sense of distance and even alienation from a product they are instru- mental in creating. Virtually all meetings among our digital teams occur in the tower of the building. One developer who started a “developer/news- room relations committee,” asked to be added to the AHOT distribution list so developers could occa- sionally attend brown-bag lunches. The request was declined with an explanation of the “church-state divide.” Not long afterward, he left the company. It is in the newsroom’s interest to help attract the best talent for such roles. “Where we can compete is getting people closer to the mission,” said one high- ranking developer. Our Reader Experience colleagues are thinking strategically about the very questions at the heart of the newsroom’s digital future. Again and again, we found that the most forward-thinking approaches to some of our pressing problems were coming from Design and Product. Tapping into their expertise will only become more critical in coming years, as we wrestle with big questions about transitioning from a print-first to a digital-first organization. But we cannot simply hand off these problems to Reader Experience. Our role in this partnership is critical to ensuring our efforts reflect our creativ- ity, meet our standards, minimize our conflicts and serve the long-term mission of advancing our jour- nalism and growing our audience. A brainstorming session for the new cooking app.
69 Generally we believe the group should include Product, Design, Technology, Analytics, and R&D. However, not every part of these depart- ments falls into this category – for example, E- Commerce in Technology. Create and distribute a clear organizational chart of the Reader Experience departments that in- cludes a contact person and their newsroom counterpart. Masthead, desk heads, platform editors, produc- ers and people in charge of verticals, including columnists, should be encouraged to work with New ventures should be developed with collab- orative multi-disciplinary teams whenever pos- sible. A product manager should be assigned to our most important efforts, like The Upshot. A designer and developer should also be assigned to key projects as early as possible in the planning phase. Teams should sit together to foster com- munication and collaboration. Newsroom leaders should work closely with Reader Experience departments to shape digital priorities. People like David Perpich and Paul Smurl should be invited to newsroom strategy meetings on topics like mobile, social and new products. CLARIFY WHICH READER EXPERIENCE UNITS SHOULD BE INTERACTING WITH THE NEWSROOM Reader Experience without prior permission. For example, someone starting a new product should consult Product to learn the best practices for a successful launch or talk to Consumer Insight to better understand the target audience. Masthead editors, desk heads, and platform edi- tors should have blanket authorization to speak to anyone on the business side. Our most senior leaders should be encouraged to learn as much as possible about our strategy for the rapidly chang- ing digital landscape, to ensure that we help shape it from the beginning. ENSURE THE NEWSROOM IS WORKING COLLABORATIVELY WITH READER EXPERIENCE Prospective leaders should be encouraged to work on interdisciplinary projects as part of the groom- ing process. Leaders like Levy, Sifton, Fisher and Ingrassia have said that such exposure has signif- icantly improved their understanding of opportu- nities and challenges. The newsroom should assign a point person for each major product area. Because current re- sponsibilities are not always clear, we often react to discussions rather than help shape them. These point people should engage with the Product leads and inform the masthead of priorities and ongoing work in their areas. This is similar to the role that Jonathan Ellis played with Alex Hardi- man on mobile, or that Nathan Ashby-Kuhlman plays with Brad Kagawa on Scoop. How to Get There
70 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Reader Experience Reader Experience employees should be added to both newsroom and business-side communica- tions and considered welcome at all events. The newsroom should regularly send emails to all our Reader Experience colleagues about recent accomplishments and ongoing priorities, and vice versa. COMMUNICATE THE NEW MESSAGE FOR COLLABORATION BROADLY The executive editor, C.E.O. and publisher should communicate reader-focused goals and priorities broadly to foster a sense of shared mission among the newsroom and Reader Experience groups. Start pilot programs to embed more Reader Ex- perience staff in the newsroom — for example, embed a developer on a particularly innovative desk, place a member of the R&D team on the News Desk, or have a Product manager work with a columnist for two months. Digital employees in the newsroom should be al- lowed to take positions in these departments and vice versa. For example, Brian Hamman recently made the jump from the newsroom to the new product team, and has been an invaluable asset, in part because of the breadth of his experience and his ability to translate the needs of each side. Others have turned down such jobs out of fear that they won’t be able to return to the newsroom. HIRE COLLABORATIVELY AND ENCOURAGE EMPLOYEES TO MOVE FREELY BETWEEN THE NEWSROOM AND READER EXPERIENCE The newsroom should be engaged in the hiring process for key Reader Experience positions, such as product leads who directly touch our re- port. Similarly, Reader Experience should lend its expertise when the newsroom is hiring for key digital positions like platforms editors. To help recruit digital talent, hiring managers should emphasize that shaping the presentation of our content is a vital and valued journalistic contribution. Orientation for new employees in the newsroom and Reader Experience should be integrated, ex- posing everyone to the full range of our reader- focused efforts and the values of our journalism.
71 Not so long ago, the masthead could focus almost entirely on the newspaper. Today, running The New York Times newsroom means not just creating a daily print report, but also running a huge web operation, overseeing a grow- ing array of mobile apps, newsletters, news alerts and social media, as well as guiding an international edition, a video operation and a range of new stand- alone products. As Jill said recently: “If you even stop to catch your breath, you’re falling behind.” The masthead, in particular, is being asked to fill two roles: to oversee the day-to-day needs of the news report and newsroom operations and, simulta- neously, to assess the future and chart a new course. In recent months, the masthead has made the time to focus on the long-term needs of the news- room — holding an off-site retreat to address press- ing big-picture needs, reassessing the mission of the magazine, crafting a plan for improving our mobile report and creating initiatives such as this group, fo- cused on innovation. But strategy is such a pressing need at this junc- ture that it should become a permanent newsroom function, with dedicated staff. Our recommendation is to create a newsroom strategy team that serves as an adviser to the mast- head. We envision a small newsroom team that would seek to support the masthead in its goals, serving to better arm The Times’s leaders with in- sights and analysis that will make their growing jobs easier. The core function would be ensuring the mast- head is apprised of competitors’ strategies, changing technology and shifting reader behavior. The team would track projects around the company that affect our digital report, ensuring the newsroom is at the table when we need to be. This team would include people with strong back- grounds in journalism, technology, user experience, product and analytics. That expertise would help the masthead evaluate and set priorities in critical but less familiar areas like our content-management system, platform functionality and audience devel- opment. The team would serve as a catalyst for launching desk-level experiments in these areas and be charged with communicating those results to the newsroom. It would also provide valuable training ground for future leaders by offering a deeper look at the chal- lenges and opportunities facing The Times. This team would be distinct from the business- side strategy team. But like that team, it would not have an operational role. It would be a neutral inter- nal adviser dedicated to improving everyone’s game. 2 Newsroom Strategy Team
72 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Newsroom Strategy Team The demands of a daily newspaper create a power- ful gravitational pull on editors’ attention, drawing their focus to the short-term — tomorrow’s front page, the tick-tock for Sunday’s paper, a project launching next month. Across the board, newsroom leaders told us that they are so consumed with the demands of the daily report that they have trouble finding the time to step back. In addition to the daily news demands, there are the daily crises and a packed schedule of stand- ing meetings. Perhaps the most telling example is Ian Fisher, the masthead editor in charge of both web and mobile reports. An average workday for Ian involves writ- ing headlines, scanning the wires, tracking breaking news and making sure that stories are appearing correctly on mobile. That leaves him with less band- width for bigger strategic questions about our digital operations. There are others who are explicitly charged with thinking about the big picture, of course: Tom on design, Aron on digital, Larry on new initiatives, and Janet on newsroom management. But these are some of the busiest people in the newsroom. Per- haps the only ones with more on their plates are Jill and Dean. All this helps explain why Rich Meislin, who took the buyout several years ago, remains such a critical resource, providing information, insight and coun- sel about digital issues to a range of people in the newsroom and on the business side. In addition to having a deep well of institutional knowledge, he also has time. “They go to Rich because he’s avail- able and because he’s not dealing with the daily re- port,” said a masthead editor. Similarly, desk heads told us they have little time to step back. “I don’t even have time to think about these things,” one said. Another suggested that the relentless work of assembling the world’s best news report can also be “a form of laziness, because it is work that is comfortable and familiar to us, that we know how to do. And it allows us to avoid the truly hard work and bigger questions about our present and our future: What shall we become? How must we change?” This focus on the daily report also extends into our digital ranks. The mobile team, which should be one of our most forward-looking groups, spends so much time making fixes to ensure all our journal- ism appears in our apps that they say they have little left to think about how the mobile report should be distinctive or how to harness new technologies. That helps explain why it took a group removed from the daily flow of the newsroom — NYT Now — to funda- mentally rethink our mobile presentation. The people who have spent the most time thinking about the challenges of our digital future — thorny topics like personalization, and glaring needs like better data collection — can be found upstairs, most often in Product, Design and Strategy. They are also spending countless hours studying and interviewing our competitors and our readers, and capturing and sharing their insights in detailed reports. But their initiative means the newsroom is often reacting to, rather than driving, the work on big questions that are critical to our future. “We’ve abdicated completely the role of strategy,” said one masthead editor. “We just don’t do strat- egy. The newsroom is really being dragged behind the galloping horse of the business side.” The business side doesn’t want this imbalance. They want to work alongside the newsroom to im- prove the core of what we do. And they know that if the newsroom were to become a glorified ser- vice desk — simply providing the content that fills the packages that other groups are creating — that would not be good for the institution. “I want a partner who has vision,” said the head of one Reader Experience department. “We wind up focused a lot on how to get things out the door and make them successful but not spending enough time on the one- to three-year horizon.” Discussion
73 We believe a strategy group can help reset the bal- ance in the following ways: TRACKING THE MEDIA LANDSCAPE This work is critical but time-consuming. Over the last six months, we have spent countless hours read- ing about the latest industry shifts in digital media. Understanding some developments often required technical knowledge, and at times, we have relied on experts to explain the implications. Staying on top of these trends, particularly in to- day’s faster-moving media world, requires finding sources, often in leadership roles at other compa- nies, and cultivating ongoing conversations. Alexis Madrigal, the tech writer and digital strategist at The Atlantic, told us how the company was succeeding on mobile through a focus on Facebook and direct emails. Kevin Delaney, the head of Quartz, provided his insights on how to integrate and use developers in the newsroom, and Laura Evans, the former head of analytics at The Washington Post and The Wall Street Journal, helped us understand how those publications are changing — which shifts we should mirror and which we should ignore. These relation- ships also helped us identify promising digital tal- ent. “I talk to [Nick] Denton all the time. We both talk to Jacob [Weisberg]. We’re constantly tell- ing each other what’s working, what we’ve experi- mented with,” said Adam Moss, the editor of New York magazine, referring to the heads of Gawker and Slate. “About half the choices I make come about be- cause someone from another site tells me something worked, and so we adopt it.” It’s important to capture these conversations as well, so insights can be widely shared. The business- side strategy group shared with us an 80-page tran- NEWS FEED A strategy team could keep the masthead appprised of important industry developments.
74 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Newsroom Strategy Team STEALING A PAGE The business side strategy group regularly produces research reports such as these to inform decisions. A newsroom strategy team could play a similar role. script of interviews about social strategy that they conducted with the leaders at various competitors. They provided us with detailed assessments of the mobile functions offered by our competitors, which quickly clarified where we need to catch up. A newsroom strategy group should capture, dis- till and explain the most important developments and insights to emerge from articles and interviews, perhaps in weekly emails to the masthead. Such in- formation could also be shared with desk heads and deputies to ensure that we’re arming the next gen- eration of leaders with the knowledge they need. The strategy group could also be responsible for tracking and sharing the most important work being done inside the building. Several masthead editors told us there are so many initiatives that it can be hard to know when we need to claim our seat at the table. In recent months, the masthead has been left out of several important studies that will affect the newsroom, including a marketing-led exploration of our audience-develop- ment efforts and a detailed assessment of our data capabilities and needs. In both cases, our senior leaders were unaware that these conversations were happening, despite the newsroom’s growing interest in both subjects. In other cases, we knew about meetings but failed to send a senior newsroom leader to represent our interests. In one instance, several of our business- side colleagues had to speak up on our behalf to keep the Leonhardt project from being pushed down the priority list. A newsroom strategy group could ask for regular updates on the projects and priorities from various business units. And it could help our masthead lead- ers determine when we need to get involved.
75 The Right Way To Fail Failure is not something we’re comfortable with in the newsroom. And for good reason: getting our journalism right is the foundation of our success. But that mindset can limit our appetite for and tol- erance of risk. Our aversion to failure can also lead to wasted resources and prevent us from learning valuable lessons. For example, our mobile app, “The Scoop,” and our international home page have failed to gain traction with readers, yet we still devote resources to them. We ended the Booming blog but kept its newsletter going. These ghost operations distract time, energy and resources that could be used for new projects. At the same time, we haven’t tried to wring insights from these efforts. “There were no metrics, no targets, no goals to hit and no period of re-evaluation after the launch,” said a digital plat- forms editor, about our international home page. When we do shut down projects, the decisions are made quietly and rarely discussed, to protect the reputations of the people who ran them. As a result, lessons are forgotten and the staffers involved be- come more risk-averse. By contrast, the business side conducts reviews of big projects to assess what worked and what didn’t and then builds those insights into future efforts. Failures should be recast as important learning opportunities — that’s the approach at most tech firms. We should publicly acknowledge when new projects are discontinued and have an open conver- sation about what we learned from that investment of time and resources. And we should take heart. Perhaps the best ex- ample of learning from a failure in the industry can be found inside our own building. Times Select was a stunning failure, and was mocked and derided in all corners of the Internet. In 2007, Gawker called it “the world’s stupidest pay-for-content barrier to a good user experience.” But the knowledge gleaned from that effort helped us score the single biggest journalistic win in a decade: the metered subscription model. Our early “failure” was critical to our later success, providing many of the critical lessons about how to structure and roll out our digital subscriptions. ‘WEEDING THE GARDEN’ One of the sharpest insights we heard about fail- ure came from Bob Pittman, the C.E.O. of Clear Channel. He described the importance of continu- ally “weeding the garden” in organizations, to en- sure that marginal ideas are not kept alive simply because of inertia: “If I try 10 new things and let’s say two are clear winners and two are clear losers. That means I’ve got six in between. What do I do with those? Most organizations let everything live except the clear losers. And what happens over time is that stuff in between doesn’t really help you. It takes up a lot of resources. It’s confusing. It’s muddy. “And if you let that stuff build up, then pretty soon my whole organization is basically mediocrity and gunk. So if you can bring yourself to say, ‘I’m only going to let clear winners live. I’m going to take the resources I put for the other eight things and try again,’ you can keep a crisp organization. And so we always talk about weeding the garden. Part of it is being honest with yourself. What really is a winner? “It sort of goes back to the idea of don’t be afraid of mistakes. You’ll make a lot of them. I think a lot of people only want to keep it at two mistakes out of 10, instead of eight out of 10, because they want to keep their batting average better. But nobody’s counting how many mistakes you make.”
76 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Newsroom Strategy Team ASSESSING NEEDS AND SETTING PRIORITIES Our top editors have razor-sharp instincts for making tough choices about priorities in news cov- erage. When big news breaks, we know how many reporters to put on the story, and we can quickly work up five-day coverage plans. But the newsroom leadership doesn’t always have the expertise needed to identify, prioritize and set plans for meeting our top digital needs. Sometimes this means we are less ambitious in our efforts, sometimes this means we have less of a sense of how to use our limited resources, and this almost always means we are too reliant on front-line colleagues with deep expertise. The newsroom strategy team, with a range of backgrounds in the group, could help. Having tra- ditional journalists working alongside people versed in user experience, technology and product manage- ment would allow for holistic and nuanced examina- tions of problems and solutions needed to push our digital efforts to the next level. For example, our content-management system may be our single most important platform, since it structures our work in print, on the web and on mo- bile. But desks and producers spend countless hours on one-time fixes to the platform, rather than per- manent solutions, even when it is clear the problems will emerge again and again. One senior member of the news desk said that leaders would be “horrified” if they understood the situation, but he felt he lacked the ability to translate the problems for colleagues without a deep background in content-management systems. We heard essentially the same complaint from those in mobile, Social, Design and Interactive News. The strategy group could help in these cases by as- sessing the problems, explaining the need and then offering a range of solutions to the masthead. A strategy group could also help provide a clear point of contact for leaders looking to innovate, sup- plying them with the assistance, contacts and best practices to ensure they are launching new efforts in a way that makes them more likely to succeed. “I don’t even know who to ask,” said another depart- ment head. Several desk heads and masthead editors men- tioned that “mobile” and “social” and “video” were all considered priorities at various points. But with- out tactical recommendations for acting on them, everyone re-focused on the print report, where their strengths lie and where the rewards are easily iden- tified. “We’ll do it,” said one department head, about implementing the digital priorities. “But we have to be led.” The strategy group could help the masthead both create and communicate a clear newsroom digital priority list. And it could help define what ques- tions should be answered before new initiatives are launched. What are we trying to achieve? How many people will be required? How will we measure suc- cess? What can we learn from competitors? And how do we get better over time? “We need a vetting process for ideas,” said a mast- head editor. “What are the ground rules for deciding what’s worth doing? What are our goals?” RUNNING EXPERIMENTS AND SHARING RESULTS There has been a longstanding tension between dispersing and centralizing our digital talent. The choices that result affect the ebb and flow of experi- mentation in the newsroom. A CANDID, NEUTRAL VOICE In recent months, we’ve watched the newsroom move inexorably to launch a new product, the Washington morning tipsheet, even though almost every person involved questioned the approach, from those working on it to the top of the masthead. However, few wanted to publicly question the idea. It may turn out to be a success but we believe a more candid discussion would only help accomplish that goal. This is one of several occasions when we found widespread concern about a strategy but a reluctance to air it openly. We believe a strategy group could help give voice to such concerns.
77 Right now, we have consolidated digital innova- tion in desks like Graphics, Interactive News, Social and Design. This approach has its advantages, en- suring excellent quality control and the highest-cal- iber work. But one disadvantage is that news desks, particularly web producers, lack the opportunity to experiment digitally on their own. This approach makes scaling up our digital efforts far more difficult. To succeed in the coming years, news desks need to be building digital skills. Indeed, a major reason producers have seen their access to tools and templates curtailed is because of the con- cerns that the editors on these desks are unable to recognize substandard work. This tension between quality control and expand- ed digital capabilities has been difficult to resolve. While we have skewed towards centralization, our competitors are doing the opposite: aggressively dis- persing digital talent throughout their newsrooms with the understanding that people will make mis- takes as they build new skills. A strategy group could help provide concep- tual help, structure and guidance to experiments launched at the desk level, allowing more producers, editors and reporters to innovate and learn. They would be familiar with the tools and talents in the newsroom, Technology, Product and Analytics that could help bring such ideas into reality. This would allow us to use desks as laboratories to answer pressing questions and to develop best practices. Examples include experimenting with dif- ferent newsletter designs, testing how to best resur- face evergreen content, and trying new approaches to promoting a story. One priority for the strategy group would be replicability – encouraging experi- ments and creating tools and templates that can then be easily shared with the rest of the newsroom. SPEED WINS When we have good ideas, we should treat them with the urgency of a news scoop. Otherwise, we risk letting our competitors get there first. A year and a half ago, Andrew Phelps presented his bosses with a tool he developed: an automated, visual homepage of the day’s report. Editors were enthusiastic, but there was no structure to support the initiative and after several months he gave up. More than a year later, an identical featured appeared on The Washington Post website. Immediately, the NYT business side put out a request for a designer or developer interested in building a visual homepage.
78 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Newsroom Strategy Team During more than 200 interviews, we heard a lot of unvarnished opinions from our colleagues about how the newsroom and business side could work together more effectively. One popular theme: There are times when each side needs to think a bit more like the other. BUSINESS A GREATER FOCUS ON THE LONG-TERM Long-term growth must be a higher priority for the business side. This point came up often, not just from newsroom leaders but from business-side leaders, too. A stubborn perception remains — even though it may not be accurate in some cases — that too many incentives on the business side reward short-term goals. One indicator is the troubling decline in our read- ership. This is even true on mobile, where our focus on turning casual readers into subscribers led us to tinker with the article meter to meet immediate rev- enue goals. Some of this short-term focus is understandable, given the strain on our finances in recent years. But our more solid financial footing allows us to re-em- phasize long-term thinking. It should be noted that Mark has explicitly cham- pioned such a shift. But a focus on immediate rev- enue — “line of sight ROI” — remains a concern. We were repeatedly told by members of strategy, mar- keting, product, technology and other key divisions that business leaders sometimes struggle to value things that can’t be easily quantified and plugged into a financial model, starting with our readers. For example, several people told us that this approach led us to under-invest in social media, which offers ambiguous returns even though it is an increasingly critical method of distributing our journalism and building audience loyalty. “Not every proposal should have to fit neatly into a financial model,” said one member of the strategy team. “We need a mindset shift that allows us to in- vest in things we think are important simply because we think they’re important.” NEWSROOM TIME TO TACKLE HARD PROBLEMS Both business-side and newsroom leaders said that the newsroom could do a better job of tackling the trickiest questions head-on. The rapidly changing landscape demands innovation but too often we put off setting strategy around controversial issues. The newsroom’s role as steward of our institu- tional integrity ensures that it retains veto power over anything that could be journalistically fraught. But that also means we must take a more active role in leading strategy in areas that offer the most prom- ise — and yes, peril — for our digital future. One reason for our caution is that the newsroom tends to view questions through the lens of worst- case scenarios. Even carefully phrased suggestions about metrics or personalization have prompted re- sponses like, “I don’t want to turn our home page into a collection of stories about cats and celebrities.” Four years ago, just floating the idea of using bullet points in mobile article summaries led to someone being accused of “dumbing down our report.” Because we set these questions aside, our busi- ness colleagues or Reader Experience departments have often stepped in to fill the void. And the news- room has historically reacted defensively by water- ing down or blocking changes, prompting a phrase that echoes almost daily around the business side: “The newsroom would never allow that.” An example of the risk of this hands-off approach became apparent in recent months. The business side conducted a wholesale rethinking of our au- dience-development strategies, and the marketing department planned to turn to the newsroom to implement many of the final recommendations. The newsroom was not consulted in advance. Truth Be Told...
79 We believe the team should have, collectively, strong backgrounds in journalism, technology, user experience, product and analytics. The team should have a clear leader. To ensure it is cohesive and nimble, the team should be no larger than six people. Members should be collab- orative problem-solvers, gifted at persuasion and eager to work with experts and novices. The team could include permanent and rotating positions, which would allow for continuity while also bringing in new ideas. BUILD A STRONG TEAM The group offers a unique opportunity to groom future leaders. It also offers an opportunity to tap into different desks and create new evangelists for collaboration. The leader of the strategy group should report to a single person on the masthead who is se- nior enough to provide the necessary carrots and sticks to implement recommendations. But the group should serve the whole masthead. The group’s central mission should be to ensure that newsroom leaders are apprised of changing technology and shifting reader behavior. The group could track digital competitors’ web- sites, apps and strategies and conduct regular in- terviews with other companies to assess thinking and best practices. These could be compiled into weekly reports for the masthead and other senior leaders. The group could provide regular training sessions for newsroom leaders about the changing digital landscape. One example is assembling speak- TRACK AND ADVISE ers from other digital publications. Another is arranging a “reader insights boot camp” to help desk heads understand how readers engage with their sections. The group could serve as another contact point for departments on the business side to ensure that the newsroom is aware of all projects and priorities throughout the company. They could communicate developments to the masthead with recommendations of when and how the newsroom should participate. How to Get There
80 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Newsroom Strategy Team The team could use its expertise and knowledge of the competitive landscape to help the mast- head evaluate and set priorities in areas like audi- ence development and publishing systems. It could help communicate digital and innova- tion goals in the newsroom and on the business side. It could help assess the resources needed to achieve each goal and make sure they have spe- cific metrics for success. The team could track ini- HELP IDENTIFY AND COMMUNICATE PRIORITIES tiatives and keep the masthead informed of wins and where we are underperforming. The team could also be a contact point for report- ers and editors with innovative ideas who need guidance on execution. This could also include explaining why some ideas aren’t being pursued, so that people can let go of pet projects that are going nowhere. The team could arrange “embeds” in the news- room for business-side units focused on reader experience. The team could help facilitate efforts with Audi- ence Development to design and launch desk- level experiments, and then communicate results back to the newsroom. WORK WITH DESKS TO FOSTER INNOVATION
81 We must begin an ongoing assessment of our print traditions and digital needs. In the coming years, The New York Times needs to accelerate its transition from a newspaper that also produces a rich and impressive digital report to a digital publication that also produces a rich and MOST REVENUE STILL COMES FROM PRINT... Advertising accounts for $667M, of which $170M is digital and $497M is print. Circulation accounts for $824M, of which $150M is digital and $674M print. printdigital 18% 25% ...BUT PRINT ACCOUNTS FOR A SMALL PERCENTAGE OF OUR READERS 0 15M10M5M 20M 25M 30M 3 Digital First impressive newspaper. This is not a matter of se- mantics. It is a critical, difficult and, at times, pain- ful transformation that will require us to rethink much of what we do every day. Our leaders know this and we have taken steps in these directions. But it has become increasingly clear that we are not moving with enough urgency. This may be the single most important long-term challenge facing the newsroom and its leaders. There are factors that, understandably, slow this tricky transition. More than three quarters of our advertising and subscription revenue still comes from the newspaper, and most of our employees have spent their careers building skills to succeed in print. But the huge majority of our readers are digi- tal, and this represents our single biggest opportu- nity for growth. As a business, this is an extremely difficult bal- Print readers Desktop readers Facebook fans Twitter followers Email subscribers Mobile readers News alerts subscribers
82 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First ancing act. It is just as tricky for the newsroom. The experience of putting out the newspaper informs almost every element of how we do our jobs, from the people we hire to how they work to what they produce. These assumptions — based on the news- paper’s fixed dimensions and hard deadlines — are so baked into our days that it is easy to overlook their artificial limitations or the new possibilities we could embrace. “The question of what is Timesian has been both the saving grace and artificial limiter of the news- room,” said one masthead editor. The continued profitability of the newspaper has bought us time. But that head start is eroding. Sev- eral billionaires have pledged parts of their fortunes to creating digital newsrooms. Start-ups, backed by venture capital, are redefining digital media. And traditional competitors have moved aggressively to remake themselves as “digital first.” “The newsroom of the future is not the current one dragged into it,” said John Paton, the CEO of the local newspaper chain that renamed itself Digi- tal First Media. “It is going to be re-built from the ground up.” We all wish there were a ready-made playbook for this shift. But the only real solutions will come from critical questioning, experimentation and a devotion to iterative change. The first step is an open-ended recommendation: The newsroom should begin an intensive review of its print traditions and digital needs — and create a road map for the difficult tran- sition ahead. We need to know where we are, where we’re headed and where we want to go. That means aggressively questioning many of our print-based traditions and their demands on our time, and determining which can be abandoned to free up resources for digital work . That also means assessing our digital needs, cre- ating new digital leadership posts and upgrading digital talent across the newsroom, especially with people from other innovative organizations and non-traditional competitors. Even more important than policy or structural changes is that the rank and file of the newsroom take ownership of this transformation. This means sending clear signals about goals, changing reward structures and basing promotions on behavior that moves us toward our digital future. “If you wait around for a generation of reporters to do this naturally,” the editor of one competing news organization said, “You are going to be left behind.” WHAT DOES IT MEAN TO BE ‘DIGITAL FIRST?’ Around the newsroom, this phrase often is used to refer to publishing articles on the web before putting them in print. But outside our walls, digital-first is an all-encompassing strategy. Digital-first means the top priority is producing the best possible digital report, free from the constraints of the newspaper. The last step is repackaging the best of that digital report for the next day’s paper. This transition requires rethinking staffing, struc- ture and work processes from top to bottom. Companies with no legacy platform have the advantage of being able to focus entirely on creating the best digital reports. For newspaper companies, making this transition can be so challenging that sev- eral of our competitors have handed responsibility for the daily paper to small, stand-alone teams so that everyone else can focus on digital.
83 Nathan Ashby-Kuhlman, our senior editor for dig- ital operations, recently sent a provocative email to the leaders of our digital newsroom. Calling the print paper “a powerfully conservative force” in the newsroom, he warned we were not doing enough to prepare for our digital future. The newsroom, he noted, is still governed by the traditions and limitations of print, and he made a table-pounding case that we should create content for a digital report and then use the best work from that effort to put out a print edition. “We don’t need to get there by the end of 2014,” he wrote. “But because this will be one of the most difficult transitions The New York Times’s news- room has ever made, it is urgent to start mapping out a strategy.” Years of private complaints around the building suddenly had a very public forum. Others quickly weighed in. A top member of our technology team complained that our changes so far have been “incremental and reactive,” and he called for a “holistic look at the way we work — job descriptions, tasks, workflows and organization — to make us the flexible, adapt- able organization we will need to be in order to sur- vive.” A top platform editor warned that print revenue was more likely to fall off a cliff than continue its steady decline. “We have already made great strides in becoming one integrated, print-and-digital news- room,” he wrote. “But we actually haven’t gotten far enough. It’s not enough to be an ‘integrated’ news- room. We have to become a digital newsroom, a small subset of which produces a print product.” And the new executive director for core digital products called for spending “at least an hour every week for, I suppose, ever,” discussing this transi- tion. “We start by painting a picture of where we want to be 1, 5, 10, 20 years from now — a best guess is fine and we can adjust as we go — and then map out the steps towards realizing that vision.” It’s not as if the newsroom has been standing still. Digital is now part of the newsroom ecosystem. In some departments, like Graphics, Digital Design and Interactive News, we have industry-leading op- erations, and the department heads have been el- evated to the masthead. And just this month, the af- ternoon Page One meetings were recast to be more of “a look ahead to coverage for digital delivery.” But to those charged with worrying abut the newsroom’s future, it’s clear we’re just a fraction of the way there. And compared to many of our com- petitors, we’re falling behind. ‘DIGITAL FIRST’ AS A MANTRA FOR CHANGE It may sound like a buzz-phrase, but “digital first” — as a strategy, a process and a mindset — is taking hold across the industry. New companies are using it to lure our best journalists, promising them the technology and talent to succeed without old con- straints. “It’s so rare to get an opportunity not only to build something from the ground up, but to build it with- out the pressure of producing content on a daily ba- sis,” said Eric Bates, who left his role as executive editor of Rolling Stone to join First Look Media. Some of our competitors have ruthlessly reorga- nized in the last two years around digital and grown significantly. “Once everyone at the senior level re- ally understood this, it prompted a huge interven- tion, big editorial changes,” said the head of The Fi- nancial Times’s digital operations. Over the last year, USA Today has been integrat- ing digital staff — like developers and social editors — into each desk. Now, a small team organizes and designs the print paper. “The best online journalism Discussion
84 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First Owning The Story 1. Alert the Opinion section in advance to line up a reaction. Instead, we published a column a day later. When Michael Sam, the college football player, decided to announce to the world that he is gay, he brought the story first to The Times and ESPN. Our package was well-executed and memorable, but some of our more digitally focused competitors got more traffic from the story than we did. If we had more of a digital-first approach, we would have developed in advance an hour-by-hour plan to expand our package of related content in order to keep readers on our site longer, and attract new ones. We would have been thinking as hard about “second hour” stories as we do about “second day” stories. Here is what a digital roll-out might look like: 2. Resurface our 2011 “Coming Out” series. Since the series tapped into gay communities, ask the edi- tor for those contacts. We didn’t find a link to this series in our Michael Sam coverage.
85 OTHER SUGGESTIONS: Implement a social promotion strategy the min- ute The Times posts the story, including reach- ing out to gay communities and influencers, via LinkedIn, Facebook and others. Reach out to Times reporters with large Twitter followings, especially those with prominence in gay and sports communities, to tweet the story to their followers. 3. Organize a Google+ hangout with another open- ly gay athlete. We later found numerous online vid- eo and television appearances with Jason Collins, an openly gay NBA player, talking about his friendship with Michael Sam. 4. Assign a reporter to live-blog Twitter reactions. We found several sites that beat us at assembling the reaction. Depite not having an exclusive, Sports Il- lustrated was the first to report on a backlash among NFL executives. 5. Post a short backstory on how we got the inter- view. SB Nation reported the backstory of our exclu- sive, and branded it “exclusive.” Its story dominated Twitter and Google News. Pre-produce video highlights to put clips on sites like Instagram and Twitter. Create tools to become a platform for the reac- tion after the news breaks. For example, we could create an interactive quiz or survey related to the draft, or start a moderated discussion thread with prominent figures.
86 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First goes into print at the end of the day,” said David Cal- laway, the editor-in-chief. “But nothing is native for print.” The Financial Times was spurred to take similar steps after its leaders studied changing readership trends and spent several weeks in Silicon Valley. They cut the number of editions from three to one. They moved 200 night production staffers to nor- mal daytime hours. They built up engagement, data and breaking news teams. And they put print in the hands of a small group of editors. “You have to shift the balance of power and work backwards,” said Lionel Barber, the editor. Another company, Digital First Media, recently announced “Project Unbolt.” This initiative, un- derway at dozens of newspapers (formerly known as Journal Register and Media News), is meant to transform “every process, every workflow step.” Steve Buttry, the company’s Digital Transformation Editor, said that the effort — named because print newsrooms typically have digital operations “bolted on” — has been surprisingly well-received by tradi- tional journalists. “I don’t hear so many resisting, curmudgeonly, ‘you can’t make me change’ reac- tions anymore,” he said. “I hear learning-curve types of questions.” The Wall Street Journal pledged to join the “digi- tal first” ranks, building a new “real-time news desk” with 60 people and a new “audience-engagement desk” with social-media editors and analytics spe- cialists at the center of their newsroom. They are in- tentionally hiring younger, less experienced employ- ees to speed them up and push for change. Ezra Klein was one of several prominent journal- ists who left the security of an established newspa- per for a digital-media startup. For Klein, the value of a guaranteed audience — The Washington Post’s historic trump card — was eclipsed by the value of technology and digital talent. Increasingly, the right technology and talent can build up a big audience very quickly. In his announcement, Klein focused on Vox’s con- tent management system, Chorus, as the key draw. “And behind Chorus is a world-class design and en- gineering team that is already helping us rethink the way we power newsrooms and present information.” Our own David Carr crystallized the moment in a recent column. “In digital media, technology is not a wingman, it is The Man,” he wrote. “How something is made and published is often as important as what is made.” DIGITAL FIRST AT THE TIMES Over decades, we have perfected our formula for putting out a world-class paper 365 days a year. But many of our traditions, routines and habits — per- fect for the fixed deadlines and constraints of print — seem increasingly out of step with the digital world. For example, the vast majority of our content is still published late in the evening, but our digital traffic is busiest early in the morning. We aim am- bitious stories for Sunday because it is our largest print readership, but weekends are slowest online. Each desk labors over section fronts, but pays little attention to promoting its work on social media. Once you start looking at The Times through this lens, the questions start spilling out: Should our dig- ital report only present what’s new, or should it also showcase content from our archive that has been repackaged in creative and useful ways? Is the 700- 1100 word story, the sweet spot for print, the right length for digital readers? If weekly columns are struggling to win repeat readers, how can we build loyal followings? Our mindset is to perfect, then release. This should always be the case for our journalism. But we must question whether everything needs to meet this standard. Our competitors are launching new products or features as betas, and then using vital feedback from readers — rather than another round of internal feedback — to improve. “I’m glad we still have the standards of quality that we do,” said one Times platform editor. “That’s what distinguishes us in this era. What bothers me is when standards are used as an excuse to say no to an idea.” We look at our competitors through a print lens,
87 as well. Newsroom leaders spend a lot of time read- ing other outlets’ stories. Few are studying their digi- tal strategies — presentation, social presence, search optimization, navigation and mobile strategy. Fewer still are spending enough time looking at digital me- dia outlets that we don’t consider competitors. And even fewer are looking at competitors on their smartphones. As a result, it is distressingly common to see mistakes on our apps. For instance, we noticed that our popular Busi- ness Day columnists showed up at the very bottom of the business section. That is because our mobile site is automatically loaded from our web section fronts. Similarly, we’ve spotted numerous stories that invited readers to post comments, even though our iPhone and iPad apps do not allow users to com- ment. Instead of running mobile on autopilot, we need to view the platform as an experience that de- mands its own quality control and creativity. Moreover, beyond simply recognizing and en- couraging new behavior, we must be incentivizing that behavior through new reward structures. Most reporters know exactly how frequently they’ve appeared on Page One in the previous year — indeed, annual performance reviews often lead off with that figure. Similarly, desk heads are keenly aware when they have a dry spell of Page One sto- ries, and backfielders spend countless hours each week to making sure the pipeline is filled with sto- ries that could be offered for the front page. To right this imbalance, we need to provide more feedback. Editors should be monitoring things like their reporters’ social-media presence and willing- ness to try new ways of telling stories. And desk heads should be told if they are not keeping up digi- tally. This feedback — which a new analytics unit will make far easier to provide, based on data — is essen- tial because New York Times editors and reporters will always be working at capacity. They just need clearer and more consistent signals. “They mostly seem to care about the front page and big, giant sto- ries, and that’s great,” one desk head told us. “But if 13 million people need a news alert, we ought to know that. It ought to be somebody’s job on the masthead to tell us that. We do respond, but it’s a matter of shifting our burdens.” OUR DIGITAL BENCH OF TALENT To help change the culture, we need more and bet- ter digital talent. We often hire in bursts for new strategic ini- tiatives, such as video, or offer promotions when someone is considering leaving. But these efforts are no comment At the bottom of this Kristof column on our mobile app, he invited readers to comment. But the app does not have that feature.
88 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First In Their Own Words: Digital Departures Why did you leave The Times? “I looked around the organization and saw the plum jobs — even ones with explicitly digital man- dates — going to people with little experience in digital. Meanwhile, journalists with excellent digi- tal credentials were stuck moving stories around on section fronts.” “When it takes 20 months to build one thing, your skill set becomes less about innovation and more about navigating bureaucracy. That means the longer you stay, the more you’re doubling down on staying even longer. But if there’s no leadership role to aspire to, staying too long becomes risky.” “I didn’t want to be a straight-up news reporter or even a straight news editor. I always felt a little bit outside of what was most core to The Times, and what The Times was most proud of.” “I felt stifled by the hierarchy of the organization; meetings predicated upon meetings that did not lead to resolution or clear next steps.” What was appealing about life outside The Times? “The BuzzFeeds of the world have strong central leadership with clear digital visions not tied down by fiefdoms and legacy products.” “I wanted to learn a lot from a purely digital com- pany that didn’t have complicated print legacy requirements. I still feel to some extent that The Times, or large parts of The Times, have a be- grudging acceptance of technology.” “I could pursue my passion and grow as a leader faster elsewhere, in an environment with less rigid roles and a deeper understanding of the possibili- ties of true digital journalism.” What can The Times to do retain digital leaders? “Young digital talent is rarely motivated by mon- ey. Typically they are motivated by the potential to make impact at an organization that speaks to their values. This is the NYT trump card and should be played as often as possible.” “Figure out a way to take a big chance on some- one. In 1992, the ‘Today’ show was already a 40- year American institution when NBC appointed 26-year-old Jeff Zucker as its executive producer. We all know the success that happened after that. But can you imagine something like that happen- ing at The New York Times?” “Young people have many opportunities and only the rarest of the bunch will be willing to wait 20 years for the opportunity to truly be a leader. But find a way to give someone some real authority, and you may be onto something.” The Times is strong enough to withstand the loss of any one journalist. But when a talented digital col- league departs, it can feel more disruptive because our bench is not as deep. We asked five people who left digital jobs at The Times to explain their departures. Some of the reasons are well known, such as the lack of growth opportunities. But they also expressed frustration that their work was not fully understood or appreciated by the leadership. And they complained that their efforts to elevate our digital report were hindered by tradition and bureaucracy. Everyone we interviewed said they were passionate about The Times but could not turn down more au- tonomy, creativity and influence elsewhere. Tellingly, none expressed regret that they left. We Interviewed: Soraya Darabi: Launched social media at The Times. Founded a startup that was sold for $10 million and featured on the cover of Fast Company. Alice DuBois: Former deputy of digital platforms at The Times now director of editorial product at BuzzFeed. Jonathan Ellis: Former senior editor for mobile platforms at The Times. Joined Mashable to become managing editor for the growing newsroom. Liz Heron: Former social media editor at The Times. Joined Facebook after serving as head of audience engagement at The Wall Street Journal. Zach Wise: Former senior multimedia producer for The Times. Now Associate Professor, The Medill School of Journalism at Northwestern University.
89 largely reactive. The newsroom should think about our hiring needs — including jobs we need to create — for the next five to 10 years. Our current approach overvalues journalistic skills for digital hires and undervalues digital skills for journalism hires — often because that reflects how most editors know how to evaluate talent. In- deed, many people hired into purely digital roles said their clips were the most important factor in landing their jobs. One department head warned that we must change our mindset from hiring people “to continue the legacy we’ve established” to hiring people “to shake things up.” This is true for our traditional journalism posi- tions, as well. We need more reporters and editors with an intuitive sense of how to write for the web, an interest in experimenting with mobile and social storytelling, a proficiency with data,adesiretoengagewithread- ers on and off our site, and a nu- anced understanding of the shift- ing competitive landscape. We have people like Jenna Wortham and Mike Luo but there are far too few of them. This is particularly true in the edit- ing ranks, where many desks lack editors who even know how to evaluate digital work. This is one of our most pressing needs. We also must find ways to develop and empower our existing digital talent so that they can help shape strategy. The complaints from digital staffers in our news- room are, by now, familiar to our leadership: they feel their expertise isn’t put to good use, have few growth opportunities and believe their bosses do not understand their skills. The reason producers, platform editors and de- velopers feel dissatisfied is that they want to play creative roles, not service roles that involve admin- istering and fixing. It would be like reporters com- ing here hoping to write features but instead we ask them to spend their days editing wire stories into briefs. As a result, some of our brightest digital staffers have either left or asked to transition into reporting or editing because those roles offered a clearer path for career growth. This creates a troubling dynamic — we retain our best digital players by putting them in positions that don’t take advantage of their skill sets. These are clear signs of our newspaper mindset trumping our digital mindset. A number of people who left The Times recently said they saw only a small number of senior roles to grow into, and when those positions do open up, they are often handed to traditional journalists. This only compounds the problem: Because of the short- age of digital natives in senior leadership, we have trouble knowing who should be promoted. Collaborative efforts in the newsroom help de- velop and empower digital talent, and they provide more opportunities for our digital colleagues to dis- tinguish themselves with current leaders. For example, Sam Sifton said the most transformative part of his experience working on the Cooking product has been sitting side-by-side with software devel- opers. If he raises a question, a developer will overhear it and start searching for a solution. Prototypes are created in an afternoon, not a month. Kevin Delaney, a former top editor at The Wall Street Journal who founded Quartz, said that his technologists and journalists all sit together. “My conviction is that traditional organizations separate this process, which really greatly handicaps innova- tion,” he said. “The developer understands the pro- cess because they are involved. Developers are not order-takers.” Bringing someone from Product, Design, Tech- nology or one of our other Reader Experience units into the newsroom would make it far easier for them to spot problems and offer solutions — people like Renda Morton and Libby Gery, the user-experience designers who invented the forthcoming “Watch- ing” feature on our home page. Or someone like Paul Yorke, who has played a crucial role in build- ing our news-alert system into one of the most ef- Digital staffers want to play creative roles, not service roles.
90 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First PAGE ONE The newsroom is unanimous: We are focusing too much time and energy on Page One. This concern — which we heard in virtually every interview we conducted, including with reporters, desk heads, and masthead editors — has long been a concern for the leadership. And yet it persists. Page One sets the daily rhythms, consumes our focus, and provides the newsroom’s defining metric for success. The recent announcement from Tom Jolly to focus the Page One meeting more on the web report is a great step in the right direction, but many people have voiced their skepticism that it will truly change our focus. Here is a typical complaint from a Washington reporter who frequently appears on A1: “Our internal fixation on it can be unhealthy, disproportionate and ultimately counterproductive. Just think about how many points in our day are still oriented around A1­­­­­— from the 10 a.m. meeting to the summaries that reporters file in the early after- noon to the editing time that goes into those summa- ries to the moment the verdict is rendered at 4:30. In Washington, there’s even an email that goes out to the entire bureau alerting everyone which six stories made it. That doesn’t sound to me like a newsroom that’s thinking enough about the web.” fective broadcast devices in journalism. There have been some initial efforts along these lines, with Erin Grau, Kelly Alfieri, James Robinson and others, and they are worth building on. In another promis- ing sign, Ian Fisher is bringing developers into the newsroom. However, our producers provide a case study for how dispersing digital talent is insufficient without a clear plan for using them. Many work in a vague, catch-all position that can be best described as a “digital person on a desk who is not a reporter or editor.” First, their bosses need to better understand their skills and how they could be put to use. “You can’t take new talent and put them in old structures where they are second-class citizens,” said the editor of one competing newspaper. “That is not real change. You must change the structure of power.”
91 Winning The Talent Wars In the 1990s, the paper of record decided to add more sparkle to its just-the-facts approach to pro- ducing the daily report. We started recruiting writ- ers with voice and style from publications we had long overlooked, like New York magazine and The Observer. Color photos soon followed. Then more engaging graphics. Now we take it for granted that The Times is a magnet for the best writers, photographers and graphics editors in the business. We’ve arrived at a similar moment. The only way to ensure that our report keeps pace is to build a newsroom with a deeper and broader mix of digital talents: technologists, user experi- ence designers, product manag- ers, data analysts and, most of all, digitally inclined reporters and editors. Or, to set aside those labels and put our needs in more ba- sic terms, we want makers, who build tools to streamline our newsgathering; entrepreneurs, who know what it takes to launch new digital ef- forts; reader advocates, who ensure that we are de- signing useful products that meet our subscribers’ changing needs; and zeitgeist watchers, who have a sixth sense for the shifting technology and behavior. Most of all, we need those rare — and sought after — talents who can check off many of those boxes. And we need them now. While we receive ac- colades for our digital efforts like “Snowfall,” we nevertheless are at risk of becoming known as a place that does not fully understand, reward and celebrate digital skills. And many our competitors — including The Wall Street Journal, The Guardian, The Financial Times and The Washington Post — are ahead of us in making such hires a top priority. Recruiting the right talent is imperative because the success rate of hiring a digital native — the peo- ple who have grown up in a digital world, rather than adjusted to it — is far higher than moving tra- ditional journalists into digital posts. It’s not just a matter of possessing a particular skill set. They have an intuitive sense of how to adapt to the changing demands of technology and reader behavior. “You need to build a whole new culture, a whole new talent base that’s completely dedicated to the new,” said Justin Smith, the C.E.O. of Bloomberg News, who earned his stripes transforming The Atlantic from a money-losing magazine to a thriv- ing and profitable digital operation. “Don’t trust that people are ever going to be able to transition.” Similarly, editors at The Financial Times and USA Today told us that the most important move they have made in recent years was to aggressively bring in digital talent. In both cases, they used buyouts to make room for new hires, with a focus on clearing out reporters and editors who were actively opposing changes. Digital media startups don’t have to worry about retraining their staffs. “Every year our talent pool gets bet- ter and better,” said Henry Blodget, who founded Business Insider. “A new generation of writers and reporters grew up in digital, and it’s second nature to them.” Attracting digital talent will take more work than we might think. We assume, rightly so, that ambi- tious journalists want to work at The Times. But our storied brand is less of a draw among digital natives. They are drawn to opportunities to create something, experiment and solve problems, and re- think how news is made — without the guardrails and bureaucracy of a legacy organization. It doesn’t help that we often can’t compete on wages for top digital talent. But we can compete by pitching our- selves as a great Internet success story, selling po- tential hires on the satisfaction of helping transform a world-class, mission-driven organization. We need makers, entrepreneurs, reader advocates and zeitgeist watchers.
92 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First Here are potential steps to attract digital talent: Identify our skills gaps and aggressively recruit to fill them. Make sure our hiring managers understand the demands of the jobs they’re trying to fill, and can assess the skills of applicants. Put less emphasis on traditional journalism skills in our digital hires, and put more emphasis on digital skills in our journalism hires. To bring in new ideas, hire fewer people from traditional competitors, and recruit more from innovative start-ups. Use our journalism as a recruiting and retention tool, by letting talented technologists, user-expe- rience designers, product managers and digital strategists work more closely on the report. Empower and develop our digital talent by asking them to help shape, rather than simply imple- ment, strategy. Consider hiring top digital talent at a senior level to send an important signal about our priorities to potential recruits. Mark Suppes An Interactive News developer, Suppes is almost certainly the only Times employee who has built a nuclear fusion reactor with about $35,000 in spare parts. He also built Gucci’s website. Mike Bostock A graphics editor in the San Francisco bureau, Bostok created a library of graphics code used by publications all over the world. In the tech commu- nity, he is a revered figure. Chris Wiggins A top data scientist from Columbia University, Wig- gins is working to bring more data scientists to The Times at a time when experts in this field are in short supply and high demand. Jeremy Ashkenas Ashkenas created CoffeeScript, a programming language. His reputation helps us attract top talent. “He influences how things are built on the web,” a colleague said. Grooming Digital Leaders We need more digital talent over all, but we also need more digitally inclined leaders. This shortfall stems from several longstanding biases. We rarely hire outsiders directly into lead- ership positions. We have struggled to groom our digital journalists for leadership, in part because we don’t fully know how to use their skills. And we have a tendency to move traditional journalists into top digital roles. It’s critically important to have traditional jour- nalists involved in crafting and implementing our digital strategy. But having so many of these posts filled by traditional journalists deprives us of deep expertise to push our digital efforts to the next level. We need to understand the demands of such roles and the skills they require, and to be clear-eyed about the trade-offs when pushing journalists into such jobs without relevant experience. This pattern of promotion risks, among other things, sending the message that the only way to move up in the compa- ny is through traditional journalism, even on digital career paths. When our competitors hire for critical digital positions, they don’t seek people with print expe- rience; they seek people with the most impressive resumes. An important shift happened recently with the promotion of Aron Pilhofer and Steve Duenes to the masthead. The promotions paid off quickly: Both are responsible for hiring much of our best digital talent and for launching ambitious digital initia- tives. They watch competitors and notice trends — making the conversation about our mobile efforts or new products richer. Digital Stars Many our of digital colleagues are famous in their fields, though few in the newsroom are aware of their talents and reputations.
93 Assessing The Newsroom’s Digital Needs Before we can embrace many of the opportunities described in this report, we must first have better un- derstanding of our current digital capabilities and where we need to improve. We have identified five areas that warrant more investment: strategy, analytics, product, platforms and audience development. Our competitors — old and new — have been staffing up in these disciplines, and we must join the battle to better meet our digital needs and to build a deeper bench of digital talent. What follows is an assessment of these needs, rather than a proposed organizational chart for new hires in these areas. The precise structure matters less than insuring they have a central role in the newsroom. STRATEGY Need: Strategy is an implicit part of many jobs but planning is not centralized. Masthead editors and desk heads have little time to focus on long-term strategy. The newsroom does not have a list of pri- orities to coordinate with the business side. Without a deep understanding of competitors’ digital strate- gies, we lag behind on best practices. Innovators in the newsroom have trouble translating their needs and executing their ideas. Opportunity: Create a newsroom strategy team that would apprise the masthead of changing reader be- havior and strategy shifts by new and traditional competitors. It would help prioritize and commu- nicate the newsroom’s digital initiatives. The team could conduct studies to answer strategic questions. PRODUCTS Need: The Times’s digital products, especially mo- bile, no longer set the standard for digital journal- ism. People who serve as product editors are focused on short-term fixes rather than long-term editorial vision. Other products, like email, are neglected. Be- cause the team is understaffed and has little guid- ance from the masthead, their efforts are focused on business-side initiatives to generate revenue, not newsroom needs . Opportunity: Hire and empower more product edi- tors to help develop reader-facing products for the website, mobile apps, email, video and community platforms, as well as the reader-facing features of cross-platform products, such as breaking news and personalization. They would work closely with their product-manager counterparts on the business side and represent the newsroom’s interests in new- product initiatives. IN DEMAND Journalism job postings show that the demand for digital talent far outstrips the supply.
94 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First PLATFORMS Need: There is no single newsroom owner of our content-management system, Scoop, which is where all our digital content is created. As a result, our CMS lags behind systems at the The Huffington Post, BuzzFeed and Vox in terms of functionality, ease of use and speed. Our Interactive News department is a big driver of innovation, but their work is often not replicable because it is not built into journalist- facing technology. Because the newsroom leader- ship has not set clear priorities, the CMS technology team is forced to address minor fixes, often for indi- vidual desks, instead of focusing on major editorial innovation. New-product teams, like NYT Now, had to work around our publishing systems because they couldn’t get their work prioritized. Opportunity: Create platform editor positions to serve as the newsroom leads on internal products like Scoop, working closely with colleagues in In- teractive News and Technology to identify problems with our publishing systems and prioritize and build solutions. Platform editors also could identify suc- cessful one-off projects that could be turned into replicable templates. They could also advocate for and develop models for structured data and tagging. Platform editors could work with product editors to identify how reader-facing product innovations — for example, a feature to help readers follow a story — can be absorbed into newsroom workflows and publishing systems. AUDIENCE DEVELOPMENT Need: We are not aggressive enough about pro- moting our work so that our content reaches its maximum natural audience. We lack a presence on important social platforms, and our Twitter and Facebook accounts are managed by different depart- ments. Our website editors do not use some strate- gies for maximizing traffic that are standard prac- tice elsewhere, even though these approaches would not conflict with our editorial values. A number of valuable tools like repackaging, personalization, op- timization, and direct outreach are not being used strategically. Opportunity: We need to focus on growing our au- dience and keeping our existing readers on our site longer. This comes through optimization of our web site and off-site distribution, especially in social media. Our content needs a newsroom-driven pro- motion strategy ahead of and just after publication. Raising our game in audience development would help us win back the traffic around our own content that other sites like Huffington Post are stealing from us. The need is particularly urgent given the declining number of people reaching us through our home page. ANALYTICS Need: We don’t regularly use data to inform our de- cisions in the newsroom, which means we are miss- ing out on an opportunity to better understand read- er behavior, adjust to trends and drive traffic to our journalism. This makes it more difficult to set goals and assess progress. A strong analytics operation is essential to every one of these digital needs. Opportunity: Analytics skills are needed in many parts of the newsroom, including for top-level strat- egy as well as desk-level decision-making. We need to hire analytics experts to work with news, plat- form, and product editors, newsroom strategists and the people trying to grow our audience. We need to also work closely with data scientists in the Con- sumer Insight Group.
95 Shift the newsroom’s center of gravity away from Page One. Creating additional measures of suc- cess, using metrics like traffic, sharing and en- gagement could help. Assess our processes, workflow, staffing and tra- ditions. Changing what we do will be difficult without changing how we do it. This means look- ing critically at every element of how we work. A first step is listing ways in which we are optimized for print rather than digital. Ask our editors to read more like our readers. Each desk should have at least one staff member monitoring its report on the mobile web, and on our mobile and tablet apps. Eventually this will become second nature. DE-EMPHASIZE PRINT Rethink the “competition.” Ask every department to develop a list of new competitors for their sec- tions, and encourage their backfield to familiarize themselves with new apps and digital-only sites. Make digital a key part of evaluations. Reviews should include sections for digital as well as print performance. This should be the case for the whole newsroom, particularly for leaders. Has their desk developed a smart strategy for social media? Are they open and enthusiastic about ex- perimenting? Are they making smart, digitally fo- cused hires? To do this, we must first clearly com- municate digital expectations to our employees. How to Get There Reevaluate our current digital needs and create new positions. These range from the top (head of audience development, head of analytics) to the lower ranks (developers who build tools to streamline our reporting processes, a strategist to manage our undervalued email newsletters). Assess the digital capabilities of various desks and fill the holes. We would notice quickly if National lacked a strong investigative reporter or if Metro didn’t have a rewrite ace. Similarly, we should track whether these desks have strong digital tal- ent — not just as producers but reporters and edi- tors. Those with such skills should be encouraged to share best practices within their desks. Build the newsroom out of Legos, not bricks. The right structure for today won’t be the right struc- ture for tomorrow. Our needs will change quickly and our skills will become out of date. More than ASSESS DIGITAL NEEDS anything we need to make ourselves adaptable. That means constantly assessing needs, recruit- ing talent and changing structures. And that means sometimes creating jobs with expiration dates to help us in transitional moments. Add digital specialists to our staffing committee. Once we have a sense of our needs, we need to fill them, and a digital specialist who participates in vetting new hires and promotions would help us identify gaps and the people best positioned to fill them. Janet has already recommended such a move. Maintain a list of the best talents in digital media and begin courting them. Right now other com- panies are aggressively bringing in digital talent. Because the Times newsroom is behind on many fronts, like analytics and audience development, it is even more important that we identify game-
96 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First changing and game-improving talent. Accept that digital talent is in high demand. To hire digital talent will take more money, more persuasion and more freedom once they are within The Times — even when candidates might strike us as young or less accomplished. Develop- ers, product managers, user-experience design- ers and smart digital thinkers are commanding a significant premium. Find ways to empower our current digital staff. We want a culture of experimentation in the newsroom. For example, we could give producers responsibility for more testing, and then ask them to share their findings with the organization. Let employees transfer easily between newsroom and operational units. In many cases, the best positions for valued digital employees already ex- Consider a task force to explore what it will take to become a digital-first newsroom. We’ve seen a number of other newspapers take this approach and more people are discussing this possibility in our newsroom. Examining what it would take to become digital-first is a major effort and may eventually require stand-alone group to lead it. Consider creating a digital fellowship program. One way to bring top digital talent into the news- EXPLORE MORE SERIOUS STEPS room without paying Facebook wages would be to create a fellowship program in partnership with a university like MIT and its Media Lab. Infusing desks with digital trailblazers can lead to fruitful digital collaboration. Once they’re in the door, we have a better chance of retaining top performers. We can recruit “visiting professors” from Google, Facebook and other companies. Such efforts also serve as powerful recruiting tools for top talent. ist — on the business side. It is in our interest for Product, R&D, Design, Technology and Consum- er Insight to have, and to help retain, top talent. Such moves are often logical extensions of jobs in the digital newsroom. This would create a huge new range of senior positions. It would also open up another pool of future leaders for us. Identify the rising digital stars in the newsroom. Show them they are appreciated, and solicit ideas from them on how The Times can be better. Help develop their careers and have them help us iden- tify more talent. Make a star hire. Talent attracts talent, and few steps would send a better signal than getting an- other respected digital leader into a senior posi- tion. This would also help generate new ideas and strategies.

More Related Content

PDF
The New York Times Innovation Report
Nancy Karam
 
PDF
Capgemini Assists Enterprises in Harnessing the Power of Social Media in a Ch...
Dana Gardner
 
PDF
How is the web affecting your business
Patrick Willemarck
 
PPTX
The fundamentals of digital engagement in 2014
Simon Nash
 
PDF
Gingras
Knight Center
 
PDF
People's Insights Volume 1, Issue 44: Nike FuelBand
MSL
 
PPTX
PR & Web 3.0 - You Haven't Seen Anything Yet
Kevin McFall
 
PDF
10 Ideas For The New Decade
David Armano
 
The New York Times Innovation Report
Nancy Karam
 
Capgemini Assists Enterprises in Harnessing the Power of Social Media in a Ch...
Dana Gardner
 
How is the web affecting your business
Patrick Willemarck
 
The fundamentals of digital engagement in 2014
Simon Nash
 
Gingras
Knight Center
 
People's Insights Volume 1, Issue 44: Nike FuelBand
MSL
 
PR & Web 3.0 - You Haven't Seen Anything Yet
Kevin McFall
 
10 Ideas For The New Decade
David Armano
 

What's hot (11)

PDF
2021 SoDA Year in Review
Society of Digital Agencies
 
PDF
10 ideas for the new decade
Jonathan Dubost
 
PDF
Community Management Playbook
Yammer
 
PDF
PR 2020 The Dawn of the Augmented Influence
MSL
 
PPTX
Digital Immersion: What's Next for Social Media Marketing
Andy Hunter
 
PDF
Complete Community Connection
Steve Buttry
 
PDF
The Case for Advertising in Interactive Digital Magazines
jgordon
 
PDF
A Manifesto for Building Relationships in the Digital Era by Brian Solis and ...
Brian Solis
 
PDF
Digital Storytelling for Social Impact
Jay Geneske
 
PDF
Data Driven Marketing: the DNA of customer orientated companies
Good Rebels
 
PDF
2020 SoDA Year in Review
Society of Digital Agencies
 
2021 SoDA Year in Review
Society of Digital Agencies
 
10 ideas for the new decade
Jonathan Dubost
 
Community Management Playbook
Yammer
 
PR 2020 The Dawn of the Augmented Influence
MSL
 
Digital Immersion: What's Next for Social Media Marketing
Andy Hunter
 
Complete Community Connection
Steve Buttry
 
The Case for Advertising in Interactive Digital Magazines
jgordon
 
A Manifesto for Building Relationships in the Digital Era by Brian Solis and ...
Brian Solis
 
Digital Storytelling for Social Impact
Jay Geneske
 
Data Driven Marketing: the DNA of customer orientated companies
Good Rebels
 
2020 SoDA Year in Review
Society of Digital Agencies
 
Ad

Viewers also liked (11)

PPT
Sampling
umarpk4all
 
PPT
20140826 ddoc south_americaflight
Mary O'Connell
 
PDF
Infographic1
referral traffic
 
PPTX
La recopilación de obras y autores como estrategia
Alejandra Cornelio
 
PPTX
Summer flowers in Estonia
RutaPels
 
PPTX
The arabic institute
Susanismat
 
PDF
Eindraport versie 14; 24 08-2014
Thomas Leflere
 
PPTX
Türk Edebiyatinda Yenileşme Dönemi
hilalkasap
 
PDF
Vidhya_J_CV
Vidhya.J Jayakumar
 
PPTX
Representation of the Earth: Maps
Nieves Correa
 
PPT
Map Quiz
Nieves Correa
 
Sampling
umarpk4all
 
20140826 ddoc south_americaflight
Mary O'Connell
 
Infographic1
referral traffic
 
La recopilación de obras y autores como estrategia
Alejandra Cornelio
 
Summer flowers in Estonia
RutaPels
 
The arabic institute
Susanismat
 
Eindraport versie 14; 24 08-2014
Thomas Leflere
 
Türk Edebiyatinda Yenileşme Dönemi
hilalkasap
 
Vidhya_J_CV
Vidhya.J Jayakumar
 
Representation of the Earth: Maps
Nieves Correa
 
Map Quiz
Nieves Correa
 
Ad

Similar to Document (20)

PDF
Reimagining Magazines for Data-Driven Times
Malcolm Netburn
 
PDF
Surviving the Disruptive Change in Media Industry
Ray Business Technologies
 
PDF
Surviving the Disruptive Change in Media Industry
Ray Business Technologies
 
PDF
Changing Channels? How have media priorities changed for communications direc...
PRmoment
 
PDF
Digital Media Strategies 2013 - Full Report from TheMediaBriefing
Patrick Smith
 
PDF
Vocus White Paper
HOSHVA PR
 
PDF
Brand journalism en
LEWIS
 
PDF
European Technology Media Report
3MonkeysZeno
 
PPTX
Pressing Forward_ Unleashing the Power of Press Releases for LA Success.pptx
TopPRAngencyLosAngel
 
PDF
Digital Publishing-20pp (2)
Nick Bennett
 
PDF
World Press Trends Outlook 2022-2023
Damian Radcliffe
 
PDF
Digital Visions: Ten Ideas for the New Decade
Edelman
 
PDF
10ideasforthenewdecade
Nanda Ivens
 
PDF
10 Ideas For The New Decade by David Armano
Edelman Digital
 
PDF
10 Ideas For The New Decade By Edelman
Julius Trujillo
 
PPTX
The impact of internet on newspapers
MsJMcLeod
 
PDF
Come Together: Defining the Complementary Roles of Print and Online
Howard Finberg
 
PPS
Boris Krstović - News 3.0 : Online Publishing And Semantic Web
biZbuZZ
 
PDF
2010 Razorfish Outlook Report
Razorfish
 
PDF
2010 Razorfish Outlook Report
Razorfish
 
Reimagining Magazines for Data-Driven Times
Malcolm Netburn
 
Surviving the Disruptive Change in Media Industry
Ray Business Technologies
 
Surviving the Disruptive Change in Media Industry
Ray Business Technologies
 
Changing Channels? How have media priorities changed for communications direc...
PRmoment
 
Digital Media Strategies 2013 - Full Report from TheMediaBriefing
Patrick Smith
 
Vocus White Paper
HOSHVA PR
 
Brand journalism en
LEWIS
 
European Technology Media Report
3MonkeysZeno
 
Pressing Forward_ Unleashing the Power of Press Releases for LA Success.pptx
TopPRAngencyLosAngel
 
Digital Publishing-20pp (2)
Nick Bennett
 
World Press Trends Outlook 2022-2023
Damian Radcliffe
 
Digital Visions: Ten Ideas for the New Decade
Edelman
 
10ideasforthenewdecade
Nanda Ivens
 
10 Ideas For The New Decade by David Armano
Edelman Digital
 
10 Ideas For The New Decade By Edelman
Julius Trujillo
 
The impact of internet on newspapers
MsJMcLeod
 
Come Together: Defining the Complementary Roles of Print and Online
Howard Finberg
 
Boris Krstović - News 3.0 : Online Publishing And Semantic Web
biZbuZZ
 
2010 Razorfish Outlook Report
Razorfish
 
2010 Razorfish Outlook Report
Razorfish
 

Document

  • 4. 3 The New York Times is winning at journalism. Of all the challenges facing a media company in the digi- tal age, producing great journalism is the hardest. Our daily report is deep, broad, smart and engaging ­— and we’ve got a huge lead over the competition. At the same time, we are falling behind in a sec- ond critical area: the art and science of getting our journalism to readers. We have always cared about the reach and impact of our work, but we haven’t done enough to crack that code in the digital era. This is where our competitors are pushing ahead of us. The Washington Post and The Wall Street Journal have announced aggressive moves in re- cent months to remake themselves for this age. First Look Media and Vox Media are creating newsrooms custom-built for digital. The Guardian and USA Today have embraced emerging best practices that have helped grow readership. And Huffington Post and Flipboard often get more traffic from Times journalism than we do. In contrast, over the last year The Times has watched readership fall significantly. Not only is the audience on our website shrinking but our audience on our smartphone apps has dipped, an extremely worrying sign on a growing platform. Our core mission remains producing the world’s best journalism. But with the endless upheaval in technology, reader habits and the entire busi- ness model, The Times needs to pursue smart new strategies for growing our audience. The urgency is only growing because digital media is getting more crowded, better funded and far more innovative. The first section of this report explores in detail the need for the newsroom to take the lead in get- ting more readers to spend more time reading more of our journalism. It offers specific strategies and tactics to accomplish this goal, often called audience development. Introduction Pulitzer Day, April 2013
  • 5. Executive Summary4 Simply offering recommendations for improving our efforts to get our journalism to readers is not enough, however. The difficulties we face in audi- ence development are symptomatic of our need to become a more nimble, digitally focused newsroom that can thrive in a landscape of constant change. The second part of this report examines specific recommendations that we believe will help strength- en our newsroom for the digital era. That means taking more time to assess the landscape and chart the road ahead, rethink print-centric traditions, use experiments and data to inform decisions, hire and empower the right digital talent and work hand in hand with reader-focused departments on the busi- ness side. These needs are all deeply intertwined — getting better at one will help all the others. This is a moment we are well positioned to seize. The anxiety that filled the newsroom only a few years ago has mostly dissipated. The success of the paywall has provided financial stability as we be- come more digitally focused. The sale of other prop- erties like The Boston Globe has allowed the leader- ship to focus squarely on The New York Times. Both Mark Thompson and Jill Abramson have established themselves as willing and eager to push the compa- ny in new, sometimes uncomfortable directions. Indeed, all of us have been struck by the news- room’s momentum in many critical areas that we discuss throughout the report — key digital pro- motions, promising product initiatives, the mobile imperative, and productive collaborations with the business side. The masthead recently embraced an- alytics and is in the process of building up a team that will help the newsroom use data to inform deci- sions, which would have been one of our main rec- ommendations. That momentum has contributed to a new sense of openness and opportunity across the organiza- tion. Our company goals speak volumes: Strategy for Growth, Speed and Agility, Unlocking the Power of Data, and One NYT. The newsroom, once resis- tant to change, is energized by these recent success- es and eager to tackle difficult questions and try new things. And the business side, with a growing bench of talent and an increasingly shared mission of serv- ing readers, is eager for the newsroom lead the way. Our overarching goal is to help the masthead build on that momentum and take advantage of that openness. For this report, we have pulled together informa- tion and insights to help you do that, based on hun- dreds of interviews, a deep dive into our operations, a close look at the competitive landscape and, with that rarest of journalistic privileges, the time to step The Times Reaches A Vast Print And Digital Audience.... 1.25M Print Subscribers 760K Digital Subscribers 30M Web readers in U.S. per month 20M Mobile readers in U.S. per month 6.5M E-Mail Newsletters Subscribers 11.3M Twitter followers 5.7M Facebook followers 13.5M News Alerts audience
  • 6. 5 back and think. Some of these recommendations will seem obvi- ous; others may seem more controversial at first glance. All were developed with full commitment to the values of The Times and with the understanding that we have few extra resources lying around. The few new roles we have proposed are not fo- cused on creating new journalism; their goal is to get more out of the journalism we are already creating. We want to help tune the newsroom engine to get all the cylinders firing more efficiently. It should be stated explicitly that there is no single transformational idea in this report. Transforma- tion can be a dangerous word in our current envi- ronment because it suggests a shift from one solid state to another; it implies there is an end point. In- stead, we have watched the dizzying growth of smart phones and tablets, even as we are still figuring out the web. We have watched the massive migration of readers to social media even as we were redesigning our home page. Difficult new questions will arrive with each new shift. In all likelihood, we will spend the rest of our careers wrestling with them. The leader of another organization called this era, “A period of muddling through.” Not a single person among the hundreds we inter- viewed ever suggested tinkering with the journalistic values and integrity that make the Times the great- est journalistic institution in the world. But we must evolve, and quickly, to maintain that status over the coming decades. ...But Many Competitors Are Growing Faster Huffington Post USA Today BuzzFeed New York Times Wall Street Journal Vox Media 20M 40M 60M 80M 100M 120M JUN 2013APR 2013 AUG 2013 OCT 2013 DEC 2013 JAN 2014 Readers (Millions) Huffington Post surpassed us years ago in reader traffic, and BuzzFeed pulled ahead in 2013.
  • 7. Executive Summary6 More than ever, the hard work of growing our audi- ence falls squarely on the newsroom. The realities of a cluttered Internet and distracted mobile world require extra effort to get our journalism to readers. This work requires creativity, editorial judgment and offers us the chance to ensure that our journal- ism lands with even greater impact. There should be a senior newsroom leader in charge of Audience Development, but this effort Our Proposals, In Brief MAKE DEVELOPING OUR AUDIENCE A CORE AND URGENT PART OF OUR MISSION should be everyone’s job. We explore several ar- eas that we believe can position us for continued growth: discovery (how we package and distribute our journalism), promotion (how we call attention to our journalism) and connection (how we create a two-way relationship with readers that deepens their loyalty). At both digital and traditional com- petitors, these functions are now considered part of the newsroom’s responsibilities. This shift would provide the newsroom, virtually overnight, with many of the necessary skills and insights to take our digital report to the next level. There are a number of departments and units, most of which are considered part of the business side, that are explicitly focused on the reader experience, including Design, Technology, Consumer Insight Group, R&D and Product. These functions represent a clear opportunity COLLABORATE WITH BUSINESS-SIDE UNITS FOCUSED ON READER EXPERIENCE for better integration. Recent initiatives, including NYT Now, have shown the benefits of collaboration across these departments. We are not proposing a wholesale reorganization. But we do believe simply issuing a new policy ­— collaborating with our col- leagues focused on reader experience is encouraged and expected ­— would send a powerful signal and unlock a huge store of creative energy and insights. Many newsroom leaders are so consumed with the demands of the daily report that they have little time to step back and think about long-term questions. When we were simply a newspaper, this singular fo- cus made sense. But we must now juggle print, the web, apps, newsletters, news alerts, social media, video, an international edition and a range of stand- alone products. Our suggestion is to create a small strategy team with the central role of advising the masthead. The CREATE A NEWSROOM STRATEGY TEAM team would keep newsroom leaders apprised of competitors’ strategies, changing technology and shifting reader behavior. It would help track proj- ects around the company that affect our digital re- port, help the masthead set and evaluate priorities and conduct occasional deep dives to answer spe- cific questions. And it would facilitate desk-level ex- periments and communicate the results back to the newsroom to ensure we’re exploring new areas and learning from our efforts. CHAPTER 1: GROWING OUR AUDIENCE CHAPTER 2: STRENGTHENING OUR NEWSROOM
  • 8. 7 Stories are typically filed late in the day. Our mobile apps are organized by print sections. Desks metic- ulously lay out their sections but spend little time thinking about social strategies. Traditional report- ing skills are the top priority in hiring and promo- tion. The habits and traditions built over a century and a half of putting out the paper are a powerful, conservative force as we transition to digital ­­­— none more so than the gravitational pull of Page One. Some of our traditional competitors have aggres- MAP A STRATEGY TO MAKE THE NEWSROOM A TRULY DIGITAL-FIRST ORGANIZATION sively reorganized around a digital-first rather than a print-first schedule. The health and profitability of our print paper means we don’t yet need to fol- low them down this path. But it is essential to begin the work of questioning our print-centric traditions, conducting a comprehensive assessment of our digi- tal needs, and imagining the newsroom of the future. This means reassessing everything from our roster of talent to our organizational structure to what we do and how we do it.
  • 9. Executive Summary8 Six months ago, you asked A.G. Sulzberger to pull together some of the most forward-thinking minds from around the newsroom to develop smart, sound ways to lift our fortunes through our journalism. The eight-person team – with the help of two col- leagues from the strategy group – included digital, design and business skills anchored to a rock-solid journalistic foundation. We spent the first few months reporting. We went on a listening tour of the business side, we met with hundreds of employees from around the newsroom, we interviewed leaders at dozens of other news or- ganizations and spent time with readers. We pored over internal analytics, studied competing web sites, and read more reports, presentations and articles about changes in digital media than we can count. In effect, we did a deep-dive reporting project on our own paper and industry. By the end, we had a strong sense of both the opportunities and internal roadblocks that need to be addressed to thrive in a rapidly changing digital media landscape. This report reflects a critical shift from the origi- nal mission. Though the initial assumption was that we would emerge with ideas for a stand-alone prod- uct — such as NYT Now — our reporting showed us that the more urgent need was to focus on the core of The New York Times. Helping The Times adjust to this moment of promise and peril, we concluded, would have great- er journalistic and financial impact than virtually any product idea we might have suggested. That insight was supported almost unanimously by the digital newsroom, our leadership and our business colleagues. Focusing on the core is harder than starting some- thing new because every proposal threatens tradi- tion and turf. But the need is more urgent because of the accelerating pace of change and the over- stretched newsroom resources. Since that pivot from the original mission, we have focused our work around new challenges: Let’s find ways to leverage The Times’ journalism and tal- ents in even smarter and more effective ways. Let’s think through the most persistent and difficult ques- tions that have nagged at The Times. Let’s identify and share emerging opportunities and best practic- es. Let’s identify the roadblocks and suggest ways to remove them. This report represents our best attempt to pro- vide answers. Our hope is that helping the masthead identify some of the most pressing problems and most promising opportunities will smooth the way for innovators inside the building. Finally, we are well aware that this newsroom has invested a lot of talent and time in this group. The report is just one return on that investment. Another is that you have produced eight committed evange- lists to help push the newsroom to embrace its digi- tal future. We will do our part to spread the lessons and insights captured here across the organization. Our Mission (And How It Evolved)
  • 10. 9 The Team Adam B. Ellick Senior Video Journalist Studied Disruptive Innovation, Design Thinking, and Social Television at the Harvard Business School/MIT Media Lab. Bahrain and Pakistan coverage won consecutive Overseas Press Club awards. Adam Bryant Business Columnist Interviewed more than 300 C.E.O.s for Corner Office, and wrote two books on leadership, management and culture. Edited Pulitzer-winning series on the dangers of distracted driving. A.G. Sulzberger Metro Assistant Editor Worked on Continuous News, Times Topics, and Video before joining the City Room blog. Opened the Kansas City bureau to expand coverage of the Midwest. Amy O’Leary Technology Reporter Worked as an editor, producer, reporter and manager in her seven years at The Times. Her work has been nominated for three Emmy awards, and won both a Loeb and Knight-Batten award. Jon Galinsky Strategy Manager Managing Editor of Williams College newspaper. Interned at a newspaper in Ethiopia. Led the strategy team’s planning for selling our digital subscriptions in 2014. Ben Peskoe Strategy Manager Wrote presentation to NYT Board of Directors that recommended building NYT Now, Opinion and Cooking products. Elena Gianni User Experience Designer Design innovation consultant with a background in engineering and media studies. Worked on the NYT5 redesign, conducting research and prototyping interactions. Andrew Phelps Mobile Assistant Editor Worked in radio, television and print, and covered media for a digital startup. Spearheaded the launch of Today’s Paper, and led a project to enhance the breaking news experience on mobile devices. Louise Story Investigations Reporter Yale M.B.A. Former media reporter. Covered Wall Street during the financial crisis, anchored Times video show, and business correspondent on “The Takeaway” Charles Duhigg Business Reporter Harvard M.B.A., former founder and C.E.O. of SWPA Education Management. Part of the team that wrote the Pulitzer-winning “The iEconomy” series. Advisers Larry Ingrassia Deputy Managing Editor Ian Fisher Assistant Managing Editor
  • 11. Executive Summary10 The New York Times: AJ Chavar, Al Ming, Alex Hardiman, Alex MacCallum, Alex Minkow, Alexis Lloyd, Allen Tan, Amanda Cox, Amy Harmon, Andrew Keh, Andrew Kueneman, Andrew Rosenthal, Andrew Ross Sorkin, Andy Wright, Anh Dang, Ann Derry, Annie Lowrey, Ariane Bernard, Aron Pilhofer, Arthur Sulzberger, Ashley Southall, Ashwin Seshagiri, Barbara De Wilde, Ben French, Ben Koski, Ben Monnie, Bill Brink, Bill Carter, Bill Schmidt, Blake Wilson, Boris Chen, Brad Kagawa, Brian Ham- man, Brian Murphy, Bruce Headlam, C.J. Chivers, Carl Hulse, Carolyn Ryan, Catrin Einhorn, Chad Ghastin, Cheryl Yau, Chris Wiggins, Christine Haughney, Christine Hung, Christine Kay, Chrys Wu, Cliff Levy, Coral Davenport, Craig Hunter, Cynthia Collins, Damien Cave, Damon Darlin, Dan Watkin, Dana Canedy, Danielle Mattoon, Danielle Rhodes Ha, David Carr, David Gelles, David Leonhardt, David Perpich, David Scull, Dean Baquet, Dean Chang, Dean Murphy, Deborah Acosta, Deborah Needleman, Deborah Sontag, Denise Warren, Desiree Shoe, Eileen Murphy, Elizabeth Rosenthal, Elliot Malkin, Emily Rueb, Eric Lipton, Erik Hinton, Erik Piepenburg, Ethan Bronner, Evan Sandhaus, Gabe Johnson, Geoff Isenman, Gerry Marzorati, Gina Kolata, Ginger Thompson, Glenn Kramon, Hamilton Boardman, Hannah Farfield, Heather Murphy, Hugh Mandeville, Hugo Lindgren, Ian Adelman, Ian Fisher, Jacky Myint, James Estrin, James Robinson, Jamie Abir, Jan Hoffman, Janet Elder, Jason Spingarn-Koff, Jason Stallman, Jeff Marcus, Jenna Wortham, Jennifer Parrucci, Jennifer Steinhauer, Jeremy Peters, Jill Abramson, Jim Boehmer, Jim Dao, Jim Dryfoos, Jim Glanz, Jim Rutenberg, Joan Huang, Jodi Kantor, Joe Kahn, John Geddes, John Geraci, John Niedermeyer, John Schwartz, Jon Huang, Jon Kelly, Jonathan Ellis, Jonathan Martin, Jonathan Weisman, Joseph Burgess, Josh Haner, Josh Williams, Julie Bloom, Julie Bosman, Justin Stile, Kim Severson, KJ Dell’Antonia, Kristi Reilly, Laura Chang, Laura Holson, Lauren Kern, Lawrence Ingrassia, Leslie Kaufman, Lexi Mainland, Libby Gery, Libby Rosenthal, Marc Frons, Marc Lavalle, Margaret Sullivan, Mark Bittman, Mark Mazetti, Mark Silver, Mark Thompson, Martin Nisenholtz, Mary Suh, Matt Apuzzo, Matt Boggie, Matt Erikson, Matt Purdy, Matthew Boggie, Meaghan Looram, Meghan Louttit, Meredith Levien, Michael Corkery, Michael Dewar, Michael Golden, Michael Greenspon, Michael Luo, Michael Schmidt, Michael Shear, Michael Slackman, Michele McNally, Mike McIntire, Mike Zimablist, Monica Davey, Monica Drake, Nancy Donaldson, Nathan Ashby-Kuhlman, Nick Bilton, Nick Kristof, Nicole Breskin, Noam Cohen, Pamela Paul, Patrick La- Forge, Paul Smurl, Paul Werdel, Paul Yorke, Peter Baker, Peter Lattman, Peter Renz, Rachel Golden, Rajiv Pant, Rajiv Pant, Rebecca Corbett, Rebecca Howard, Rebecca Ruiz, Renda Morton, Rich Meislin, Rob Mackey, Roland Caputo, Sam Dolnick, Sam Manchester, Sam Sifton, Samantha Henig, Santiago Alfonso-Lord, Sarah Cohen, Sewell Chan, Shane Murray, Shayla Harris, Sheryle Stolberg, Shreeya Sinha, Stephanie Saul, Steve Duenes, Steven Rocker, Susan Chira, Susan Edgerly, Susan Wessling, Tahir Khan, Tara Parker Pope, Tom Bodkin, Tom Carley, Tom Jolly, Tony Brancato, Tony Scott, Torben Brooks, Tyson Evans, Victoria Shannon, Walt Bogdanich, Wendell Jamieson, Will Bardeen, William Goss, Willie Rashbaum, Yasmin Namini, Zander Baron, Zena Bakarat. External: Brian Mcandrews, Adam Davidson, Adam Moss, Adam Orme, Al Anstey, Alex How- ard, Alexis Madrigal, Ali Gharib, Ali Velshi, Amanda Michel, Amanda Zamora, Anders Fink, Andrea Shiah, Andrew Fitzgerald, Andrew Ginsburg, Andrew Jaspan, Ann Mack, Anna Bryant, Annie Wamke, Anthea Watson-Strong, Ben Leher, Bob Pittman, Braxton Mckee, Brianna Cotter, Chris Anderson, Chris Cunningham, Chris Mckee , Christina Cacioppo, Dan Collarusso, Dani- elle Gould, Dave Kliman, Dave Morgan, David Callaway, David Gehring, David Kenny, Dayna Grayson, Don Graham, Doreen Lorenzo, Eddie Kim, Eilidh Dickson, Elisabeth Job, Ellen Rubeefalls, Ellena Lee, Emily Brill, Enrique Acevdeo, Esther Dyson, Ethan Zuckerman, Fabio, Farhan Zafar, Gabe Dance, Gary Portuesi, Gideon Lichfield, Henry Abbott, Henry Blodget, Herb Kim, Jacek Barcikowski, Jacob Weisberg, Jake Levine, James Bennett, Jane Fritsch, Janet Camp, Jed Alpert, Jeremy Tarling, Jesse Shapsins, Jigar Mehta, John Lee, Josh Cohen, Josh Miller, Josh Quittner, Joshua Noble, Judy Winitzer, Julia Thompkins, Justin Smith, Kate Lee, Ken Lerer, Ken Loveless, Kevin Delaney, Laura Evans, Libby Brittain, Lina Srivastava, Ludwig Siegele, Magid Abraham, Mahira Chishty, Marcus Mckee, Mark Allen, Matt Mullin, Matt Singer, Mayo Nissen, Megan White, Meghan Peters, Michael Lebowitz, Michael Wertheim, Miriam Elder, Nick Beim, Norman Pollack, Paul Berry, Peter Goodman, Philippe Browning, Prascilla, Randi Zuckerberg, Ray Day, Richard Ii Hornos, Richard Luettgen, Rick Berke, Rishad Tobaccowala, Rob Grimshaw, Robert Krulwich, Robin Pembrooke, Robin Sloan, Ryan Jacoby, Siena Giraldi, Soraya Dorabi, Sravanthi Agrawal, Steve Brill, Stine Hoeck Forsberg, Susan Taing, Tim Carmody, Tom Conrad, Tony Haile, Vadim Lauruskik, Valerie Streit, Van- essa Arantes Nuzzo, Vivian Schiller, Wesley Morris, Zach Seward, Zach Wise. We Interviewed:
  • 12. 11
  • 13. Executive Summary12 In the pages that follow, you will find a brief discus- sion of our competitors and the disruptive forces that have taken hold of our industry. The rest of the report is in two chapters — Growing Our Audience and Strengthening Our Newsrroom — that flesh out the themes in this executive summary, with more detail, context and specific recommen- dations, based on our reporting inside and outside the building. We offer long-term goals and some possible short-term steps to get there. In nearly every case, the questions we explore are more important than the solutions we offer. And there can be legitimate debate around the best solu- tions to many of them. We have done our best not to overwhelm read- ers with our reporting. We’ve attached appendices that list all the people we’ve interviewed. The quotes we’ve used are each representative of a dozen or more conversations; they’re not outliers. Many are anonymous — not ideal, but essential to encourag- ing frank conversation. As much as possible we’ve distilled information into charts and graphs. We have also included side- bars to explore topics and share key insights from our reporting. A User’s Guide to This Report
  • 14. 13 Disruption: A Quick Overview Of The Competitive Landscape Vox Media’s Chicago office. Vox surpassed The Wall Street Journal in total digital readership in 2013.
  • 15. Executive Summary14 As a reminder of just how rapidly new players are disrupting our business, consider what has hap- pened in the six months since our group’s work be- gan. Not long ago, it would have been hard to imag- ine The Washington Post controlled by anyone but the Graham family. Now we are waiting to see what Jeff Bezos does to remake this storied institution. “Even if the Post lost $100 million a year,” wrote Farhad Manjoo, “Bezos’ personal fortune could fund it for 252 years.” Soon after Bezos bought the Post for $250 million, Pierre Omidyar, the eBay co-founder, pledged $250 million to create First Look Media, a hybrid operation with a nonprofit newsroom and for-profit technol- ogy company. It hired well-known journalists like Glenn Greenwald and Laura Poitras to launch several digital magazines with top-notch data analysts, visual designers and technologists. “Our goal is to experiment, innovate and overcome existing obstacles — to make it easier for journalists to deliver the transformative stories we all need,” Omidyar said in his announcement. Other digital media companies poured more money into the news business, luring talent from established players. Vox Media — which raised an- other $40 million in October — wooed Ezra Klein from The Post. Yahoo hired David Pogue to create a consumer tech vertical and signed up Katie Couric to become a “global anchor.” Kara Swisher and Walt Mossberg left the Journal to launch Re/code. BuzzFeed and Upworthy continued their relent- less growth while making new investments in qual- ity journalism. And Facebook, Twitter and LinkedIn waded deeper into the journalism business by hiring editors and announcing new products, like Face- book’s Paper, aimed at news consumers. Traditional media outlets were just as active. The Washington Post started the Upworthy-inspired Know More, which took just three weeks to become the company’s biggest blog. In March, the company opened an outpost in Manhattan, called WPNYC, to attract top digital talent. “The thing about the site is that it’s a very classic legacy media site — a repre- sentation of the print medium in digital,” said The Post’s Greg Franczyk. “We’re shifting the paradigm to designing a website that works for our users and building the technology that meets the need.” Digital-first is the new mantra from the old guard. The Financial Times and USA Today have made the switch, and The Journal has pledged to join those ranks, staffing a new “real-time news desk” with 60 people and an “audience-engagement desk” with social-media editors and analytics specialists. One of the largest chains of local newspapers in the United States, which tellingly renamed itself Digital First Media, announced Project Unbolt, explain- ing that its goal is “to take a massive wrench to the culture and work- flow of our newsrooms and unbolt them,” since “newsrooms are still largely print newsrooms with digi- tal operations ‘bolted on.’” And The San Francisco Chronicle launched “an off-site startup-style incubator.” As Audrey Cooper, the managing editor, explained, “We hope to even- tually get to the point where instead of being a news- paper company that produces websites, we think of ourselves as a digital company that also produces a newspaper. Unless you flip that switch, I don’t think any newspaper will be truly successful at negotiating the digital switchover.” The Times has hardly been idle, of course. Over the last six months, the company unveiled a major redesign of NYTimes.com, the first in seven years. We launched The International New York Times. We pushed into the new world of native advertising (as did Hearst, The Post, BBC, The Guardian and The Wall Street Journal). And we completed the sale of The Boston Globe to John Henry, ushering in an era in which The New York Times is the Times Com- pany’s only business. News in the News: A Busy Six Months A relentless run of headlines from new and old media companies. | Competitive Landscape
  • 16. 15 NOVEMBER Yahoo hires a series of high-profile journalists, including David Pogue and Katie Couric. Digital First Media rolls out metered paywalls for all 75 of its Media News and Journal Register sites. DECEMBER The Journal launches an “audience engagement team,” combining social-media and analytics experts. An interactive news app — not an article — becomes The Times’s most popular story of all time. BuzzFeed expands its foreign and investigative reporting staff. FEBRUARY Upworthy announces “attention minutes” as its new algorithm for measuring reader engagement. ProPublica begins selling data gathered from its reporting projects in the ProPublica Data Store. JANUARY Kara Swisher and Walt Mossberg leave the Journal to launch Re/code. Ezra Klein leaves The Post to join Vox Media. Marty Baron announces major new digital initiatives at The Post, including a breaking- news desk. The Wall Street Journal creates a digital-first “real-time news desk.” Digital First Media announces Project Unbolt. Facebook introduces Paper, a Flipboard-like mobile news-reading app. San Francisco Chronicle launches “an off-site startup-style incubator.” Business Insider surpasses The Journal in combined digital audience. The Huffington Post announced a global partnership with a think tank at Davos. OCTOBER Washington Post closes sale to Jeff Bezos for $250 million. Pierre Omidyar pledges $250 million to a new digital-first venture, First Look Media. Times Co. closes sale of The Boston Globe to John Henry for $70 million. Vox Media raises $40 million in venture capital. The Post launches Upworthy-inspired Know More, which takes only three weeks to become the company’s biggest blog. MARCH The Post launches WPNYC, a Manhattan outpost for design and development. Vice News launched with a staff of roughly 100 journalists. The new FiveThirtyEight is unveiled. NYT Now, Cooking and The Upshot are prepared for launch.
  • 17. Executive Summary16 What Is Disruption? Disruption is a predictable pattern across many in- dustries in which fledgling companies use new tech- nology to offer cheaper and inferior alternatives to products sold by established players (think Toyota taking on Detroit decades ago). Today, a pack of news startups are hoping to “disrupt” our industry by attacking the strongest incumbent — The New York Times. How does disruption work? Should we be defending our position, or disrupting ourselves? And can’t we just dismiss the BuzzFeeds of the world, with their listicles and cat videos? Here’s a quick primer on the disruption cycle: 1.Incumbents treat innovation as a series of incre- mental improvements. They focus on improving the quality of their premium products to sustain their current business model. For The Times, a sustaining innovation might be “Snowfall.” 2.Disruptors introduce new products that, at first, do not seem like a threat. Their products are cheap- er, with poor quality — to begin with. For BuzzFeed, a disruptive innovation might be social media distribution. 3. Over time, disruptors improve their product, usually by adapting a new technology. The flash- point comes when their products become “good enough” for most customers. They are now poised to grow by taking market share from incumbents. sustaining innovations disruptive innovations minimum customer need TIME TIME TIME QUALITYQUALITYQUALITY minimum customer need minimum customer need HALLMARKS OF DISRUPTIVE INNOVATORS Introduced by an “outsider” Less expensive than existing products Targeting underserved or new markets Initially inferior to existing products Advanced by an enabling technology | Competitive Landscape
  • 18. 17 Kodak and its film-based cameras were the classic incumbents: a traditional, respected company offer- ing a high-quality product to a mass market. Then came digital cameras. Film companies laughed at the poor shutter speed and fuzzy images of early digital cameras. The photos weren’t great, but digital cameras bet- ter addressed the user’s primary need: to capture and share moments. It was easier and cheaper to take a digital picture, download it onto your com- puter and email it to many people than it was to buy film, print dozens of high quality photos at a shop and mail copies to friends. When the inferior and cheaper digital product became “good enough” for customers, it disrupted the incumbent. Digital cameras seemed poised to own the mar- ket. Then came flip-phone cameras. They offered even lower quality photos. And digital camera com- panies mocked their grainy images. But again, us- ers opted for a lesser product that was more conve- nient. They’d rather have a “good enough” camera in their phone then lug a better but bulky digital camera. When the flip-phone camera became “good enough,” it disrupted the incumbent. A CASE STUDY IN DISRUPTION: KODAK The first digital cameras were mocked for poor shutter speed and fuzzy images. Now, “Kodak memories” are a distant memory. What did you take your last picture with? “Culturally, I think we have operated as if we had the formula figured out, and it was all about optimizing, in its various constituent parts, the formula. Now it is about discovering the new formula.” — Satya Nadella, Microsoft’s new CEO “The world of business really separates into two groups. Entrepreneurs who are disrupting the status quo are attackers. Large organizations are defenders.” —Steve Case, CEO of Revolution, and a founder of AOL
  • 19. Executive Summary18 A Competitor Cheat Sheet Founded by Jonah Peretti in 2006, BuzzFeed built a huge audience by using data to help stories go viral. The company is known for rapidly experimenting with story formats and is now hiring journalists to move into traditional news coverage. BUZZFEED KNOWN FOR Aggressive social distribution Highly shareable content Experimental story forms KEY STATS 130M unique visitors $40M in 2013 revenue ESPN ESPN is expanding its digital offerings, with vid- eo and audio (live and on-demand), sports-relat- ed tools (fantasy football, score alerts) and sub- brands based on star journalists (Grantland with Bill Simmons, FiveThirtyEight with Nate Silver). KNOWN FOR Mobile push alerts User tools/service journalism “Pulling back the curtain” on big stories KEY STATS 56M unique visitors CIRCA Circa is a mobile news app that aggregates report- ing from a variety of sources and repackages each story into running story threads for smartphones. The app allows users to follow ongoing stories and subscribe to alerts for updates. KNOWN FOR Bullet-point summaries Mobile push alerts Allowing users to follow stories KEY STATS $3.4M in funding FIRST LOOK MEDIA First Look Media is a new digital journalism venture backed with $250 million from eBay co-founder Pierre Omidyar. It has recruited brand-name jour- nalists like Glenn Greenwald, Laura Poitras and Matt Taibbi to aggressively cover hard news. KNOWN FOR Brand-name journalists Developers on every desk Single-topic digital magazines KEY STATS $250M in funding guarantees; $50M already invested About 20 veteran journalists | Competitive Landscape KNOWN FOR Beautiful user interface Built on users’ social networks KEY STATS 90M users Raised $50M round; valued at $800M Third-largest driver of mobile traffic to NYT Flipboard is a highly visual news aggregator designed for phones and tablets. Content is aggregated from a variety of publishers and grouped into themed collections. Readers can follow collections, topics or publications. FLIPBOARD
  • 20. 19 KNoWN FOR Promotion and outreach “Comment Is Free” platform Data visualizations KEY STATS Avg. 2013 non-U.S. audience: 27M (vs.17M for NYT) Avg. 2013 U.S. audience: 12M (vs. 33M for NYT) The Guardian is expanding its digital-only U.S. newsroom, which now has approximately 60 journalists. It led early coverage of the Snowden leaks, largely through the work of columnist Glenn Greenwald. THE GUARDIAN KNOWN FOR Open commenting platform Aggressive use of SEO and social media KEY STATS Avg. 2013 U.S. audience: 32M, reaching high of 40M in November (vs. 33M for NYT) The Huffington Post, sold to AOL in 2011 for $315 mil- lion, surged in popularity during the 2008 presidential campaign. In addition to original reporting, the site pub- lishes the work of outside contributors and aggregates content from The Times and other sources. THE HUFFINGTON POST KNOWN FOR “Influencer” publishing platform Allowing users to follow topics KEY STATS 65M unique U.S. visitors, 180M globally $1.5B in total revenue, $360M in advertising LinkedIn is a social network for professionals. It entered publishing in earnest through its acquisition of Pulse in 2013 and is building out its “Influencer” network of contributors who post original content. LINKEDIN KNOWN FOR Simple publishing platform Smart writers and editors Rich visual design KEY STATS Average 250K monthly users Founded by former Twitter CEO Evan Williams, Medium is an open publishing platform that allows anyone to write and distribute content. Medium’s editorial team curates the best content into “col- lections.” Readers can follow collections and indi- vidual writers. MEDIUM KNOWN FOR Chartbuilder tool for journalists Responsive design “Obsessions” in lieu of traditional beats or sections KEY STATS 5M unique visitors 50K daily email subscribers Quartz is a business-news site owned by Atlantic Media and edited by Kevin Delaney, a former managing editor at The Wall Street Journal. It operates a mobile-opti- mized website, rather than native apps, and drives audi- ence growth through daily email newsletters. QUARTZ KNoWN FOR Promotion and outreach “Comment Is Free” platform Data visualizations KEY STATS Avg. 2013 non-U.S. audience: 27M (vs.17M for NYT) Avg. 2013 U.S. audience: 12M (vs. 33M for NYT) The Guardian is expanding its digital-only U.S. newsroom, which now has approximately 60 journalists. It led early coverage of the Snowden leaks, largely through the work of columnist Glenn Greenwald. THE GUARDIAN KNOWN FOR Open commenting platform Aggressive use of SEO and social media KEY STATS Avg. 2013 U.S. audience: 32M, reaching high of 40M in November (vs. 33M for NYT) The Huffington Post, sold to AOL in 2011 for $315 mil- lion, surged in popularity during the 2008 presidential campaign. In addition to original reporting, the site pub- lishes the work of outside contributors and aggregates content from The Times and other sources. THE HUFFINGTON POST
  • 21. Executive Summary20 KNOWN FOR Live blogging Visual story treatments Highly engaged community KEY STATS Raised $40M round in 2013 $200M valuation SB Nation has 40M unique visitors Vox Media operates a collection of vertical publi- cations, including SB Nation (sports), The Verge (tech), Curbed (real estate), Polygon (gaming), Racked (fashion) and Eater (food). The company recently hired Ezra Klein to create Vox, a general- interest news site. VOX KNOWN FOR High-profile journalism hires Huge traffic to news content Newly released Digest app KEY STATS 65M unique U.S. visitors, 180M globally $1.5B in total revenue, $360M in advertising Yahoo is expanding its journalistic capacity by making big hires. It released a smartphone app called Yahoo News Digest that updates twice daily with the top eight news stories from around the web. YAHOO NEWS | Competitive Landscape
  • 23. 22 Growing Our Audience |
  • 24. 23 Long ago, we decided to go to extraordinary lengths to get our journalism into the hands of as many readers as possible. Each night, we printed our best work. Then we loaded it onto trucks to drive it to cities and towns. Then we enlisted kids to bike from house to house to deliver our papers to readers’ doorsteps. For non- subscribers, we dropped off bundles of papers at corner stores and newspaper racks, and painstak- ingly tracked sales to see where more copies were needed. We take this work for granted now, but our home delivery and single-sales efforts represented one of the most sophisticated consumer-outreach opera- tions in history. But when the time came to put our journalism on the web, we adopted a much more passive approach. We published stories on our home page and assumed that most people would come to us. The realities of a cluttered Internet and distracted mobile world now require us to make even more of an effort to get our journalism to readers. Perhaps because the path forward is not clear and requires very different skills, we are putting less effort into reaching readers’ digital doorsteps than we ever did in reaching their physical doorsteps. This effort to reach more readers — known as Au- dience Development — is where our competitors are pushing ahead of us. Audience Development is the work of expanding our loyal and engaged audience. It is about getting more people to read more of our journalism. The work can be broken down into steps like discovery (how we package and distribute our journalism), promotion (how we call attention to our journalism) and connection (how we create a two-way relation- ship with readers that deepens their loyalty). Audience Development needs to be a goal for the whole company. But the newsroom, in particular, must seize a leadership position. At our new and traditional competitors, Audience Development is seen not just as the responsibility Introduction of the newsroom but as the responsibility of every editor and reporter. They adopt this approach be- cause the work happens story by story and platform by platform, requiring creativity and editorial judg- ment. These efforts can be compared to using an en- gaging lede, compelling headline, or gripping photo TOUGH TRENDS Some key measures of traffic and engagement point to an inescapable truth: The Times needs to work harder to reach and hold onto readers. MAY 2012 JAN 2013 MAY 2013 35 30 25 20 15 40 MinutesTime Spent: JAN 2014JAN 2013 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 0.4 1 MillionsiPhone App Active Users: MAY 2012 JAN 2013 MAY 2013 10 5 0 15 MillionsPage Views: 2011 2012 2013 80 80 100 120 140 160 MillionsHome Page Visitors:
  • 25. 24 Growing Our Audience | REACHING READERS The Times has worked hard since its earliest days to turn occasional readers into loyal subscribers. to draw readers into a story. “The hardest part for me has been the realization that you don’t automatically get an audience,” said Janine Gibson, editor-in-chief of The Guardian’s website. “For someone with a print background, you’re accustomed to the fact that if it makes the edi- tor’s cut ­— gets into the paper — you’re going to find an audience. It’s entirely the other way around as a digital journalist. The realization that you have to go find your audience ­— they’re not going to just come and read it — has been transformative.” The need is urgent. Our home page has been our main tool for getting our journalism to readers, but its impact is waning. Only a third of our read- ers ever visit it. And those who do visit are spending less time: page views and minutes spent per reader dropped by double-digit percentages last year. Readers are finding and engaging with our jour- nalism in vastly different ways. More readers ex- pect us to find them on Twitter and Facebook, and through email and phone alerts. But the newsroom pays less attention to these platforms, even though they offer our main, and sometimes only, channels to tens of millions of readers. Here, too, we are lag- ging our competitors. Because we are journalists, we tend to look at our competitors through the lens of content rather than strategy. But BuzzFeed, Huffington Post and USA Today are not succeeding simply because of lists, quizzes, celebrity photos and sports coverage. They are succeeding because of their sophisticated social, search and community-building tools and strate- gies, and often in spite of their content. “At The New York Times, far too often for writers and editors the story is done when you hit publish,” said Paul Berry, who helped found The Huffington Post. “At Huffington Post, the article begins its life when you hit publish.” The Guardian is just one example of a traditional competitor that has adopted digital best practices in Audience Development to drive rapid growth, allow- ing it to close in on our position as the world’s best- read quality newspaper. USA Today has put such practices at the heart of its reorganization. And The Wall Street Journal recently created a new “audi- ence-engagement team,” bringing social editors and
  • 26. 25 data scientists together in the newsroom. “I tell most reporters, ‘Three percent of the people who want to see your work are seeing it,’” said a top editor at The Washington Post. “So if we can get that to even 4.5 percent, it’s worth the effort, it’s worth the struggle.” But at The Times, discovery, promotion and en- gagement have been pushed to the margins, typical- ly left to our business-side colleagues or handed to small teams in the newsroom. The business side still has a major role to play, but the newsroom needs to claim its seat at the table because packaging, pro- moting and sharing our journalism requires edito- rial oversight. This effort needs to be unified under a single lead- er. We recommend hiring a head of Audience De- velopment who works in the newsroom and collabo- rates with a counterpart on the business side. Indeed, in recent months, the most qualified can- didate for such a position on the business side, Mi- chael Wertheim, the former head of promotion for Upworthy, turned down the job. He explained that for anyone in that role to succeed, the newsroom PROMOTION, DISTRIBUTION TAGGING, SEARCH ENGINE OPTIMIZATION BREAKING NEWS, VIRAL HITS, PACKAGES DISCOVERY, PERSONALIZATION, EMAIL CONNECTION, EVENTS READER CONTRIBUTIONS NON- READER REPEAT READER DRIVE BY REGISTERED READER SUBSCRIBER LOYALIST OUR GOAL There are many good ideas for innovation in the newsroom, but we focused on those that will help us find more readers for more of our journalism. QUALITY JOURNALISM THE CURRENT NEWSROOM APPROACH The main newsroom strategy for attracting more readers is to produce excellent journalism. OUR FOCUS In this report, we explored additional ideas to attract new readers and deepen our connection with loyal subscribers. What Are We Trying to Do? needed to be fully committed to working with the business side to grow our audience. Audience Development is not a task we should view as a chore – the opportunities are truly excit- ing. Imagine coming back from an unplugged vaca- tion and having the best pieces you missed waiting for you. Or strolling through Rome and having an article on the best museums pop up on your phone. Or watching a year-old story go viral on social. Or having Science Times become a lively platform for expert debate. There is no single solution like home delivery that will solve the challenges of digital distribution. But our competitors have been experimenting aggres- sively, and some best practices have emerged that we will share in the following pages. We should track them closely, and adopt those that meet our standards. And we should unleash the creativity of our staff by experimenting quickly and constantly to discover next-generation solutions. “If The New York Times could get this right — could reach the right audiences for all its content — it would change the world,” said Wertheim.
  • 27. 26 Growing Our Audience | We recognize that “audience development” can eas- ily be dismissed as one of those “sounds-good-in- theory” notions. So we’ve packed a lot into the fol- lowing pages to show how it works in practice. We’ll provide the context for why these strategies deserve our attention, explain our current approach, assess the competitive landscape and address concerns. We’ll also offer a few key recommendations and a proposed experiment for each area. However, the details of any specific suggestion matter less than the underlying questions. Our goal is to start a dis- cussion. Improving technology provides us with more and better tools to ensure that we get our work in front of the right readers at the right place and at the right time. But we still ask too much of readers — they must navigate a website and apps that are modeled on our print structure. We need to think more about resurfacing evergreen content, organizing and pack- aging our work in more useful ways and pushing rel- evant content to readers. And to power these efforts, we should invest more in the unglamorous but es- sential work of tagging and structuring data. Our Proposals, In Brief 1. DISCOVERY We need to be better advocates of our own work. This means creating newsroom structures to make sure our most important work has maximum readership and impact. And it means identifying and sharing best practices at the ground level, and encouraging reporters and editors to promote their stories. In addition, we must take the process of optimization, for search and social, more seriously and ensure we are updating our tools and workflow along with our changing needs. 2. PROMOTION Our readers are perhaps our greatest untapped re- source. Deepening our connection with them both online and offline is critical in a world where content so often reaches its broadest audience on the backs of other readers. And many readers have come to expect a two-way relationship with us, so they can engage with our journalism and our journalists. This means the newsroom as a whole must take the reins in pursuing user-generated content, events and other forms of engagement in a way that reflects our standards and values. 3.CONNECTION Our readers’ habits are changing faster than ever. How can we make sure our news is reaching them in the digital age?
  • 28. 27 The Times produces more than 300 URLs every day. Because of this bounty, readers easily miss stories and features. This has long been true for readers who come to our home page, because of limited real estate and constantly shifting presentation. This is also true on our mobile apps, where a tiny screen makes it even harder to sift through our offerings. The readers who don’t come to us at all — and in- stead expect us to reach them through social media and our alerts — have even less of an appreciation of the richness of our work. A more reader-centric approach to packaging and surfacing our journalism offers us a huge opportu- nity to extend our reach. Exploiting better web and mobile tools will also help us get each story to every reader who might want to see it. We need to make better use of these tools and tactics because the current structures for organiz- ing our digital journalism, many of which are based on the traditions and limitations of print, are losing potency. Traffic to the home page has been declin- ing, month after month, for years. Traffic to sec- tion fronts is negligible. Traffic on our mobile apps, which are mostly downstream replicas of our home page and section fronts, has declined as well. One great example of the power of a new tool for connecting with readers is our news alert system, which now reaches as many as 13.5 million people, about a dozen times our print subscriber base. Here are four opportunities for getting more read- ers for the work we’re already producing, with a proposed experiment for each idea to make it more concrete. SOCIAL POWER It’s not just The Times. The entire digital media industry is seeing a big shift in behavior. Reader visits to home pages are declining while traffic from social media is rising. (­Source: BuzzFeed) Social ReferralsHome Page JAN 2013 20 0 40 60 80 100 % of Visitors DEC 2013 Social Facebook Other Portals Search News Sites (1.5%) Total Internet traffic by type of site. 1 Discovery
  • 29. 28 Growing Our Audience | Discovery On Oscar night, The Times tweeted a 161-year-old story about Solomon Northup, whose memoir was the basis for “12 Years a Slave.” After it started going viral on social media, Gawker pounced, and quickly fashioned a story based on excerpts from our piece. It ended up being one of their best-read items of the year. But little of that traffic came to us. In a digital world, our rich archive offers one of our clearest advantages over new competitors. As of the printing of this report, we have 14,723,933 ar- ticles, dating back to 1851, that can be resurfaced in useful or timely ways. But we rarely think to mine our archive, largely because we are so focused on news and new features. “You have a huge advantage,” said Henry Blodget, the founder of Business Insider. “You have a tre- mendous amount of high-quality content that you have a perpetual license to.” The Cooking team is providing a fresh reminder of our treasure trove of evergreen content. For de- cades, we published and promoted a handful of new recipes each week. The new Cooking product better reflects the fact that recipes are timeless and best or- ganized in other ways: by meal, ingredients, season and our critics’ favorites. The opportunities are not limited to service jour- nalism. We can be both a daily newsletter and a li- brary — offering news every day, as well as providing context, relevance and timeless works of journalism. In breaking news and long-running stories, read- ers can struggle to quickly get up to speed or to un- derstand why something matters. Many of our com- petitors are tackling this challenge, just as we did with Times Topics. “Journalists are better than ever at telling people what’s happening, but not nearly good enough at giving them the crucial contextual information nec- essary to understand what’s happened,” said Ezra Klein, in announcing his new venture at Vox Media. “We treat the emphasis on the newness of informa- tion as an important virtue rather than a painful compromise.” Opportunity: Evergreen GAWKERED When this 161-year-old Times story started going viral on Oscar night, Gawker did what Gawker does —it repackaged our content and won huge traffic gains.
  • 30. 29 Our committee ran a study of article readership during the last six months of 2013. Arts and culture stories were among those that were consistently read long after their publication dates, even though they can be difficult to find once they are more than a few days old. A new approach would be to take cultural and life- style content — about books, museums, food, the- ater — and organize it more by relevance than by publication date. Erik Piepenburg, the web producer for theater, noted that visitors coming to us for the “Wicked” theater review can’t easily find it because we re- viewed it a long time ago. But that review is still rel- evant to the many readers who are considering buy- ing tickets this week. One possible solution, envisioned by Ben Koski and Erik Hinton of our Interactive News team, is to add landing pages for our cultural content that are more like guides. These pages would supplement, not replace, our existing arts pages. Optimized for search and social, these guides would serve the reader who wants to use us as a more timeless resource. The best opportunities are in areas where The Times has comprehensive coverage, where informa- tion doesn’t need to be updated regularly, and where competitors haven’t saturated the market. For now, museums, books and theater fit that description. Travel and music would present significantly more hurdles. “So far, there’s been much enthusiasm from the desks,” said Koski. “But getting these on the official agenda to be built and made real is an ongoing chal- lenge. It’s hard for ideas like these to compete with enterprise, major events and story work.” Experiment: Culture Guides DAYS 20 6040 80 100 120 140 160 180 DAYS1 10% 20% 30% 40% % OF TOTAL VIEWS PAGE VIEWS 2000 4000 6000 8000 20 6040 80 100 120 140 160 1801 Traffic on most of our stories falls dramatically after the first day they’re published. But enterprise and feature stories can have long lives. For example, Libby Rosenthal’s colonoscopy story from last year, below, attracted new readers months after it was published. GIFTS THAT KEEP ON GIVING
  • 31. 30 Growing Our Audience | Discovery THE ART OF CURATION The Times dominates coverage of books, museums and theater. And the evergreen nature of those subjects makes them a natural for being repackaged as culture guides. Here are two proposals from the Interactive News department.
  • 32. 31 If you were to ask most people in the newsroom about how The New York Times experiments, they might talk about a new story format like “Snowfall” or a recent crowdsourcing effort like “Paying Till It Hurts.” But “experimentation” is about much more than simply trying something new. Real experimentation is about adopting a rigor- ous, scientific method for proving new concepts and constantly tweaking them to be as successful as pos- sible. This is how every major digital innovator — in- cluding Google and Amazon — works today. Unlike a printed newspaper (which is polished to near-perfection and “launched” once a day), a digital experiment should be released quickly and refined through a cycle of continuous improvement ­— mea- suring performance, studying results, shuttering losers and building on winners. The Verge, for ex- ample, redesigned its home page 53 times in two years. We must push back against our perfectionist impulses. Though our journalism always needs to be polished, our other efforts can have some rough edges as we look for new ways to reach our readers. Best Practices In Experimenting KEY EXPERIMENTS IN PROGRESS: NYT Now: Our first experiment in packaging news specifically for a mobile audience. NY Today: An ongoing experiment to assess read- ers’ appetite for tip sheets. Cooking: An experiment to build a world-class service-journalism app, leveraging the archive. Watching: An experiment in curating a news feed on our homepage. NYT Now & Watching.
  • 33. 32 Growing Our Audience | Discovery Launch efforts quickly, then iterate. We often hold back stories for publication, as we should, because they’re “not quite there yet.” Outside our journalism, though, we can adopt the “minimal viable product” model, which calls for launching something in a more basic form so that we can start getting feedback from users and improve it over time. Set goals and track progress. Every new project should be launched with a specific goal and met- ric for success. In many cases, our main goal is high-quality journalism. But readership and en- gagement are usually important, too. All man- agers should be clear on what a new initiative is aiming to accomplish. Editors in charge of exper- iments should track their progress in real time. Reward experimentation. Currently, the risk of failing greatly outweighs the reward of succeed- ing at The Times. We must reward people who show initiative, even when their experiments fail. Share lessons from both successes and failures. We need to do a better job of communicating our digital goals, and sharing what we know about best practices to achieve them. No project should be declared a success, or shuttered, without a de- brief on what we’ve learned, so that we can apply those insights more broadly. A LIST OF BEST PRACTICES FOR EXPERIMENTATION: Kill off mediocre efforts. To free up resources for new initiatives, we need to be quicker and smart- er about pulling resources from efforts that aren’t working. And we must do it in a way that is trans- parent so that people understand the reasons be- hind the decision, so that they will be willing to experiment again. Plan for “version 2.0” and beyond. Often, the re- source plan for new projects stops at launch. As we learn from readers about what is working and not working, we have to continue our efforts to refine and develop our new initiatives. Make it easier to launch an experiment than to block one. At many companies, people are able to test ideas on a small percentage of users with mid-level approval. Elsewhere, you must write a memo about why an experiment should not hap- pen in order to block it. Our journalistic stan- dards always need to be protected, but tradition alone shouldn’t be a justification for blocking ex- periments. testING, TESTING Earlier this year, the newsroom analytics team conducted an “A/B Test” on a science article, showing different headlines and photos to readers. Of the options below, number three performed best. More important, it showed that this kind of test is possible — and that The Times should use it as another tool to drive traffic to our journalism. 1 The Color Of Pressure 2 The Color Of Pressure 3 The Big Squeeze 4 The Big Squeeze
  • 34. 33 Readers who visit our site for the first time natu- rally might assume that if they click on “New York,” they’re likely to find restaurant reviews, theater re- views, local sports coverage, museum coverage or real estate coverage. That assumption would be wrong, of course. This is but one example of the many opportuni- ties we have for repackaging our content so that it’s more useful, relevant and shareable for readers. We can point to successes already. On a whim, Andrew Phelps created a Flipboard magazine of our most important obits of the year and it became the best-read collection in the history of the platform. Other colleagues have tackled similar projects to re- package our work. But because our systems are dif- ficult for them experiment on, they usually turn to Flipboard, Pinterest and other sites. “It’s crazy that we’re doing this on a third-party platform and letting them reap many of the bene- fits,” said a senior digital editor. NOTABLE EXPERIMENTS Millions of people flipped through this collection of New York Times obits, developed on a whim by Andrew Phelps. Opportunity: Packaging Flipboard has created a tool that lets readers make collections with content on their app, including stories from The Times.
  • 35. 34 Growing Our Audience | Discovery Our committee ran a couple of experiments with repackaging and found that even old content can generate significant traffic without ever appearing on the home page. The first was a page featuring a collection of nine videos related to love, chosen from our archives by the weddings editor, for Valentine’s Day. The sec- ond was a collection of Nick Kristof articles and col- umns from the archives about sex trafficking. We created no new articles, only new packaging. We explicitly requested that they be kept off the home page and then we launched a strategic campaign to promote the pages elsewhere. The result? Both were huge hits, exclusively because our readers shared them on social. The video unit, eager to repeat those wins, is already pushing to create a template. Sasha Koren, our social and community editor, said these collections forced a change in thinking about what’s new. “Maybe it’s, ‘what’s new to some- one now,’” Koren said. “It’s still timely, it’s still rel- evant to this moment, it’s not dated.” Collections would allow us to curate or automati- cally group our content in many different ways: by section, topic, byline, etc. They can be used to put a new frame around old content and connect the dots between pieces written over time in a way that day-to-day coverage typically does not. A Collections format is being developed by Product and Design to improve our ability to or- ganize content in ways that are more intuitive and useful. The newsroom should support that work and consider creating a tool for reporters, web produc- ers, video journalists and editors — and eventually readers — to create collections and repackage our content in ways beyond the usual news format. For example, we could package stories about Putin’s tightening grip on Russia, or the best round- up of climate-science explainers, or service pieces about the science of sleep, or all the four-star res- taurant reviews from the last year. Currently, these TIMELY AND TIMELESS For Valentine’s Day, we worked with our weddings editor and other colleagues around the building to repackage nine videos from our archives. The result: a big hit with readers. Experiment: Collections types of collections are created almost exclusively off-site, on Flipboard. The key to making Collections scalable is for the newsroom to introduce a widget-like tool that any reporter or editor could use to drag and drop stories and photos. (The R&D department and, more re- cently, New Products have already built such tools.) Because Collections are created with content that has already been vetted and published, they require few resources and limited oversight. If our Collection tool were intuitive and easy to use, we could encourage readers to drag and drop a group of stories into their own collections, which they could then share. This is an opportunity to em- power readers to make something on our site with less risk to our brand.
  • 36. 35 New Again (And Popular) The “Inside the Brothels” collection that we devel- oped with Nick Kristof’s help provides a case study in how, without too much effort, we can repackage material in our archives and make it relevant again. Until we published “Inside the Brothels,” the seven stories in the collection had not drawn any traffic in years. But, as the chart at bottom left shows, all the stories saw a spike in visits after be- ing repackaged, with several getting more traffic than a typical new story on the day it’s published. NEW TRAFFIC “Inside the Brothels” rose to the No. 8 most- viewed article on launch day, and it sustained its traffic several days longer than typical daily stories. Over six days, the traffic to the collection page and the associated articles totaled 468,106 page views. Very few articles from a typical day’s paper will garner this much traffic in a month. ENGAGED READERS Articles in the “Inside the Brothels” collection were among those that readers spent the most time with that day. The 1996 Kristof article in our collection was third on this list, with the average user spending 2 minutes, 35 seconds. THE RECIRCULATION EFFECT “Recirculation” refers to a story’s effectiveness in driving readers to other stories, as opposed to their leaving the site. On launch day, “Inside the Brothels” ranked No. 1 on the recirculation list. LESSONS LEARNED Evergreen content is appealing to readers if resurfaced in a way that is smart. Such work can find a large audience without home page attention. The newsroom can fall into old habits about ex- periments like this one, raising concerns about turf, quality control and precedents. One-offs are laborious, so we should focus on making such efforts replicable and scalable. APR 14, 1996 JAN 21, 2004 MAR 26, 2006 APR 22, 2007 NOV 18, 2010 MAR 31, 2012 OCT 12, 2013 Pub Date Article Page Views Children For Sale Bargaining For Freedom A Woman Without [...] The 21st Century Slave [...] A Woman. A Prostitute. [...] Sex Trafficking Comes [...] From the Brothels [...] Collection Page TOTAL 37,803 29,238 21,962 14,075 33,240 24,255 25,230 282,303 468,106
  • 37. 36 Growing Our Audience | Discovery Balancing Act: One-offs vs. Replicability The surprising popularity of The Times dialect quiz — the most popular piece of content in the paper’s history, with more than 21 million page views — prompted weeks of internal discussions about ways to build on that remarkable success. But over at BuzzFeed, they were busy perfecting a template so they could pump out quiz after quiz after quiz. “We wanted to have interactive games,” explained one BuzzFeed editor, “but not have the developers build them every time, so that we could experiment freely.” This contrast helps illustrate one of the biggest obstacles to our digital success. We have a tendency to pour resources into big one-time projects and work through the one-time fixes needed to create them, and overlook the less glamorous work of creating tools, templates and permanent fixes that cumulatively can have a bigger im- pact by saving our digital journalists time and elevating the whole report. We greatly un- dervalue replicability. Driven in part by the success of Snowfall, we have gone to extraordinary lengths in recent years to sup- port huge single-story efforts. The ambitions of such projects are central to our brand. But Graphics, In- teractive, Design and Social are spending a dispro- portionate amount of time on these labor-intensive one-offs. Meanwhile, we have repeatedly put off making the necessary improvements to allow our graphics to appear on mobile. That runs counter to the approach at so many of our digital competitors. “We are focused on build- ing tools to create Snowfalls everyday, and getting them as close to reporters as possible,” said Kevin Delaney, editor of Quartz, which is known for inno- vative storytelling formats. “I’d rather have a Snow- fall builder than a Snowfall.” When we have created tools, the benefits are clear. For example, the slideshow tool has become one of our most popular features, the dashboard sys- tem has elevated our ability to respond to breaking news, and our blog platforms helped train an entire generation of Times reporters and editors to write for the web. “It’s actually been a long time since we had platform innovation on that scale,” said Nathan Ashby-Kuhlman. Several digital leaders in the newsroom said they believe we need to reprioritize the kind of incremen- tal improvements that can elevate the whole report and allow our journalists to, for example, build their own collections from our archives. “We’ve reached a point now where platform innovation is a require- ment,” said one editor. We also need to prioritize sustain- able solutions over time-consuming hacks, short-term fixes and work- arounds to problems that emerge repeatedly, sometimes daily. For example, platform editors spend hours on Sunday mornings trying to fix stories that don’t work on mobile devices. They know the problems that will emerge but are unable to get the Technology re- sources to fix them. Since the newsroom does not control those resources, it is very difficult to priori- tize even small changes that cause trouble day after day. Our competitors, particularly digital-native ones, treat platform innovation as a core function. Vox and First Look Media have lured talent with the pitch that they have built the tools and templates to elevate journalists. That was the advantage that BuzzFeed C.E.O. Jonah Peretti cited in a recent company memo, saying that the company had spent years investing in formats, analytics, optimization and testing frameworks. “This is a massive invest- ment that is very difficult to replicate,” he said. Tools, templates and permanent fixes can elevate the whole report.
  • 38. 37 We already personalize our content for individual readers in subtle ways: a front-page story about New York may be substituted for a National story, the global home page curates our news report with an international sensibility, and the iPad app grays out the stories you’ve already read. Embracing personalization does not mean flip- ping a switch that gives different stories to every person. Nor should it. Research shows that readers come to us in part to find out what we consider the top stories of the day. But personalization offers countless opportunities to surface content in smarter ways. It means using technology to ensure that the right stories are find- ing the right readers in the right places at the right times. For example, letting you know when you’re walk- ing by a restaurant we just reviewed; knowing that you prefer to get stories by email; and making sure you never miss a story about your alma mater. Even with the home page there is an opportunity for a measured approach — in effect, serve everyone the same dinner but at least give them their favorite desserts. For basketball fans who never read about baseball, that means showing them the story about the Knicks game rather than the Yankees game (un- less the baseball story has been flagged as impor- tant, such as a story on a perfect game). Readers have come to expect this personalization. Facebook’s new Paper app, for example, is built on news feeds tailored to each user. Yahoo has recently used personalization technology to drive growth in news readership. Other media sites, like BuzzFeed and The Wash- ington Post, alter what readers see based on how they arrive on their sites. For example, they will look at data in real time to track which stories are draw- ing readers from Twitter, and then they show those same stories to other people who visit from Twitter. This practice tends to keep them reading more sto- ries. In the absence of newsroom input, the business side has been leading our approach to personaliza- tion. Currently, our main tool for personalizing content is our “Recommended For You” tab, which is not up to our standards and has provoked many reader complaints. The list occupies a prominent spot on our homepage but the newsroom has not been very involved in discussions. As a result, the formula we use offers content that would otherwise be hid- den on the site — but it often shows smaller-bore items. “It’s possible we’re using the entirely wrong algorithm,” said Boris Chen, a data scientist on The Times’s personalization team. But editors, he said, must help him understand what is wrong so he can create a better alternative. Another significant tool for personalization — a section of the home page for content that readers missed but would likely want to see, based on their reading patterns — is being planned by Design for NYT5 and the iPhone app. The newsroom should consider devoting more at- tention to these new initiatives. And the newsroom should clarify how much personalization we want on our home page and on our apps. Until then, the uncertainty about what is acceptable will limit our creativity and initiative on this front. Opportunity: Personalization
  • 39. 38 Growing Our Audience | Discovery A BETTER ENGINE Readers have come to expect smart personalization online. But our current recommendation engine, right, uses an algorithm to serve up content that leaves many readers puzzled about our judgment. “Based on what The New York Times thinks I’m interested in, I am not a fun person,” wrote Margaret Sullivan, our public editor. The Times is planning to add other features that help personalize the reading experience in more subtle ways. One example, below, which we’ve illustrated with the help of a gray box, would show individual readers the stories they missed on the home page since their last visit. Though all readers would see the same top news stories, the other articles we show them would be customized to reflect what they haven’t seen.
  • 40. 39 We’ve heard time and again that younger readers are moving away from browsing and that they in- creasingly expect news to come to them, on social, through alerts and through personalization. There is a sense that “if something is important, it will find me.” We are far behind in adjusting to these trends. We could create a “follow” button that offers read- ers a variety of ways to curate and receive their own news feeds, ensuring they never miss a Modern Love or Maureen Dowd column. With a single click, their favorite topics, features and writers could automati- cally be collected in a Following Inbox. We could also offer readers the opportunity to have alerts about new stories sent to their phone or email. Until the feature was recently discontinued as part of the NYT5 redesign, the only way for Times read- ers to be notified of new favorites was by email. This feature was hard to find, hidden at the bottom of stories below the comment section, and required readers to plow through multiple sign-up pages. Even so, it had 338,000 users and unusually high engagement rates. Some technically savvy readers are so eager not to miss stories that they have even written code so that certain stories are sent to them automatically. Such “following” features have been critical to the success of YouTube, Spotify and Twitter. But increasingly Circa, Breaking News, The Verge and other digital outlets are doing this with news. The Design and Product teams have been exploring such a feature for columnists, and should have the news- room’s support. Experiment: Following TOUGH AUDIENCE We’ve always had a sense that readers were loyal followers of their favorite columnists. And the paper makes it easy to catch certain bylines (Monday morning? Time for David Carr). On the Internet, however, readers are far more fickle. The accompanying charts show that readers don’t come back often to the same columnist. The quality of their work isn’t the issue. Making it easier for readers to discover what they already like – by creating a “follow” feature for each columnist, for example – could make these charts look very different. 50 STORIES N° OF STORIES 2051 10 15 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 20% A.O. Scott Melissa Clark David Carr Floyd Norris Holland Cotter Ginia Bellafante 40% 60% 80% 100% OF READERS*0% 50% 40% 30% 20% 10% 0% % OF READERS**This data is based on registered users and subscribers 1 2 3 4 5 6-10 11-20 21+ Paul Krugman Gail Collins Maureen Dowd David Brooks Joe Nocera Bill Keller
  • 41. 40 Growing Our Audience | Discovery BUILDING A FOLLOWING TOP STORIES President Obama’s gesture to Raúl Castro of Cuba at the memorial for Nelson Mandela instantly raised questions about its deeper meaning. Will Handshake With Castro Lead to Headache for Obama? POLITICS INVESTIGATIVE Nelson Mandela’s memorial service in Soweto, South Af- rica, drew a remarkable crowd of global V.I.P.’s, including President Obama and at least 91 other heads of state and The Great and The Humble Honor Mandela MANDELA FOLLOWING 14 TODAY The Italian Parliament has been deadlocked on major changes for years, unable or unwilling to enact bills to overhaul the political system or unshackle the economy, which has barely grown in two decades. Rise of Young Leaders Signals a Mandate for Political Change in Italy ITALY Dasani, one of New York’s 22,000 homeless chil- dren, lives on the margins of a gentrified city. A Neighborhood’s Profound Divide INVISIBLE CHILD Melissa Clark serves a sophisticated roasted apple, shallot and blue cheese tart at her holiday cocktail party. Roasted Apple and Blue Cheese Tart MELISSA CLARK Restaurant Review: Sushi Naka- zawa in the West Village The Student Does the Master Proud RESTAURANT REVIEWS Early results for large-scale e-learning courses are disap- pointing, forcing a rethinking of how college instruction can best You’ve read 4 Melissa Clark Articles this month. Tap to Follow her. METRO NORTH UPDATE: 3 dead and 60 wounded. At least 6 others in critical condition. GET LIVE UPDATES The NYTimes will keep covering the Metro North Crash over the next few hours as the news unfolds. BREAKINGBREAKING: Metro North Train Crashes in the Bronx. A news alert arrives for breaking news. These are some examples of features we could add to our mobile app to help readers follow their favorite topics, bylines and stories. Tapping on the alert brings the reader to a developing story. At the end of the article, the reader is prompted with the option of following the story. The reader is notified of new updates.
  • 42. 41 “The Paper of Record,” Version 2.0 A century ago, The Times began the laborious pro- cess of identifying and tagging the major and mi- nor topics and characters of every story it produced. Each year, it compiled these listings in the massive “New York Times Index,” the only complete index of a U.S. newspaper. This effort made us indispens- able to librarians, historians and academics. And it earned us a nickname: “The Paper of Record.” The many opportunities described in this report — and others that will only become clear over time — require us to focus on this humble art we helped pioneer, which we still call “tagging.” In the digital world, tagging is a type of structured data — the in- formation that allows things to be searched and sorted and made useful for analysis and innova- tion. Some of the most success- ful Internet companies, including Netflix, Facebook and Pandora, have so much structured data — by tagging dozens or even hundreds of different ele- ments of every movie, song and article — that they have turned the science of surfacing the right piece of content at the right time into the core of thriving businesses. The Times, however, hasn’t updated its structured data to meet the changing demands of our digital age and is falling far behind as a result. Without better tagging, we are hamstrung in our ability to allow readers to follow developing stories, discover nearby restaurants that we have reviewed or even have our photos show up on search engines. “Everyone forgets about metadata,” said John O’Donovan, the chief technology officer for The Financial Times. “They think they can just make stuff and then forget about how it is organized in terms of how you describe your content. But all your assets are useless to you unless you have metadata — your archive is full of stuff that is of no value because you can’t find it and don’t know what it’s about.” And here is an ugly truth about structured data: there are substantial costs to waiting. For example, because our recipes were never properly tagged by ingredients and cooking time, we floundered about for 15 years trying to figure out how to create a useful recipe database. We can do it now, but only after spending a huge sum to ret- roactively structure the data. The lack of structured data also helps explain why we are unable to auto- mate the sale of our photos and why we continually struggle to attain higher rankings on search engines. We need to reclaim our industry- leading position, but right now our needs are far more basic. We must expand the structured data we cre- ate, which is still defined by the needs of the Times Index rather than our modern digital capabili- ties. For example, at a time when nearly 60 percent of our readers access us via mo- bile devices, we are missing an opportunity to serve up content that’s relevant to their locations because we are not tagging stories with geographic coordi- nates. The Boston Globe is among the many publi- cations doing this. Similarly, to enable readers to follow updates on running news stories, we need to be using tags that tie together articles, photos, and videos about a news event, like “Boston Marathon Bombing.” It took seven years for us to start tagging stories “September 11.” “We never made a tag for Benghazi, and I wish we had because the story just won’t die,” said Kristi Reilly of our Archive, Metadata and Search team. Her boss, Evan Sandhaus, framed the opportunity more strongly: “We don’t tag the one thing” — news events — “that people use to navigate the news.” Our competitors are a full step ahead of us in us- ing structured data. The Washington Post and The The structured data we create is still defined by the Times Index.
  • 43. 42 Growing Our Audience | Discovery NEW TAG BIGGER DATA SAMPLE TAGS POTENTIAL BENEFIT Surface new and old content relevant to readers’ locations, particularly for mobile usage. Geographic location of story content Gramercy Restaurant 40.7386° N, 73.9885° W Surface old content in a smart way, including adding sophistication to our recommendation engines and easier ways for editors to feature relevant older stories. Timeliness Timely forever Timely for a year Timely for a month Timely for a day Make better use of evergreen content well after publica- tion. Conduct more granular analysis of users’ reading behavior. Story type Breaking news Profile News analysis Enable readers to follow ongoing stories and news events. Better organize our archives. Story threads Crisis in Ukraine Improve content discovery by letting users surface stories based on their mood. Story tone Uplifting Serious Display photos in search results on our site and our apps. Tagging photos by topic would improve the ranking of our content in search results. Photos: topics Ukraine Viktor Yanukovych Create a ‘news in photos’ experience that lets users start with a photo and click through to a related article. Photos: articles where photo appeared “A Kiev Question: What Became of the Missing?” Sell prints of all rights-cleared photos on our site.Photos: usage rights Rights cleared No resale rights Here are some examples of structured data that would allow us to make better use of our content: Wall Street Journal use it for insight into how read- ers are using their websites. At Circa, each article is broken into “atoms of news,” such as facts, quotes, and statistics. That allows editors to quickly surface relevant content and context during breaking news. Expanding our structured data capabilities would require us to address some technology and work- flow issues. Notably, it would put greater demands on our copy editors, web producers and librarians. That means we may need to build out those teams, and we will certainly need to go to great lengths to explain how crucial this effort is to our long-term success. Every day we wait, we fall further behind our competitors. The Times considered increasing its tagging efforts in 2010 and passed. The cost of catching up has only grown.
  • 44. 43 At The Times, we generally like to let our work speak for itself. We’re not ones to brag. Our competitors have no such qualms, and many are doing a better job of getting their journalism in front of new readers through aggressive story pro- motion. They regard this as a core function of re- porters and editors, and they react with amazement that the same is not true here. “A lot of the institutions that are doing well are marketing themselves well,” said Amanda Michel, head of social media for The Guardian. “People may think that’s dirty, but it’s reality.” The Guardian has a promotion team inside the newsroom and an ambitious social strategy that has helped rapidly expand its readership in the United States. The Huffington Post expects all reporters and editors to be fully fluent in social media, includ- ing the kinds of headlines and photos that tend to perform best on different platforms. The Atlantic and its digital properties expect reporters to pro- mote their own work and mine traffic numbers to look for best practices. Even ProPublica, that bastion of old-school jour- nalism values, goes to extraordinary lengths to give stories a boost. An editor meets with search, social and public relations specialists to develop a promo- tion strategy for every story. And reporters must submit five tweets along with each story they file. By contrast, our approach is muted. After we spent more than a year producing a signature piece of journalism — the “Invisible Child” series — we alerted our marketing and PR colleagues too late for them to do any promotion ahead of time. The reporter didn’t tweet about it for two days. (Though the pieces still had massive reach and impact, we don’t know how many more readers we could have attracted with additional effort.) “I don’t feel like we sit down when we have a big project, a big story, and say, ‘How do we roll this out?’” said one top editor. “It would require an en- tirely different way of thinking. It would be about saying, ‘This is what is running on Sunday.’” A key tool is social media. Our institutional ac- counts reach tens of millions of people and the ac- counts of individual reporters and editors reach mil- lions more. The size of our social team reflects our eagerness to succeed in this arena. But with less than 10 percent of our digital traffic coming to us through social media we are still figuring out how to best engage readers. The percentage of readers who visit BuzzFeed through social, for example, is more than six times greater than at The Times. They have learned, among other things, that a great Facebook post has become a better promotional device than a head- line and that the impact of social is even greater on mobile. Many outlets place a team in the newsroom to track the most popular stories in real time. As those stories spike, the team helps desks take steps to draw more traffic and to keep visitors on the site longer. Other sites also look for unexpectedly poor performers and repackage them to give them a lift. Reuters, for instance, recently hired two employees to scour the site to find up to seven hidden gems per day, which they then repackage and republish 2 Promotion
  • 45. 44 Growing Our Audience | Promotion NEW TOOLS Promotion doesn’t just mean using social media sites like Twitter and Facebook. Email and search are also powerful drivers of traffic. Another is optimization, the use of specialized tools and tactics to draw readers and keep them reading. At competitors, this is done story by story and platform by platform, before and after publication. The dialect quiz had 21 million visits and still gets around 10,000 per day. But the simply designed page did little to keep visitors on our site. Here are some features that we could have added to help the quiz drive more traffic to other parts of the site. to give them a second chance. We need to create structures inside the newsroom that broaden the reach and impact of our most im- portant work. In addition, we need to identify and share best practices at the ground level so that re- porters and editors feel encouraged and empowered to promote their own work. And we need to focus more attention on the be- hind-the-scenes process of optimization. Just add- ing structured data, for example, immediately in- creased traffic to our recipes from search engines by 52 percent. Companies like Huffington Post and BuzzFeed have, in just a few years, eclipsed our traffic by building best practices for search and social into their workflow. For example, at The Huffington Post, a story cannot be published unless it has a photo, a search headline, a tweet and a Facebook post. Now The Huffington Post regularly outperforms us in these areas — sometimes even with our own content. An executive there described watching their aggregation outperform our original content after Nelson Mandela’s death. “You guys got crushed,” he said. “I was queasy watching the numbers. I’m not proud of this. But this is your competition. You should defend the digital pick-pockets from steal- ing your stuff with better headlines, better social.” Other competitors, like The Atlantic and Politico, are also using emails as direct channels to readers. This basic tool has become one of the most popular and efficient ways to cut through all the noise of the social web and reach readers directly. The Times is reaching 6.5 million readers by email, even though this tool has largely been treated as an afterthought. Sign up for emails to future New York Times quizzes. Ask a question of the professors behind the quiz, Bert Vaux and Scott Golder. Q&A Add a link to NYT home page. Add a related article. Add a form where readers can sign up to receive notices about future quizzes. Add a link to a social site that is driving heavy traffic to this feature. Add a Q&A.
  • 46. 45 GOING MOBILE Most of the social networks’ traffic comes from smartphones. That’s why our competitors say the key to winning mobile is to win on social. PINTEREST TWITTER FACEBOOK Mobile Traffic Web Traffic FAN BASE The number of Facebook followers counts for a lot. But a more telling indicator of reader engagement is how many of them interact with content, by posting comments and “liking” stories. By this measure, many of our competitors are doing better than us. NYTimes CNN Fox News Huffington Post NPR Washington Post USA Today 0 2,5M 5M 7,5M % of engaged 52 19 16 13 8 5 3 Number of fans Number of ‘engaged fans’ Source: BuzzFeed Our Twitter account is run by the newsroom. Our Facebook account is run by the business side. This unwieldy structure highlights a problem that has bedeviled our promotion efforts. Even though audience development is the kind of work that should be shared across the company, it instead falls into silos, with marketing, public relations, search, and social all answering to different bosses and rarely collaborating. These departments should work together on pro- motion strategies, such as publicizing big stories before and after they are published. We also need to change our tools and workflows to optimize our content for search and social, and exploit other di- rect channels to readers, such as email. There is a widely held assumption in the news- room that promotion is mostly done by the social team. But the team has framed its mission most- ly around using social media as a reporting tool, rather than as a tool for audience development. This approach was an important first step to help the newsroom start exploring social media. But today it means that we are mostly leaving the larger promo- tion question unaddressed. Though many of our competitors also use social for reporting, they mainly view it as an audience development tool. They told us they also use it as a hotbed of experimentation because platforms and user behavior change so quickly. At The Times, the social team collects less data and is less integrated with the rest of the newsroom than at our competitors, hampering our efforts to identify and spread best practices. Others have paired social editors with data experts and then ag- gressively spread lessons through their newsrooms. “When we figured out the Facebook algorithm and that Facebook mattered more than Twitter, traffic exploded,” said Jacob Weisberg of Slate. Opportunity: Institutional Promotion
  • 47. 46 Growing Our Audience | Promotion Experiment: Promotion Squad We could form a promotional team of experts in the newsroom to focus on building and executing strategies for extending the reach of our most im- portant work. The model used by ProPublica is instructive, with a team that creates a specific strategy for each story in advance of its publication. The team includes an expert to focus on ways to boost a story on search through headlines, links and other tactics; a social editor who decides which platforms are best for the story and then finds influential people to help spread LESSONS LEARNED The Magazine promotion experiment was not a success. Here are three lessons we learned. 1. There were disagreements about strategy and no clear leader to resolve them. 2. The promotion specialists seemed unclear about the tools at their disposal, so they gravitated to conservative approaches they knew best. 3. Decisions were made without data, which affected both setting goals and measuring outcomes. the word; a marketer who reaches out through phone calls or emails to other media outlets, as well as organizations that are interested in the topic. The story editor also participates to ensure the journal- ism is being promoted appropriately. And a data analyst evaluates the impact of the promotion. Our committee pulled together such a team from across departments for an experiment with The New York Times Magazine for the February “Voy- ages” issue. We let them run the experiment while we participated as observers. The traffic figures were underwhelming — actually decreasing from the previous year — and the process had numerous stumbles. These results should be instructive for any future efforts.
  • 48. 47 The Times made a smart decision when it decided not to establish rules for using social media, prefer- ring instead to trust reporters and editors to exer- cise their judgment. We gave people the room to ex- periment and adapt to developing mediums. There are no rules, but no real guidance, either. We need to explicitly urge reporters and editors to promote their work and we need to thank those who make the extra effort. Interest in and aptitude for social media should not be required — just as we don’t expect every reporter to be a great writer — but it should be a factor. And we need to help journalists raise their profiles on social by sharing best practic- es. Our journalists want maximum readership and impact but many don’t know how to use social me- dia effectively. Content promotion needs to become more integrated into each desk’s daily workflow. The notion that journalists should be their own promoters has become a bedrock principle at our competitors. For example, Dan Colarusso, executive editor of Reuters Digital, said, “All web editors en- gage on social and are also tasked with identifying related communities and seeding their content.” Other places test approaches to social engage- ment and then actively disseminate the results. That taps into reporters’ competitive instincts, and raises everyone’s game. Reporters and editors are eager to do what is asked of them, as long as they have clarity on both how and why — as well as some assurance that the extra effort will be rewarded. Right now, they are unsure of whether spending time on social repre- sents doing work or avoiding it. For example, A.O. Scott said that his film reviews occasionally get an outsize reaction on social. He is torn between engaging with readers and moving on to the next story. “It raises the question, when is pushing it forward the better substitute for doing more work?” There are countless examples of smart social and community efforts around the building. KJ Dell’Antonia, our Motherlode blogger, spends about an hour every day replying to commenters. Gina Ko- lata writes back to all readers who email her. Chris Chivers makes time, even in war zones, to manage social accounts on eight different platforms. All of these reporters complained that the tactics they use to reach readers are one-offs. They all ex- pressed hope that the broader newsroom could be given tools and support to help journalists connect with their audiences. One approach would be to create an “impact tool- box” and train an editor on each desk to use it. The toolbox would provide strategy, tactics and tem- plates for increasing the reach of an article before and after it’s published. Over time, the editor could teach others. There is compelling evidence that these best prac- tices can be taught. Many of the reporters who are best at social promotion — such as Nick Kristof, Nick Bilton, C.J. Chivers, David Carr and Charles Duhigg — learned these skills from their publishers as part of their book-promotion efforts. Andrea Elliott said she also received this training after signing her book deal at Random House. Opportunity: Front-Line Promotion Bearing witness, and sharing
  • 49. 48 Growing Our Audience | Promotion To help promote the Kristof collection, we pulled together a list of relevant, influential people who could spread the word about it on social media. This work could be automated and turned into an internal tool, which we could use to help promote our best journalism on social media. We’ve mocked Experiment: Influencers Map INFLUENCERS FILTER BY Nick Kristof opinion columnist @NickKristof 1.46 million followers Lydia Polgreen deputy foreign editor and former foreign correspondent in India, South Africa, etc @lpolgreen 38,700 followers Declan Walsh Pakistan bureau chief @declanwalsh 45,300 followers Salman Masood Pakistan correspondent @salmanmasood 18,300 followers Thomas Fuller southeast Asia correspondent @ThomasFullerNYT 4,763 followers Ellen Barry South Asia bureau chief, formerly Russia correspondent @EllenBarryNYT 10,200 followers Sheryl WuDunn co-author of “Half the Sky” @WuDunn 11,200 followers @Half account for “Half the Sky” book on the treatment of women around the world 50,500 followers Restore NYC an NGO @restorenyc 5,963 followers Change.Org an activist platform @change.org 777,000 followers Apne App an India-based NGO fighting sex-trafficking @apneaap 2,114 followers Ashley Judd actress who has spoken out against sex trafficking @ashleyjudd 202,000 followers Becca Stevens priest in Tennessee who has fought sex trafficking @RevBeccaStevens 1,354 followers Liriel Higa social media coordinator for “Half the Sky” @idiplomacy 3,161 followers Andrea Powell Executive Director & Co-Founder, FAIR Girls, non-profit that fights sex trafficking @Fair_Girls 12,200 followers Bradley Myles Executive director of Polaris Project, which fights human trafficking @Polaris_Project 28,600 followers Ken Roth executive director of Human Rights Watch, NGO @KenRoth 50,800 followers NYTIMES EXTERNAL Minky Worden director of Global Initiatives at Human Rights Watch, NGO @minkyshighjinks 5,736 followers Tom Dart Sheriff in Cook County, Illinois active in fighting sex trafficking @TomDart 2,688 Followers Lisa Goldblatt Grace head of My Life My Choice, Boston-based group fighting sex trafficking @mlmcgirls 238 followers Gary Haugen CEO of International Justice Mission @garyhaugen 21,300 followers Somaly Mam Cambodian human rights activist @somalymam 405,000 followers TOPICS: KRISTOF SEX TRAFFICKING INDIA PAKISTAN CAMBODIA up below what an influencer map for “Inside the Brothels” might look like. The work paid off. Someone we had contacted about the collection shared it on Twitter and was retweeted by Ashton Kutcher, who has 15.9 million followers.
  • 50. 49 The Times commands respect, conveys authority and inspires devotion. All of that is captured in the pride with which people identify themselves as de- voted Times readers. This is our huge advantage as we think more about connecting with our audience. This audience is often described as our single most underutilized resource. We can count the world’s best-informed and most influential people among our readers. And we have a platform to which many of them would be willing and honored to contribute. Yet we haven’t cracked the code for engaging with them in a way that makes our report richer. Of all the tasks we discuss in this report, the chal- lenge of connecting with and engaging readers — which extends from online comments to conferenc- es — has been the most difficult. But best practices have emerged on these fronts, as well, and many of our competitors are experimenting aggressively and pulling ahead of us. Aside from social, our main platform for engaging with readers is moderated comments, a forum that is respected for its quality but does not have wide appeal. Only a fraction of stories are opened for comments, only one percent of readers write com- ments and only three percent of readers read com- ments. Our trusted-commenter system, which we hoped would increase engagement, includes just a few hundred readers. That has prompted business- side leaders to question their value and newsroom leaders to wonder whether those resources could be better used elsewhere. Our other efforts for engaging with readers — many of which have been well-received — mostly have been one-offs. Impressive projects rarely lead to replicable tools that could be used to elevate our whole report. And our offline efforts to connect with readers, like conferences and cruises, are largely outdated replicas of competitors’ work, and we have pursued them without much newsroom input. Meanwhile, The Atlantic and The New Yorker have created sig- nature events that deepen loyalty and make money while staying true to their brands. The newsroom needs to take on these questions of connection and engagement. We are in a sub- scriber-driven business, our digital content needs to travel on the backs of readers to find new readers, and there is an appetite to know the people behind our report. We can come up with a Timesian way for connecting with our readers online and offline that deepens their loyalty. The first step is getting more comfortable with the idea of pulling back the curtain and providing readers a bit more insight into how we do our work, which will only deepen their connection to it. Outlets like NPR and The Guardian, which reach similar audiences, have used this approach to good effect. “Few places have that brand, but The New York Times does,” said Vivian Schiller, formerly of The Times and NPR, and now head of news at Twit- ter. 3 Connection
  • 51. 50 Growing Our Audience | Connection Our reporters and columnists are eager to connect with readers in this way but many are going to oth- er platforms to talk about the process behind their work. A recent case in point: Jon Eligon wrote a gripping first-person account on Facebook about his experience as a black reporter approaching a white supremacist in North Dakota. The good news is we are moving to capture some of this conversation. We recently launched the “What We’re Reading” email, which curates recom- mendations of good journalism from around the web from Times editors and writers. We are offering a new “story behind the story” feature for premium subscribers. Similarly, the new Opinion product is focused on fostering reader-columnist discussions. OPENING UP Readers want to connect with Times journalists — to get the back story, learn what we are reading, and join the conversation.
  • 52. 51 SANDBOXES The Huffington Post’s platform allows anyone to publish content on its site. Medium enhanced that model with design and curation. Storify lets users assemble Tweets and videos into storylines. User-generated content, which has provided our competitors with a low-cost way to expand their sites and deepen loyalty, has proved to be a diffi- cult challenge at The Times. But we already are home to one of the most cele- brated forums of user-generated content in publish- ing: Op-Eds. In the digital world, though, we are trailing badly behind our competitors. Many publishers have de- cided to become platforms, as well. Huffington Post and Medium have experienced huge growth in part because they have become a platform for opinion pieces and guest essays. Others, including CNN and The Journal, are moving in the same direction. They have serious quality lapses as a result, but also big wins and a growing and engaged audience. The Times has considerations our competitors don’t — namely, our brand promises readers that every- thing they has been carefully vetted. We are one of the few outlets where even comments meet this standard. But a new generation of startups is training the next generation of readers to expect participation. “Our readers do want to show off and what we could offer them is the imprimatur of greatness,” said Leslie Kaufman, who covers media. Opportunity: User-Generated Content
  • 53. 52 Growing Our Audience | Connection One digital strategist compared the world of online engagement to a cocktail party. Most people, she noted, don’t want to talk to strangers. They want to talk to their friends or important people. Facebook is handling the friend part of that equa- tion. The Times is well-positioned to play host to im- portant people. We receive dozens of Op-Ed submissions every day from top thinkers and leaders, and we publish only a fraction of them. Some of this is quality con- trol. But in many cases, we are simply following the constraints of print. The Times has already expanded our footprint in this area through our new video feature, Op-Docs. The quality of submissions and audience interest both have been extremely high, making Op-Docs one of our most popular and praised verticals. We should experiment with expanding our Op-Ed offerings to include specific sections and verticals, opening up our report to leaders in fields such as politics, business and culture. These guest essays, to use the more conventional term, would help The Times solidify its position as the destination for sophisticated conversation. The world’s smartest and most influential people have long been eager to write for us for the modest pay- day of $150 a piece. These are often some of our best-read works — and often provide us with world- beating scoops. Imagine if the Arts section had daily Op-Eds from leading figures in dance, theater, movies and archi- tecture. Or if David Leonhardt’s new venture includ- ed daily Op-Eds from smart minds in politics and academia. Or if the Science section became the lead- ing arena for ideas from scientists and philosophers. Controversial? Metro does this with Metropolitan Diary. Business, Sports, Styles and Book Review do this, as well, with guest essays and other user-sub- mitted features. Gina Kolata said she frequently receives well- written submissions that are too narrowly focused for the newspaper but perfect for Science. “Often I’m getting people saying, ‘Can I write an Op-ed?’ Most of their stuff goes nowhere, but if it did, there’d be an audience for it.” We would recommend starting with one or two desks and establishing best practices. Experiment: Expand Op-Eds READERS WHO WRITE The Times is an early pioneer of user-generated content. We stirred controversy in 1976 by giving bylines to readers who penned Metropolitan Diary entries. We’ve printed Op-Eds from the likes of Angelina Jolie and Vladimir Putin. And we publish letters to the editor every day.
  • 54. 53 Our events operation is improving but still has a long way to go to meet the standards of The New York Times. Our events are typically built around industry is- sues that are of interest to both sponsors and corpo- rate audiences. Events can be about connecting with readers as much as they are about making money. NPR has made its journalists the centerpiece of shows that travel to large concert spaces in cities and college towns. The Atlantic hosts the well-regarded and lucrative Aspen Ideas Festival. The New Yorker reportedly makes a huge amount of its annual rev- enue from its fun and engaging annual festival. There is no reason that the space filled by TED Talks, with tickets costing $7,500, could not have been created by The Times. “One of our biggest con- cerns is that someone like The Times will start a real conference program,” said a TED executive. Univision recently hosted town halls by report- ers about topics that consistently ranked as the most popular on its website and channels. “We got around 8,000 people to discuss better ways to man- age personal finances,” said Enrique Acevedo, who hosted the event. But before we pursue any of these options, the newsroom needs to be more involved in thinking through our events strategy. This is more urgent because in recent years the events industry has shifted in ways that mirror changes in the newspaper industry: away from a to- tal dependence on advertising and toward readers willing to pay. Rob Grimshaw, the head of digital strategy at FT.com who has made events an extension of his job, said his newsroom now views conference at- tendees much as it does digital subscribers – they are all simply members of its broader audience. Our best effort on this front is Times Talks, but we’ve made little effort to scale them. Those who have studied the industry say that the most success- ful approach is to take such events on tour, with multiple stops for the same line up, or to hold a single large annual event. Instead, we’re building each of ours as a one-off. Many executives and editors at competing outlets said that The Times is in a unique position to in- crease and retain subscribers by shedding its mod- esty and putting forward its best asset: its talent. The Times should create reader-focused events that elevate our brand while meeting our standards. Imagine a New York Times Readers Festival: An annual event in NYC that anyone registered on our site could pay to attend, with a few segments open only to subscribers and premium subscribers. Possible sessions include: panels on the top stories of the year, Q&A’s with reporters and editors on cer- tain topics, training sessions on writing, photogra- phy and video, talks by a handful of outsiders who wrote the most-read Op-Eds of the year, a multi- media showcase of our best videos, photos and in- teractives. We should not underestimate interest in Times reporters and journalism. Experiment: New Events Opportunity: Events
  • 55. 54 Growing Our Audience | Connection Getting to Know Our Readers To provide more relevant and meaningful user ex- periences, we need to first better understand our readers — who they are and how they use our site. Currently, our capabilities for collecting reader data are limited. he information is dispersed hap- hazardly across the organization and rarely put to use for purposes other than marketing. And the newsroom, which is perhaps best positioned to champion this effort because of its close connection to readers, has not played a leading role. The smart use of reader data has been essential to the success of companies like Google, Facebook and Amazon. But traditional media companies are also figuring out this game. The Guardian, for ex- ample, recently launched its “Known Strategy,” with the newsroom leading the effort to improve how it collects, archives and uses reader data. “I don’t think we really understood the power of the data and the audience understanding that came with the subscription model,” said The Financial Times’s C.E.O., John Ridding. “We’ve been able to build a system of understanding our readers.” LinkedIn offers a good example of how to use reader data in smart ways. Last year, it sent out an email to hundreds of thousands of users: “Con- gratulations, you have one of the top 5 percent most viewed LinkedIn profiles.” Other sites, like TripAd- visor, tell unpaid contributors when their work is being widely read and commented on. These feed- back mechanisms increase loyalty. Because the Times has a paywall and has recently taken new steps to encourage readers to register, we’re even better positioned to collect such data. But we don’t do things that our competitors do, like ask readers whether they would be willing to be contact- ed by reporters or if they are willing to share some basic information about their hometown, alma ma- ter and industry so we can send them articles about those topics. When the newsroom does seek reader data, too often we build one-off systems and then we don’t store the information in ways that can be shared or retrieved later. For example, when Libby Rosenthal tried to email all the people who had commented on her first medical-cost story to let them know about a follow-up, someone had to manually pull every com- menter’s email address from registration data. KJ Dell’Antonia paid an assistant out of her own pocket to go through years of her old emails to pull reader addresses to let them know about her newsletter. Readers, though, are eager to share information if they think it will help us or them. In stories where readers are encouraged to leave their email ad- dresses to signal that they would be willing to speak with Times reporters, almost 90 percent agree. Our competitors have pursued this strategy to build up reader databases that can be used for both reporting and promotion. We should pursue this in a scalable, organized fashion in consultation with the business side. MANUAL LABOR When Libby Rosenthal wanted to alert readers about a new story in her series, someone had to pull the email addresses by hand from comments posted on her previous articles. The exercise pointed to an obvious need to create a tool to collect those addresses automatically and help cement our relationships with readers.
  • 57. 56 Strenghtening Our Newsroom |
  • 58. 57 It is hard to believe that only seven years ago, The New York Times housed its digital and print opera- tions in separate buildings. Since that time, the newsroom has undergone a slow, steady evolution. Each year, our traditional and digital journalists become more integrated and more aligned. Each year, our leaders invest more resources into our digital operations. Each year, we produce more groundbreaking digital journalism. Despite these concerted efforts, we have not moved far enough or fast enough. There is a split in our digital readiness that is making it harder for us to thrive in this shifting landscape. The digital journalism that readers see each day is exceptional: Graphics, Design and Interactive News have become industry-leading operations and home to some of our most talented journalists. But we’ve made far less progress in the areas that readers can’t see. These are the eat-your-spinach process and structure questions we often perceive as getting in the way of our daily jobs: publishing systems, work- Introduction flow, organizational structures, recruitment efforts and strategy. As one digital leader at The Times noted, the newspaper sets the gold standard not just because we employ world-class journalists but because we also empower them with a world-class support sys- tem. But we have not yet modernized that support system for our digital journalism. “Aspirations have outpaced our technology, templates and workflow,” said another digital leader. We must move quickly. Our competitors, which not long ago were mostly newspapers that lagged far behind us in digital, are growing in number, sophis- tication and gaining ground. The challenge for us is that the new battleground is not where we are strongest — the journalism it- self — but in this second arena that is largely out of sight. Because our digital competitors adapt faster to changing technology and trends, their lesser jour- nalism often gets more traction than our superior journalism. They are ahead of us in building im- pressive support systems for digital journalists, and that gap will grow unless we quickly improve our The Past...
  • 59. 58 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | capabilities. Meanwhile, our journalism advantage is shrinking as more of these upstarts expand their newsrooms. The previous chapter, which explored the urgent need to grow our audience, discussed the impor- tance of experimenting, failing, replicability and in- vesting time in the rote work of structured data and reader data. This chapter focuses more squarely on process and structure questions and lays out three steps — immediate, short-term and long-term — we can pursue to position ourselves to succeed in this changing landscape. To become more of a digital-first newsroom, we have to look hard at our traditions and push our- selves in ways that make us uncomfortable. Too of- ten we’ve made changes and then breathed sighs of relief, as if the challenge had been solved. But the pace of change is so fast that the solutions can quick- ly seem out of date, and the next challenge is just around the corner. For example, Times Topics, once our smartest bet to win search, seems archaic now, and social has emerged as the next critical front for promoting our work. This era demands that even be- fore we finish something, we need to start planning for version 2.0 and 3.0. The good news is that our journalism remains rock solid and our financial position is stable. In- side The Times there is widespread enthusiasm — both from the digitally inclined and more traditional journalists — to do what it takes to make this tran- sition. And on the business side, new talent and a shared mission of serving readers has created the opportunity and enthusiasm to work together and find solutions. “This will be a historic year for the media indus- try. Technology is disrupting every distribution platform. Consumers are redefining decades-old consumption habits,” wrote Justin Smith, C.E.O. of Bloomberg News, in a recent all-staff memo that echoed similar missives from leaders of media com- panies over the last several months. “Seizing this opportunity will require long-term investment and a large appetite for transformation, risk, as well as a tolerance for intermittent failure.” ...The Present
  • 60. 59 Our Proposals, In Brief This shift would provide the newsroom, virtually overnight, with many of the necessary skills and insights to take our digital report to the next level. There are a number of departments and units, most of which are considered part of the business side, that are explicitly focused on the reader experience, including Design, Technology, Consumer Insight Group, R&D and Product. These functions represent a clear opportunity COLLABORATE WITH BUSINESS-SIDE UNITS FOCUSED ON READER EXPERIENCE for better integration. Recent initiatives, including NYT Now, have shown the benefits of collaboration across these departments. We are not proposing a wholesale reorganization. But we do believe simply issuing a new policy ­— collaborating with our col- leagues focused on reader experience is encouraged and expected ­— would send a powerful signal and unlock a huge store of creative energy and insights. Many newsroom leaders are so consumed with the demands of the daily report that they have little time to step back and think about long-term questions. When we were simply a newspaper, this singular fo- cus made sense. But we must now juggle print, the web, apps, newsletters, news alerts, social media, video, an international edition and a range of stand- alone products. Our suggestion is to create a small strategy team with the central role of advising the masthead. The CREATE A NEWSROOM STRATEGY TEAM team would keep newsroom leaders apprised of competitors’ strategies, changing technology and shifting reader behavior. It would help track proj- ects around the company that affect our digital re- port, help the masthead set and evaluate priorities and conduct occasional deep dives to answer spe- cific questions. And it would facilitate desk-level ex- periments and communicate the results back to the newsroom to ensure we’re exploring new areas and learning from our efforts. Stories are typically filed late in the day. Our mobile apps are organized by print sections. Desks metic- ulously lay out their sections but spend little time thinking about social strategies. Traditional report- ing skills are the top priority in hiring and promo- tion. The habits and traditions built over a century and a half of putting out the paper are a powerful, conservative force as we transition to digital ­­­— none more so than the gravitational pull of Page One. Some of our traditional competitors have aggres- MAP A STRATEGY TO MAKE THE NEWSROOM A TRULY DIGITAL-FIRST ORGANIZATION sively reorganized around a digital-first rather than a print-first schedule. The health and profitability of our print paper means we don’t yet need to fol- low them down this path. But it is essential to begin the work of questioning our print-centric traditions, conducting a comprehensive assessment of our digi- tal needs, and imagining the newsroom of the future. This means reassessing everything from our roster of talent to our organizational structure to what we do and how we do it. (This page also appeared in the executive summary.)
  • 61. 60 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Reader Experience The wall dividing the newsroom and business side has served The Times well for decades, allowing one side to focus on readers and the other to focus on advertisers. But the growth in our subscription rev- enue and the steady decline in advertising — as well as the changing nature of our digital operation — now require us to work together. For the first time, both the newsroom and busi- ness side are focused primarily on readers. Exciting new collaborations are already underway. But our historical divide has not fully adjusted to reflect this shift. We still have a large and vital advertising arm that should remain walled off. But the many busi- ness-side departments and roles that are focused on readers — which we refer to as “Reader Experience” throughout this report — need to work more closely with the newsroom, instead of being kept at arm’s length, so that we can benefit from their expertise. These departments and roles, which include large segments of Design, Technology, Consumer Insight Group, R&D and Product, are now critical to the newsroom’s efforts, possessing the skills and in- sights we need to grow our audience and take our digital report to the next level. Working closely with Reader Experience is vital to making sure the experience of finding and engaging WHY “READER EXPERIENCE”? The departments that need to interact with both the news and business sides are sometimes called “operational departments,” “neutral departments” or “green-light departments.” But we believe “Reader Experience” better describes the work of these departments. It also underscores why we need to work with them to fulfill the newsroom’s mission of serving its readers. READERS ARE DRIVING OUR GROWTH NYT revenue by source. Advertising Subscriptions Other 2009 43% 51% 6% 2010 6% 44% 50% 2011 6% 45% 49% 2012 6% 50% 45% 2013 5% 52% 43% 1 Reader Experience
  • 62. 61 with our journalism is as impressive as the journal- ism itself. And greater cooperation will advance our goals of ensuring that our journalism is adjusting to technological and behavioral shifts, reaching a growing audience and landing with maximum im- pact. We want to emphasize that we are not advocating a huge new bureaucracy, disruptive reorganization, or a newsroom takeover of these departments. We are simply recommending a policy shift that explic- itly declares that Reader Experience roles should be treated as an extension of our digital newsroom — allowing for more communication, close collabora- tion and cross-departmental career paths. Such a move would build on the significant im- provement in relations between news and business under the leadership of Jill, Mark and Arthur as The New York Times newspaper and company have be- come one and the same. Embracing Reader Expe- rience as an extension of the newsroom is also the next logical step in Jill’s longstanding goal of creat- ing a newsroom with fully integrated print and digi- tal operations, since these departments have skills to build on our digital successes. In the following pages, we will explain the need for a closer relationship between the newsroom and Reader Experience. In the discussion section, we will explore the lack of clear lines in our current process, the hidden costs of our reluctance to work together, and the recent initiatives that have demon- strated the value of collaboration. And in the “how to get there” section, we will offer some suggested guidelines. The very first step, however, should be a deliberate push to abandon our current metaphors of choice — “The Wall” and “Church and State” — which project an enduring need for division. Increased collabora- tion, done right, does not present any threat to our values of journalistic independence. 1. A DIVIDED COMPANY If you were to ask many Times journalists to draw an org chart of the company, it might look something like this: the newsroom and “business-side” functions on opposite sides of a wall. Even some groups that are technically part of the newsroom, like Digital Design, often are thought to be on the business side. The two sides are generally discouraged from working together to protect the newsroom from financial pressures. 2. A SHARED MISSION But in reality, many of these “business side” groups perform vital functions that have nothing to do with advertisers. They focus mainly on improving the reader experience. These groups are building new products and the infrastructure to support our journalism. NYT Now, Cooking, and the NYT5 redesign have shown the benefit of working with these colleagues. NEWSROOM CONSUMER INSIGHT TECHNOLOGY DIGITAL DESIGN R&D PRODUCT MARKETING FINANCE ADVERTISING LEGAL STRATEGY MARKETING FINANCE ADVERTISING LEGAL STRATEGY NEWSROOM CONSUMER INSIGHT TECHNOLOGY DIGITAL DESIGN R&D PRODUCT
  • 63. 62 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Reader Experience Outside the newsroom, there are many departments that are explicitly focused on reader experience. These include Design (crafting the reader experi- ence), Technology (bringing the reader experience to life), Analytics* (understanding the reader ex- perience), R&D (imagining how the reader experi- ence may change) and Product (crafting a strategy for combining many of these elements into a single, reader-centric experience). There are many examples of how these depart- ments have helped the newsroom achieve its goals. For example, the newsroom tried and failed for more than a decade to clear the logistical hurdles involved in creating a searchable recipe database. But a product manager helped make it happen in a mat- ter of months. The newsroom had also strug- gled to find ways to signal to readers when we had updates to stories that didn’t quite merit a new headline or news alert. De- sign, working with developers, came up with several solutions, including the new Watching feature for the home page and the update bullets on NYT Now. These colleagues have specialized skills that most editors simply do not possess and they are trained in the processes of turning ideas into successes. Everyone we interviewed in these groups — at all levels — told us that they could do their jobs better if they were tied in more with the newsroom and our core report. Indeed, the perception that their roles were “on a different side” was a source of confusion and complaint. “‘News and business’ doesn’t even capture it any- more,” said the leader of one of these departments. “These are neutral functions that technically live on the business side, but they are not business func- tions; they are operational functions. Developers, designers, product managers — you could make the argument that not one of those people belong on the business side.” At many of our competitors, these units report to the newsroom or to both sides, just as design and technology do at the Times. Indeed, a central rea- son that digital-first organizations like Huffington Post and BuzzFeed have succeeded with lackluster content is because of their excellent product and technology operations, which are critical parts of their newsrooms. But at The Times, the current structure dictates that our Read- er Experience experts often can only guess at, or simply ignore, the newsroom’s needs. Consider the Consumer In- sight Group and Business Intel- ligence, which handle analytics, conduct surveys and run focus groups. These groups spend each day thinking about and talking to readers. But they have focused almost exclusively on issues like how to in- crease subscriptions, largely because the newsroom has rarely called on them for help. There are count- less ways this unit could be helpful: Are people more likely to read our new newsletter if it were sent at 6 a.m. or 10 a.m.? Is the newsletter building a loyal au- dience of return readers? What percentage of those readers make it to the last item? Design has long been a critical part of our news- room. Even so, we heard repeatedly from designers who said they were treated as outsiders. They said newsroom editors needed to be more engaged when designers are wrestling with major questions about *We use “Analytics” as shorthand for Consumer Insight and Business Intelligence. The perception that roles were “on a different side” was a source of confusion. Discussion
  • 64. 63 Ready, Willing And Able We have an army of colleagues who are commit- ted to helping deliver cutting-edge journalism and growing our audience. A breakdown of the “Reader Experience” departments: ANALYTICS (Consumer Insight Group and Business Intelligence): ~30 people The Analytics groups use data to learn about our readers’ changing habits as well as the effectiveness of our advertising and marketing. They also gather direct feedback from our readers about what they want from our apps and websites. This group trans- lates those needs for Product and Design. DIGITAL DESIGN: ~30 people Digital design invents, plans and executes new features for our platforms and articles. They work collaboratively with the newsroom, Product, and Marketing to ensure that every aspect of the reader experience meets our standards for excellence. TECHNOLOGY: ~445 people This department includes roughly two dozen teams of engineers who write the code that powers our publishing systems, mobile apps, websites and e- commerce infrastructure. They also build and main- tain the digital pipes that keep those applications running smoothly. PRODUCT (Core, New, Video, Ventures): ~120 people Product managers serve as the link between the newsroom and the business side, balancing various requirements and interests to ensure the best reader experience in new products like apps or web fea- tures. They have come up with ideas like NYT Now and work closely with Design, News, Technology, Marketing, Advertising and Customer Insight. RESEARCH & DEVELOPMENT: ~8 people The R&D group is a hybrid technology and design group with a long-term focus. They develop tools that aim to revolutionize the way we gather and present news, like using drones to shoot video or de- livering morning headlines on a bathroom mirror.
  • 65. 64 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Reader Experience our digital future, like experimenting with person- alization, rethinking how we organize our content, and even changing the architecture of stories to meet new needs. “We can sit around and come up with ideas all day long up here, but they have no legs without editors,” said Ian Adelman, our digital design director. Collaboration is even more difficult for functions that are part of the business side. Several people in R&D expressed frustration over not being informed of newsroom priorities, leaving them focused mostly on business-side projects for advertising. At times, they have tried to guess what may be helpful to the newsroom, but as a result often end up producing work of limited utility. “I’d like to be able to use real information and not make bad assumptions,” said Matt Boggie, the director of R&D. Part of the problem is that editors often don’t un- derstand what colleagues who work in these Reader Experience roles can do to help improve our report. More fundamentally, though, there is widespread concern that it is inappropriate to speak with col- leagues on the business side’s payroll. “The bottom line is that people don’t know the lines,” explained one masthead editor. We heard from editors who said the fear of im- propriety meant that they actively avoided commu- nicating with business colleagues altogether. Others said they simply waited for approval — even when it slowed down projects — because delays are con- sidered a lesser evil than the appearance of crossing lines without permission. “People say to me, ‘You can’t let anyone know I’m talking to you about this; it has to be under the radar,’” said a leader in one Reader Experience de- partment. “Everyone is a little paranoid about being seen as too close to the business side.” This distance means that employees on each side are sometimes unaware that they are duplicating work or taking opposite approaches to the same problem. The lack of communication can be intentional: We heard from people in these Reader Experience units who felt they had to make sure an idea was complet- ed and bulletproofed before it could be presented to the newsroom. And vice versa. This runs directly counter to best practices, which call for collaborat- ing as early as possible to solve problems. “Both sides actively don’t communicate stuff from their side,” said one Reader Experience leader. “I’ve been in meetings when people have been very clear about, ‘We don’t want to bring them in yet.’ That’s how it is — there’s the opposite of transparency. There’s not trust.” A significant amount of distrust and skepticism stems from speaking slightly different languages. People are referring to the same thing when one side says “content” or “brand” and the other side says “journalism” or “The New York Times.” But these word choices foster perceptions that the busi- ness side is crassly commercial and uninterested in BUZZFEED’S SECRET WEAPON Jonah Peretti, the site’s founder, explained how years of close collaboration and investment in the dry stuff — tools, workflow and process — have helped drive the site’s dizzying growth: “Our tech team, product team, and data science team have built a very powerful publishing platform that allows us to serve our readers better. We have spent years building publishing formats (lists, quizzes, video, longform, short-form, breaking news, photo essays, explainers), stats and analytics, optimization and testing frameworks, integrations with social platforms, native-mobile apps, and a user-friendly, visually pleasing design. This is a massive investment that is very difficult to replicate, it is part of the reason that the best editorial talent wants to join BuzzFeed, and it creates a virtuous cycle where a growing number of talented people use increasingly powerful tools to do their job.”
  • 66. 65 the very thing that makes The New York Times so special — or that the newsroom is precious about its work and sanctimonious about its values. The fear that a single stray word can derail a conversation is keenly felt, particularly on the business side. More, better and faster communication is need- ed. If the masthead were to clearly delineate which groups and employees can communicate and col- laborate without first seeking permission, colleagues who reached across the news-business divide could feel more as if they are crossing a state line than nav- igating a national border. The last year in particular has shown the value of collaboration and how quickly productive relation- ships can be formed when people are working side by side. The newsroom requested a member of the Con- sumer Insight Group, James Robinson, to work with Aron Pilhofer on using metrics to help our report. The masthead recently decided to expand the effort. Similarly, Danielle Rhoades Ha from Public Rela- tions, who is helping promote our journalism, and Kelly Alfieri from Product, who is helping coordinate the many moving parts involved in our coverage of the Oscars, Olympics and other tent-pole events, are now based in the newsroom. And the movement is in both directions — Brian Hamman, previously a key member of Interactive News, is now working on the 9th floor. A DEEP BENCH Our colleagues in various Reader Experience departments have a vast range of skills to help us grow our audience and improve our journalism. Torben has led more than 1,000 interviews with our readers to glean insights about their news habits. He is an expert at translating the needs of our audience to our designers, editors and product managers. Torben Brooks Director of User Experience Research Libby specializes in user experience — the art of understanding reader needs and designing solutions. She has has used these skills to redesign NYTimes.com and invent the forthcoming “Watching” home page feature. Libby Gery User Experience Strategist Reed is the lead developer of NYT5 and a newcomer to The Times. His team built a flexible workflow system that has sharply improved the speed with which we create, test and deploy new features on the web. Reed Emmons Director of Web Development Chris is the lead developer for our Cooking app and previously was our lead iPad developer. He is also a former reporter. How many mobile developers can boast an A1 byline in The Boston Globe? Chris Ladd Senior Software Engineer Dan was a producer and host of WNYC’s “Morning Edition” before joining The Times to build our “NYT Everywhere” strategy. Dan has formed crucial partnerships with Flipboard, Google and others to help expand our reach. Dan Blumberg Product Manager Evan is perhaps the most passionate advocate of structured data at The Times. His team ensures that the journalism we produce is tagged and archived for future use. Evan’s work to build TimesMachine has brought life back to millions of old articles. Evan Sandhaus Director of Search, Archives & Semantics
  • 67. 66 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Reader Experience The newsroom mobile team worked closely with their business counterparts to create a proposal for overhauling the company’s mobile strategy. That collaboration gave much more power to recommen- dations like, “We should take this opportunity to challenge ourselves about our audience strategy, namely that our current approach is focused pri- marily on monetizing an existing reader base.” The most promising example has been the col- laborative efforts, led by New Products under David Perpich, that are developing innovative experiments in mobile-first journalism (NYT Now) and digital service journalism (Cooking). Cliff Levy has paired with Ben French on NYT Now and Sam Sifton has joined forces with Alex MacCallum on Cooking, and each group is support- ed by a multidisciplinary team that includes Design and Technology. Working side by side has increased trust and created a sense of shared mission, cap- tured in their mantra, “Product first, department second.” In the process they have created tools, like drag-and-drop and location recognition, that will el- evate our whole report. “It’s the old world where the publisher and the editor work together,” said Sifton. “They each play their position and support one another. It’s not lions lying down with lambs. It’s a mutually beneficial, symbiotic relationship.” This stands in sharp contrast to the old models we sometimes default to, in which one side leads a proj- ect and then simply hands it to the other — the busi- ness side saying, “go make this,” or the newsroom saying, “go sell this.” The original effort for what was then called Need To Know offers a case study in this unbalanced ap- proach. Initially, the project did not have an edi- tor to help shape the vision, which led to a weaker product at the outset that did not meet our editorial standards. (The late addition of Cliff Levy helped to create a product that is poised to be a journalistic success, regardless of whether it meets the business goals.) On the other side, the projects being led by David Leonhardt and Carl Hulse were both newsroom-led initiatives, conceived of and started without input from Reader Experience colleagues. Months into the development of these efforts, Leonhardt and Hulse both worried they were neglecting questions surrounding competitive analysis, audience devel- opment, platform-specific strategies, promotion, and user testing. But they felt ill-equipped to answer them. “I had no idea who to reach out to and it never would have occurred to me to do it,” Leonhardt said. “It would have felt vaguely inappropriate.” (The ad- dition of Kelly Alfieri, a product manager, to the project has helped.) There is another compelling reason for the news- room to engage more with Reader Experience: re- cruiting and retaining talent. We heard many ex- amples of employees who had turned down more money elsewhere to work at The Times — develop- ers, designers and product managers are in particu- larly high demand in this digital world — because of a belief in the value of our journalism. However, we risk losing those employees when we wall them off from our journalism. The divide has been jarring for product managers coming from oth- er organizations where they were considered part of the newsroom. One new product manager who relo- cated to the newsroom said she was shocked when a newsroom colleague told her that her presence was unwelcome because she belonged on “the business side.” This sense of division has prompted the departure of some of our best developers, exacerbating a tal- SIMILAR GOALS Paul Smurl, The Times’s general manager of core digital products, recently sent an email to his team defining their mission. It bears some resemblance to the newsroom’s: “Core Products continuously invents and evolves our core web and app experiences to: 1. Fullfill our journalistic mission, 2. Increase reach among like-minded readers, 3. Build deeper loyal relationships with readers, 4. Grow revenue through paid content, advertising and other services.”
  • 68. 67 In Their Own Words: Reader Experience How important is working with the newsroom to your group and its ability to contribute fully to The Times success? “We’re ultimately providing all these vessels to get our world-class journalism in the hands of our readers, and the newsroom is crucial for that.” “There’s only so much we can do at arm’s length from the newsroom by working through product and technology as proxies.” “If we didn’t serve the newsroom, we wouldn’t be serving one of the most important parts of the company. It wouldn’t be doing our job. The fact that we can help the newsroom is a really great reason for people to come work for us.” How effective is the current collaboration between your group and the newsroom? “There’s a long way to go.” “Right now there is room for a more holistic view of what the newsroom thinks is important for our product direction — there isn’t someone I could talk to about that now who has sway.” “Our single biggest challenge is we don’t know what our goals are at any given time. If we don’t know what we’re trying to get our users to do, it becomes hard to prioritize effort and evaluate in- ternally.” “I don’t yet know, if I had an idea, who I would go to in the newsroom with it.” “On NYT Now and Cooking, the editors and prod- uct managers have worked really well together. It’s really been the ideal partnership.” Ian Adelman (left) Digital Design Paul Smurl (right) Core Digital Products Brad Kagawa Content Management Systems Rajiv Pant Technology Management David Perpich New Digital Products Matthew Boggie Research & Development Sonia Yamada Consumer Insight Group Brian Murphy Web and Mobile Engineering How can we improve collaboration? “Nathan and Jonathan are the perfect partners: they know what is wrong and what needs to hap- pen. They are the perfect partners in terms of what you’d want as a thought partner, but it breaks down beyond that.” “Ideally we need people in the newsroom who are obsessed with social and mobile and digital.” “The newsroom is really easy to work with right now, but I don’t think they’re particularly ambi- tious. There’s not a lot of oomph in terms of artic- ulating where our products should be going. You get into fiefdoms where there’s a little bit of think- ing about it but no bold aspirations.” “My biggest concern within the newsroom is I feel a lot of people like Jonathan and Nathan and Andrew understand how digital works, but you go above that and it becomes really murky in terms of understanding.” “There’s no corollary within the newsroom to the digital general managers on the business side.” We asked eight leaders of Reader Experience teams about their relationships with the newsroom and how they’d like to see them improve. Some clear themes emerged — everyone said that collaboration was criti- cally important but said we were currently falling short. And when asked their main points of contact in the newsroom, we heard the same four names: Ian Fisher, Aron Pilhofer, Nathan Ashby-Kuhlman and Jonathan Ellis (who just left). Here are some of their thoughts about the current state of the relationship: We interviewed:
  • 69. 68 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Reader Experience ent deficit in Technology that slows down projects. The vast majority of developers on the eighth floor we spoke with believed they were not allowed to set foot in the newsroom, creating a sense of distance and even alienation from a product they are instru- mental in creating. Virtually all meetings among our digital teams occur in the tower of the building. One developer who started a “developer/news- room relations committee,” asked to be added to the AHOT distribution list so developers could occa- sionally attend brown-bag lunches. The request was declined with an explanation of the “church-state divide.” Not long afterward, he left the company. It is in the newsroom’s interest to help attract the best talent for such roles. “Where we can compete is getting people closer to the mission,” said one high- ranking developer. Our Reader Experience colleagues are thinking strategically about the very questions at the heart of the newsroom’s digital future. Again and again, we found that the most forward-thinking approaches to some of our pressing problems were coming from Design and Product. Tapping into their expertise will only become more critical in coming years, as we wrestle with big questions about transitioning from a print-first to a digital-first organization. But we cannot simply hand off these problems to Reader Experience. Our role in this partnership is critical to ensuring our efforts reflect our creativ- ity, meet our standards, minimize our conflicts and serve the long-term mission of advancing our jour- nalism and growing our audience. A brainstorming session for the new cooking app.
  • 70. 69 Generally we believe the group should include Product, Design, Technology, Analytics, and R&D. However, not every part of these depart- ments falls into this category – for example, E- Commerce in Technology. Create and distribute a clear organizational chart of the Reader Experience departments that in- cludes a contact person and their newsroom counterpart. Masthead, desk heads, platform editors, produc- ers and people in charge of verticals, including columnists, should be encouraged to work with New ventures should be developed with collab- orative multi-disciplinary teams whenever pos- sible. A product manager should be assigned to our most important efforts, like The Upshot. A designer and developer should also be assigned to key projects as early as possible in the planning phase. Teams should sit together to foster com- munication and collaboration. Newsroom leaders should work closely with Reader Experience departments to shape digital priorities. People like David Perpich and Paul Smurl should be invited to newsroom strategy meetings on topics like mobile, social and new products. CLARIFY WHICH READER EXPERIENCE UNITS SHOULD BE INTERACTING WITH THE NEWSROOM Reader Experience without prior permission. For example, someone starting a new product should consult Product to learn the best practices for a successful launch or talk to Consumer Insight to better understand the target audience. Masthead editors, desk heads, and platform edi- tors should have blanket authorization to speak to anyone on the business side. Our most senior leaders should be encouraged to learn as much as possible about our strategy for the rapidly chang- ing digital landscape, to ensure that we help shape it from the beginning. ENSURE THE NEWSROOM IS WORKING COLLABORATIVELY WITH READER EXPERIENCE Prospective leaders should be encouraged to work on interdisciplinary projects as part of the groom- ing process. Leaders like Levy, Sifton, Fisher and Ingrassia have said that such exposure has signif- icantly improved their understanding of opportu- nities and challenges. The newsroom should assign a point person for each major product area. Because current re- sponsibilities are not always clear, we often react to discussions rather than help shape them. These point people should engage with the Product leads and inform the masthead of priorities and ongoing work in their areas. This is similar to the role that Jonathan Ellis played with Alex Hardi- man on mobile, or that Nathan Ashby-Kuhlman plays with Brad Kagawa on Scoop. How to Get There
  • 71. 70 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Reader Experience Reader Experience employees should be added to both newsroom and business-side communica- tions and considered welcome at all events. The newsroom should regularly send emails to all our Reader Experience colleagues about recent accomplishments and ongoing priorities, and vice versa. COMMUNICATE THE NEW MESSAGE FOR COLLABORATION BROADLY The executive editor, C.E.O. and publisher should communicate reader-focused goals and priorities broadly to foster a sense of shared mission among the newsroom and Reader Experience groups. Start pilot programs to embed more Reader Ex- perience staff in the newsroom — for example, embed a developer on a particularly innovative desk, place a member of the R&D team on the News Desk, or have a Product manager work with a columnist for two months. Digital employees in the newsroom should be al- lowed to take positions in these departments and vice versa. For example, Brian Hamman recently made the jump from the newsroom to the new product team, and has been an invaluable asset, in part because of the breadth of his experience and his ability to translate the needs of each side. Others have turned down such jobs out of fear that they won’t be able to return to the newsroom. HIRE COLLABORATIVELY AND ENCOURAGE EMPLOYEES TO MOVE FREELY BETWEEN THE NEWSROOM AND READER EXPERIENCE The newsroom should be engaged in the hiring process for key Reader Experience positions, such as product leads who directly touch our re- port. Similarly, Reader Experience should lend its expertise when the newsroom is hiring for key digital positions like platforms editors. To help recruit digital talent, hiring managers should emphasize that shaping the presentation of our content is a vital and valued journalistic contribution. Orientation for new employees in the newsroom and Reader Experience should be integrated, ex- posing everyone to the full range of our reader- focused efforts and the values of our journalism.
  • 72. 71 Not so long ago, the masthead could focus almost entirely on the newspaper. Today, running The New York Times newsroom means not just creating a daily print report, but also running a huge web operation, overseeing a grow- ing array of mobile apps, newsletters, news alerts and social media, as well as guiding an international edition, a video operation and a range of new stand- alone products. As Jill said recently: “If you even stop to catch your breath, you’re falling behind.” The masthead, in particular, is being asked to fill two roles: to oversee the day-to-day needs of the news report and newsroom operations and, simulta- neously, to assess the future and chart a new course. In recent months, the masthead has made the time to focus on the long-term needs of the news- room — holding an off-site retreat to address press- ing big-picture needs, reassessing the mission of the magazine, crafting a plan for improving our mobile report and creating initiatives such as this group, fo- cused on innovation. But strategy is such a pressing need at this junc- ture that it should become a permanent newsroom function, with dedicated staff. Our recommendation is to create a newsroom strategy team that serves as an adviser to the mast- head. We envision a small newsroom team that would seek to support the masthead in its goals, serving to better arm The Times’s leaders with in- sights and analysis that will make their growing jobs easier. The core function would be ensuring the mast- head is apprised of competitors’ strategies, changing technology and shifting reader behavior. The team would track projects around the company that affect our digital report, ensuring the newsroom is at the table when we need to be. This team would include people with strong back- grounds in journalism, technology, user experience, product and analytics. That expertise would help the masthead evaluate and set priorities in critical but less familiar areas like our content-management system, platform functionality and audience devel- opment. The team would serve as a catalyst for launching desk-level experiments in these areas and be charged with communicating those results to the newsroom. It would also provide valuable training ground for future leaders by offering a deeper look at the chal- lenges and opportunities facing The Times. This team would be distinct from the business- side strategy team. But like that team, it would not have an operational role. It would be a neutral inter- nal adviser dedicated to improving everyone’s game. 2 Newsroom Strategy Team
  • 73. 72 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Newsroom Strategy Team The demands of a daily newspaper create a power- ful gravitational pull on editors’ attention, drawing their focus to the short-term — tomorrow’s front page, the tick-tock for Sunday’s paper, a project launching next month. Across the board, newsroom leaders told us that they are so consumed with the demands of the daily report that they have trouble finding the time to step back. In addition to the daily news demands, there are the daily crises and a packed schedule of stand- ing meetings. Perhaps the most telling example is Ian Fisher, the masthead editor in charge of both web and mobile reports. An average workday for Ian involves writ- ing headlines, scanning the wires, tracking breaking news and making sure that stories are appearing correctly on mobile. That leaves him with less band- width for bigger strategic questions about our digital operations. There are others who are explicitly charged with thinking about the big picture, of course: Tom on design, Aron on digital, Larry on new initiatives, and Janet on newsroom management. But these are some of the busiest people in the newsroom. Per- haps the only ones with more on their plates are Jill and Dean. All this helps explain why Rich Meislin, who took the buyout several years ago, remains such a critical resource, providing information, insight and coun- sel about digital issues to a range of people in the newsroom and on the business side. In addition to having a deep well of institutional knowledge, he also has time. “They go to Rich because he’s avail- able and because he’s not dealing with the daily re- port,” said a masthead editor. Similarly, desk heads told us they have little time to step back. “I don’t even have time to think about these things,” one said. Another suggested that the relentless work of assembling the world’s best news report can also be “a form of laziness, because it is work that is comfortable and familiar to us, that we know how to do. And it allows us to avoid the truly hard work and bigger questions about our present and our future: What shall we become? How must we change?” This focus on the daily report also extends into our digital ranks. The mobile team, which should be one of our most forward-looking groups, spends so much time making fixes to ensure all our journal- ism appears in our apps that they say they have little left to think about how the mobile report should be distinctive or how to harness new technologies. That helps explain why it took a group removed from the daily flow of the newsroom — NYT Now — to funda- mentally rethink our mobile presentation. The people who have spent the most time thinking about the challenges of our digital future — thorny topics like personalization, and glaring needs like better data collection — can be found upstairs, most often in Product, Design and Strategy. They are also spending countless hours studying and interviewing our competitors and our readers, and capturing and sharing their insights in detailed reports. But their initiative means the newsroom is often reacting to, rather than driving, the work on big questions that are critical to our future. “We’ve abdicated completely the role of strategy,” said one masthead editor. “We just don’t do strat- egy. The newsroom is really being dragged behind the galloping horse of the business side.” The business side doesn’t want this imbalance. They want to work alongside the newsroom to im- prove the core of what we do. And they know that if the newsroom were to become a glorified ser- vice desk — simply providing the content that fills the packages that other groups are creating — that would not be good for the institution. “I want a partner who has vision,” said the head of one Reader Experience department. “We wind up focused a lot on how to get things out the door and make them successful but not spending enough time on the one- to three-year horizon.” Discussion
  • 74. 73 We believe a strategy group can help reset the bal- ance in the following ways: TRACKING THE MEDIA LANDSCAPE This work is critical but time-consuming. Over the last six months, we have spent countless hours read- ing about the latest industry shifts in digital media. Understanding some developments often required technical knowledge, and at times, we have relied on experts to explain the implications. Staying on top of these trends, particularly in to- day’s faster-moving media world, requires finding sources, often in leadership roles at other compa- nies, and cultivating ongoing conversations. Alexis Madrigal, the tech writer and digital strategist at The Atlantic, told us how the company was succeeding on mobile through a focus on Facebook and direct emails. Kevin Delaney, the head of Quartz, provided his insights on how to integrate and use developers in the newsroom, and Laura Evans, the former head of analytics at The Washington Post and The Wall Street Journal, helped us understand how those publications are changing — which shifts we should mirror and which we should ignore. These relation- ships also helped us identify promising digital tal- ent. “I talk to [Nick] Denton all the time. We both talk to Jacob [Weisberg]. We’re constantly tell- ing each other what’s working, what we’ve experi- mented with,” said Adam Moss, the editor of New York magazine, referring to the heads of Gawker and Slate. “About half the choices I make come about be- cause someone from another site tells me something worked, and so we adopt it.” It’s important to capture these conversations as well, so insights can be widely shared. The business- side strategy group shared with us an 80-page tran- NEWS FEED A strategy team could keep the masthead appprised of important industry developments.
  • 75. 74 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Newsroom Strategy Team STEALING A PAGE The business side strategy group regularly produces research reports such as these to inform decisions. A newsroom strategy team could play a similar role. script of interviews about social strategy that they conducted with the leaders at various competitors. They provided us with detailed assessments of the mobile functions offered by our competitors, which quickly clarified where we need to catch up. A newsroom strategy group should capture, dis- till and explain the most important developments and insights to emerge from articles and interviews, perhaps in weekly emails to the masthead. Such in- formation could also be shared with desk heads and deputies to ensure that we’re arming the next gen- eration of leaders with the knowledge they need. The strategy group could also be responsible for tracking and sharing the most important work being done inside the building. Several masthead editors told us there are so many initiatives that it can be hard to know when we need to claim our seat at the table. In recent months, the masthead has been left out of several important studies that will affect the newsroom, including a marketing-led exploration of our audience-develop- ment efforts and a detailed assessment of our data capabilities and needs. In both cases, our senior leaders were unaware that these conversations were happening, despite the newsroom’s growing interest in both subjects. In other cases, we knew about meetings but failed to send a senior newsroom leader to represent our interests. In one instance, several of our business- side colleagues had to speak up on our behalf to keep the Leonhardt project from being pushed down the priority list. A newsroom strategy group could ask for regular updates on the projects and priorities from various business units. And it could help our masthead lead- ers determine when we need to get involved.
  • 76. 75 The Right Way To Fail Failure is not something we’re comfortable with in the newsroom. And for good reason: getting our journalism right is the foundation of our success. But that mindset can limit our appetite for and tol- erance of risk. Our aversion to failure can also lead to wasted resources and prevent us from learning valuable lessons. For example, our mobile app, “The Scoop,” and our international home page have failed to gain traction with readers, yet we still devote resources to them. We ended the Booming blog but kept its newsletter going. These ghost operations distract time, energy and resources that could be used for new projects. At the same time, we haven’t tried to wring insights from these efforts. “There were no metrics, no targets, no goals to hit and no period of re-evaluation after the launch,” said a digital plat- forms editor, about our international home page. When we do shut down projects, the decisions are made quietly and rarely discussed, to protect the reputations of the people who ran them. As a result, lessons are forgotten and the staffers involved be- come more risk-averse. By contrast, the business side conducts reviews of big projects to assess what worked and what didn’t and then builds those insights into future efforts. Failures should be recast as important learning opportunities — that’s the approach at most tech firms. We should publicly acknowledge when new projects are discontinued and have an open conver- sation about what we learned from that investment of time and resources. And we should take heart. Perhaps the best ex- ample of learning from a failure in the industry can be found inside our own building. Times Select was a stunning failure, and was mocked and derided in all corners of the Internet. In 2007, Gawker called it “the world’s stupidest pay-for-content barrier to a good user experience.” But the knowledge gleaned from that effort helped us score the single biggest journalistic win in a decade: the metered subscription model. Our early “failure” was critical to our later success, providing many of the critical lessons about how to structure and roll out our digital subscriptions. ‘WEEDING THE GARDEN’ One of the sharpest insights we heard about fail- ure came from Bob Pittman, the C.E.O. of Clear Channel. He described the importance of continu- ally “weeding the garden” in organizations, to en- sure that marginal ideas are not kept alive simply because of inertia: “If I try 10 new things and let’s say two are clear winners and two are clear losers. That means I’ve got six in between. What do I do with those? Most organizations let everything live except the clear losers. And what happens over time is that stuff in between doesn’t really help you. It takes up a lot of resources. It’s confusing. It’s muddy. “And if you let that stuff build up, then pretty soon my whole organization is basically mediocrity and gunk. So if you can bring yourself to say, ‘I’m only going to let clear winners live. I’m going to take the resources I put for the other eight things and try again,’ you can keep a crisp organization. And so we always talk about weeding the garden. Part of it is being honest with yourself. What really is a winner? “It sort of goes back to the idea of don’t be afraid of mistakes. You’ll make a lot of them. I think a lot of people only want to keep it at two mistakes out of 10, instead of eight out of 10, because they want to keep their batting average better. But nobody’s counting how many mistakes you make.”
  • 77. 76 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Newsroom Strategy Team ASSESSING NEEDS AND SETTING PRIORITIES Our top editors have razor-sharp instincts for making tough choices about priorities in news cov- erage. When big news breaks, we know how many reporters to put on the story, and we can quickly work up five-day coverage plans. But the newsroom leadership doesn’t always have the expertise needed to identify, prioritize and set plans for meeting our top digital needs. Sometimes this means we are less ambitious in our efforts, sometimes this means we have less of a sense of how to use our limited resources, and this almost always means we are too reliant on front-line colleagues with deep expertise. The newsroom strategy team, with a range of backgrounds in the group, could help. Having tra- ditional journalists working alongside people versed in user experience, technology and product manage- ment would allow for holistic and nuanced examina- tions of problems and solutions needed to push our digital efforts to the next level. For example, our content-management system may be our single most important platform, since it structures our work in print, on the web and on mo- bile. But desks and producers spend countless hours on one-time fixes to the platform, rather than per- manent solutions, even when it is clear the problems will emerge again and again. One senior member of the news desk said that leaders would be “horrified” if they understood the situation, but he felt he lacked the ability to translate the problems for colleagues without a deep background in content-management systems. We heard essentially the same complaint from those in mobile, Social, Design and Interactive News. The strategy group could help in these cases by as- sessing the problems, explaining the need and then offering a range of solutions to the masthead. A strategy group could also help provide a clear point of contact for leaders looking to innovate, sup- plying them with the assistance, contacts and best practices to ensure they are launching new efforts in a way that makes them more likely to succeed. “I don’t even know who to ask,” said another depart- ment head. Several desk heads and masthead editors men- tioned that “mobile” and “social” and “video” were all considered priorities at various points. But with- out tactical recommendations for acting on them, everyone re-focused on the print report, where their strengths lie and where the rewards are easily iden- tified. “We’ll do it,” said one department head, about implementing the digital priorities. “But we have to be led.” The strategy group could help the masthead both create and communicate a clear newsroom digital priority list. And it could help define what ques- tions should be answered before new initiatives are launched. What are we trying to achieve? How many people will be required? How will we measure suc- cess? What can we learn from competitors? And how do we get better over time? “We need a vetting process for ideas,” said a mast- head editor. “What are the ground rules for deciding what’s worth doing? What are our goals?” RUNNING EXPERIMENTS AND SHARING RESULTS There has been a longstanding tension between dispersing and centralizing our digital talent. The choices that result affect the ebb and flow of experi- mentation in the newsroom. A CANDID, NEUTRAL VOICE In recent months, we’ve watched the newsroom move inexorably to launch a new product, the Washington morning tipsheet, even though almost every person involved questioned the approach, from those working on it to the top of the masthead. However, few wanted to publicly question the idea. It may turn out to be a success but we believe a more candid discussion would only help accomplish that goal. This is one of several occasions when we found widespread concern about a strategy but a reluctance to air it openly. We believe a strategy group could help give voice to such concerns.
  • 78. 77 Right now, we have consolidated digital innova- tion in desks like Graphics, Interactive News, Social and Design. This approach has its advantages, en- suring excellent quality control and the highest-cal- iber work. But one disadvantage is that news desks, particularly web producers, lack the opportunity to experiment digitally on their own. This approach makes scaling up our digital efforts far more difficult. To succeed in the coming years, news desks need to be building digital skills. Indeed, a major reason producers have seen their access to tools and templates curtailed is because of the con- cerns that the editors on these desks are unable to recognize substandard work. This tension between quality control and expand- ed digital capabilities has been difficult to resolve. While we have skewed towards centralization, our competitors are doing the opposite: aggressively dis- persing digital talent throughout their newsrooms with the understanding that people will make mis- takes as they build new skills. A strategy group could help provide concep- tual help, structure and guidance to experiments launched at the desk level, allowing more producers, editors and reporters to innovate and learn. They would be familiar with the tools and talents in the newsroom, Technology, Product and Analytics that could help bring such ideas into reality. This would allow us to use desks as laboratories to answer pressing questions and to develop best practices. Examples include experimenting with dif- ferent newsletter designs, testing how to best resur- face evergreen content, and trying new approaches to promoting a story. One priority for the strategy group would be replicability – encouraging experi- ments and creating tools and templates that can then be easily shared with the rest of the newsroom. SPEED WINS When we have good ideas, we should treat them with the urgency of a news scoop. Otherwise, we risk letting our competitors get there first. A year and a half ago, Andrew Phelps presented his bosses with a tool he developed: an automated, visual homepage of the day’s report. Editors were enthusiastic, but there was no structure to support the initiative and after several months he gave up. More than a year later, an identical featured appeared on The Washington Post website. Immediately, the NYT business side put out a request for a designer or developer interested in building a visual homepage.
  • 79. 78 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Newsroom Strategy Team During more than 200 interviews, we heard a lot of unvarnished opinions from our colleagues about how the newsroom and business side could work together more effectively. One popular theme: There are times when each side needs to think a bit more like the other. BUSINESS A GREATER FOCUS ON THE LONG-TERM Long-term growth must be a higher priority for the business side. This point came up often, not just from newsroom leaders but from business-side leaders, too. A stubborn perception remains — even though it may not be accurate in some cases — that too many incentives on the business side reward short-term goals. One indicator is the troubling decline in our read- ership. This is even true on mobile, where our focus on turning casual readers into subscribers led us to tinker with the article meter to meet immediate rev- enue goals. Some of this short-term focus is understandable, given the strain on our finances in recent years. But our more solid financial footing allows us to re-em- phasize long-term thinking. It should be noted that Mark has explicitly cham- pioned such a shift. But a focus on immediate rev- enue — “line of sight ROI” — remains a concern. We were repeatedly told by members of strategy, mar- keting, product, technology and other key divisions that business leaders sometimes struggle to value things that can’t be easily quantified and plugged into a financial model, starting with our readers. For example, several people told us that this approach led us to under-invest in social media, which offers ambiguous returns even though it is an increasingly critical method of distributing our journalism and building audience loyalty. “Not every proposal should have to fit neatly into a financial model,” said one member of the strategy team. “We need a mindset shift that allows us to in- vest in things we think are important simply because we think they’re important.” NEWSROOM TIME TO TACKLE HARD PROBLEMS Both business-side and newsroom leaders said that the newsroom could do a better job of tackling the trickiest questions head-on. The rapidly changing landscape demands innovation but too often we put off setting strategy around controversial issues. The newsroom’s role as steward of our institu- tional integrity ensures that it retains veto power over anything that could be journalistically fraught. But that also means we must take a more active role in leading strategy in areas that offer the most prom- ise — and yes, peril — for our digital future. One reason for our caution is that the newsroom tends to view questions through the lens of worst- case scenarios. Even carefully phrased suggestions about metrics or personalization have prompted re- sponses like, “I don’t want to turn our home page into a collection of stories about cats and celebrities.” Four years ago, just floating the idea of using bullet points in mobile article summaries led to someone being accused of “dumbing down our report.” Because we set these questions aside, our busi- ness colleagues or Reader Experience departments have often stepped in to fill the void. And the news- room has historically reacted defensively by water- ing down or blocking changes, prompting a phrase that echoes almost daily around the business side: “The newsroom would never allow that.” An example of the risk of this hands-off approach became apparent in recent months. The business side conducted a wholesale rethinking of our au- dience-development strategies, and the marketing department planned to turn to the newsroom to implement many of the final recommendations. The newsroom was not consulted in advance. Truth Be Told...
  • 80. 79 We believe the team should have, collectively, strong backgrounds in journalism, technology, user experience, product and analytics. The team should have a clear leader. To ensure it is cohesive and nimble, the team should be no larger than six people. Members should be collab- orative problem-solvers, gifted at persuasion and eager to work with experts and novices. The team could include permanent and rotating positions, which would allow for continuity while also bringing in new ideas. BUILD A STRONG TEAM The group offers a unique opportunity to groom future leaders. It also offers an opportunity to tap into different desks and create new evangelists for collaboration. The leader of the strategy group should report to a single person on the masthead who is se- nior enough to provide the necessary carrots and sticks to implement recommendations. But the group should serve the whole masthead. The group’s central mission should be to ensure that newsroom leaders are apprised of changing technology and shifting reader behavior. The group could track digital competitors’ web- sites, apps and strategies and conduct regular in- terviews with other companies to assess thinking and best practices. These could be compiled into weekly reports for the masthead and other senior leaders. The group could provide regular training sessions for newsroom leaders about the changing digital landscape. One example is assembling speak- TRACK AND ADVISE ers from other digital publications. Another is arranging a “reader insights boot camp” to help desk heads understand how readers engage with their sections. The group could serve as another contact point for departments on the business side to ensure that the newsroom is aware of all projects and priorities throughout the company. They could communicate developments to the masthead with recommendations of when and how the newsroom should participate. How to Get There
  • 81. 80 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Newsroom Strategy Team The team could use its expertise and knowledge of the competitive landscape to help the mast- head evaluate and set priorities in areas like audi- ence development and publishing systems. It could help communicate digital and innova- tion goals in the newsroom and on the business side. It could help assess the resources needed to achieve each goal and make sure they have spe- cific metrics for success. The team could track ini- HELP IDENTIFY AND COMMUNICATE PRIORITIES tiatives and keep the masthead informed of wins and where we are underperforming. The team could also be a contact point for report- ers and editors with innovative ideas who need guidance on execution. This could also include explaining why some ideas aren’t being pursued, so that people can let go of pet projects that are going nowhere. The team could arrange “embeds” in the news- room for business-side units focused on reader experience. The team could help facilitate efforts with Audi- ence Development to design and launch desk- level experiments, and then communicate results back to the newsroom. WORK WITH DESKS TO FOSTER INNOVATION
  • 82. 81 We must begin an ongoing assessment of our print traditions and digital needs. In the coming years, The New York Times needs to accelerate its transition from a newspaper that also produces a rich and impressive digital report to a digital publication that also produces a rich and MOST REVENUE STILL COMES FROM PRINT... Advertising accounts for $667M, of which $170M is digital and $497M is print. Circulation accounts for $824M, of which $150M is digital and $674M print. printdigital 18% 25% ...BUT PRINT ACCOUNTS FOR A SMALL PERCENTAGE OF OUR READERS 0 15M10M5M 20M 25M 30M 3 Digital First impressive newspaper. This is not a matter of se- mantics. It is a critical, difficult and, at times, pain- ful transformation that will require us to rethink much of what we do every day. Our leaders know this and we have taken steps in these directions. But it has become increasingly clear that we are not moving with enough urgency. This may be the single most important long-term challenge facing the newsroom and its leaders. There are factors that, understandably, slow this tricky transition. More than three quarters of our advertising and subscription revenue still comes from the newspaper, and most of our employees have spent their careers building skills to succeed in print. But the huge majority of our readers are digi- tal, and this represents our single biggest opportu- nity for growth. As a business, this is an extremely difficult bal- Print readers Desktop readers Facebook fans Twitter followers Email subscribers Mobile readers News alerts subscribers
  • 83. 82 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First ancing act. It is just as tricky for the newsroom. The experience of putting out the newspaper informs almost every element of how we do our jobs, from the people we hire to how they work to what they produce. These assumptions — based on the news- paper’s fixed dimensions and hard deadlines — are so baked into our days that it is easy to overlook their artificial limitations or the new possibilities we could embrace. “The question of what is Timesian has been both the saving grace and artificial limiter of the news- room,” said one masthead editor. The continued profitability of the newspaper has bought us time. But that head start is eroding. Sev- eral billionaires have pledged parts of their fortunes to creating digital newsrooms. Start-ups, backed by venture capital, are redefining digital media. And traditional competitors have moved aggressively to remake themselves as “digital first.” “The newsroom of the future is not the current one dragged into it,” said John Paton, the CEO of the local newspaper chain that renamed itself Digi- tal First Media. “It is going to be re-built from the ground up.” We all wish there were a ready-made playbook for this shift. But the only real solutions will come from critical questioning, experimentation and a devotion to iterative change. The first step is an open-ended recommendation: The newsroom should begin an intensive review of its print traditions and digital needs — and create a road map for the difficult tran- sition ahead. We need to know where we are, where we’re headed and where we want to go. That means aggressively questioning many of our print-based traditions and their demands on our time, and determining which can be abandoned to free up resources for digital work . That also means assessing our digital needs, cre- ating new digital leadership posts and upgrading digital talent across the newsroom, especially with people from other innovative organizations and non-traditional competitors. Even more important than policy or structural changes is that the rank and file of the newsroom take ownership of this transformation. This means sending clear signals about goals, changing reward structures and basing promotions on behavior that moves us toward our digital future. “If you wait around for a generation of reporters to do this naturally,” the editor of one competing news organization said, “You are going to be left behind.” WHAT DOES IT MEAN TO BE ‘DIGITAL FIRST?’ Around the newsroom, this phrase often is used to refer to publishing articles on the web before putting them in print. But outside our walls, digital-first is an all-encompassing strategy. Digital-first means the top priority is producing the best possible digital report, free from the constraints of the newspaper. The last step is repackaging the best of that digital report for the next day’s paper. This transition requires rethinking staffing, struc- ture and work processes from top to bottom. Companies with no legacy platform have the advantage of being able to focus entirely on creating the best digital reports. For newspaper companies, making this transition can be so challenging that sev- eral of our competitors have handed responsibility for the daily paper to small, stand-alone teams so that everyone else can focus on digital.
  • 84. 83 Nathan Ashby-Kuhlman, our senior editor for dig- ital operations, recently sent a provocative email to the leaders of our digital newsroom. Calling the print paper “a powerfully conservative force” in the newsroom, he warned we were not doing enough to prepare for our digital future. The newsroom, he noted, is still governed by the traditions and limitations of print, and he made a table-pounding case that we should create content for a digital report and then use the best work from that effort to put out a print edition. “We don’t need to get there by the end of 2014,” he wrote. “But because this will be one of the most difficult transitions The New York Times’s news- room has ever made, it is urgent to start mapping out a strategy.” Years of private complaints around the building suddenly had a very public forum. Others quickly weighed in. A top member of our technology team complained that our changes so far have been “incremental and reactive,” and he called for a “holistic look at the way we work — job descriptions, tasks, workflows and organization — to make us the flexible, adapt- able organization we will need to be in order to sur- vive.” A top platform editor warned that print revenue was more likely to fall off a cliff than continue its steady decline. “We have already made great strides in becoming one integrated, print-and-digital news- room,” he wrote. “But we actually haven’t gotten far enough. It’s not enough to be an ‘integrated’ news- room. We have to become a digital newsroom, a small subset of which produces a print product.” And the new executive director for core digital products called for spending “at least an hour every week for, I suppose, ever,” discussing this transi- tion. “We start by painting a picture of where we want to be 1, 5, 10, 20 years from now — a best guess is fine and we can adjust as we go — and then map out the steps towards realizing that vision.” It’s not as if the newsroom has been standing still. Digital is now part of the newsroom ecosystem. In some departments, like Graphics, Digital Design and Interactive News, we have industry-leading op- erations, and the department heads have been el- evated to the masthead. And just this month, the af- ternoon Page One meetings were recast to be more of “a look ahead to coverage for digital delivery.” But to those charged with worrying abut the newsroom’s future, it’s clear we’re just a fraction of the way there. And compared to many of our com- petitors, we’re falling behind. ‘DIGITAL FIRST’ AS A MANTRA FOR CHANGE It may sound like a buzz-phrase, but “digital first” — as a strategy, a process and a mindset — is taking hold across the industry. New companies are using it to lure our best journalists, promising them the technology and talent to succeed without old con- straints. “It’s so rare to get an opportunity not only to build something from the ground up, but to build it with- out the pressure of producing content on a daily ba- sis,” said Eric Bates, who left his role as executive editor of Rolling Stone to join First Look Media. Some of our competitors have ruthlessly reorga- nized in the last two years around digital and grown significantly. “Once everyone at the senior level re- ally understood this, it prompted a huge interven- tion, big editorial changes,” said the head of The Fi- nancial Times’s digital operations. Over the last year, USA Today has been integrat- ing digital staff — like developers and social editors — into each desk. Now, a small team organizes and designs the print paper. “The best online journalism Discussion
  • 85. 84 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First Owning The Story 1. Alert the Opinion section in advance to line up a reaction. Instead, we published a column a day later. When Michael Sam, the college football player, decided to announce to the world that he is gay, he brought the story first to The Times and ESPN. Our package was well-executed and memorable, but some of our more digitally focused competitors got more traffic from the story than we did. If we had more of a digital-first approach, we would have developed in advance an hour-by-hour plan to expand our package of related content in order to keep readers on our site longer, and attract new ones. We would have been thinking as hard about “second hour” stories as we do about “second day” stories. Here is what a digital roll-out might look like: 2. Resurface our 2011 “Coming Out” series. Since the series tapped into gay communities, ask the edi- tor for those contacts. We didn’t find a link to this series in our Michael Sam coverage.
  • 86. 85 OTHER SUGGESTIONS: Implement a social promotion strategy the min- ute The Times posts the story, including reach- ing out to gay communities and influencers, via LinkedIn, Facebook and others. Reach out to Times reporters with large Twitter followings, especially those with prominence in gay and sports communities, to tweet the story to their followers. 3. Organize a Google+ hangout with another open- ly gay athlete. We later found numerous online vid- eo and television appearances with Jason Collins, an openly gay NBA player, talking about his friendship with Michael Sam. 4. Assign a reporter to live-blog Twitter reactions. We found several sites that beat us at assembling the reaction. Depite not having an exclusive, Sports Il- lustrated was the first to report on a backlash among NFL executives. 5. Post a short backstory on how we got the inter- view. SB Nation reported the backstory of our exclu- sive, and branded it “exclusive.” Its story dominated Twitter and Google News. Pre-produce video highlights to put clips on sites like Instagram and Twitter. Create tools to become a platform for the reac- tion after the news breaks. For example, we could create an interactive quiz or survey related to the draft, or start a moderated discussion thread with prominent figures.
  • 87. 86 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First goes into print at the end of the day,” said David Cal- laway, the editor-in-chief. “But nothing is native for print.” The Financial Times was spurred to take similar steps after its leaders studied changing readership trends and spent several weeks in Silicon Valley. They cut the number of editions from three to one. They moved 200 night production staffers to nor- mal daytime hours. They built up engagement, data and breaking news teams. And they put print in the hands of a small group of editors. “You have to shift the balance of power and work backwards,” said Lionel Barber, the editor. Another company, Digital First Media, recently announced “Project Unbolt.” This initiative, un- derway at dozens of newspapers (formerly known as Journal Register and Media News), is meant to transform “every process, every workflow step.” Steve Buttry, the company’s Digital Transformation Editor, said that the effort — named because print newsrooms typically have digital operations “bolted on” — has been surprisingly well-received by tradi- tional journalists. “I don’t hear so many resisting, curmudgeonly, ‘you can’t make me change’ reac- tions anymore,” he said. “I hear learning-curve types of questions.” The Wall Street Journal pledged to join the “digi- tal first” ranks, building a new “real-time news desk” with 60 people and a new “audience-engagement desk” with social-media editors and analytics spe- cialists at the center of their newsroom. They are in- tentionally hiring younger, less experienced employ- ees to speed them up and push for change. Ezra Klein was one of several prominent journal- ists who left the security of an established newspa- per for a digital-media startup. For Klein, the value of a guaranteed audience — The Washington Post’s historic trump card — was eclipsed by the value of technology and digital talent. Increasingly, the right technology and talent can build up a big audience very quickly. In his announcement, Klein focused on Vox’s con- tent management system, Chorus, as the key draw. “And behind Chorus is a world-class design and en- gineering team that is already helping us rethink the way we power newsrooms and present information.” Our own David Carr crystallized the moment in a recent column. “In digital media, technology is not a wingman, it is The Man,” he wrote. “How something is made and published is often as important as what is made.” DIGITAL FIRST AT THE TIMES Over decades, we have perfected our formula for putting out a world-class paper 365 days a year. But many of our traditions, routines and habits — per- fect for the fixed deadlines and constraints of print — seem increasingly out of step with the digital world. For example, the vast majority of our content is still published late in the evening, but our digital traffic is busiest early in the morning. We aim am- bitious stories for Sunday because it is our largest print readership, but weekends are slowest online. Each desk labors over section fronts, but pays little attention to promoting its work on social media. Once you start looking at The Times through this lens, the questions start spilling out: Should our dig- ital report only present what’s new, or should it also showcase content from our archive that has been repackaged in creative and useful ways? Is the 700- 1100 word story, the sweet spot for print, the right length for digital readers? If weekly columns are struggling to win repeat readers, how can we build loyal followings? Our mindset is to perfect, then release. This should always be the case for our journalism. But we must question whether everything needs to meet this standard. Our competitors are launching new products or features as betas, and then using vital feedback from readers — rather than another round of internal feedback — to improve. “I’m glad we still have the standards of quality that we do,” said one Times platform editor. “That’s what distinguishes us in this era. What bothers me is when standards are used as an excuse to say no to an idea.” We look at our competitors through a print lens,
  • 88. 87 as well. Newsroom leaders spend a lot of time read- ing other outlets’ stories. Few are studying their digi- tal strategies — presentation, social presence, search optimization, navigation and mobile strategy. Fewer still are spending enough time looking at digital me- dia outlets that we don’t consider competitors. And even fewer are looking at competitors on their smartphones. As a result, it is distressingly common to see mistakes on our apps. For instance, we noticed that our popular Busi- ness Day columnists showed up at the very bottom of the business section. That is because our mobile site is automatically loaded from our web section fronts. Similarly, we’ve spotted numerous stories that invited readers to post comments, even though our iPhone and iPad apps do not allow users to com- ment. Instead of running mobile on autopilot, we need to view the platform as an experience that de- mands its own quality control and creativity. Moreover, beyond simply recognizing and en- couraging new behavior, we must be incentivizing that behavior through new reward structures. Most reporters know exactly how frequently they’ve appeared on Page One in the previous year — indeed, annual performance reviews often lead off with that figure. Similarly, desk heads are keenly aware when they have a dry spell of Page One sto- ries, and backfielders spend countless hours each week to making sure the pipeline is filled with sto- ries that could be offered for the front page. To right this imbalance, we need to provide more feedback. Editors should be monitoring things like their reporters’ social-media presence and willing- ness to try new ways of telling stories. And desk heads should be told if they are not keeping up digi- tally. This feedback — which a new analytics unit will make far easier to provide, based on data — is essen- tial because New York Times editors and reporters will always be working at capacity. They just need clearer and more consistent signals. “They mostly seem to care about the front page and big, giant sto- ries, and that’s great,” one desk head told us. “But if 13 million people need a news alert, we ought to know that. It ought to be somebody’s job on the masthead to tell us that. We do respond, but it’s a matter of shifting our burdens.” OUR DIGITAL BENCH OF TALENT To help change the culture, we need more and bet- ter digital talent. We often hire in bursts for new strategic ini- tiatives, such as video, or offer promotions when someone is considering leaving. But these efforts are no comment At the bottom of this Kristof column on our mobile app, he invited readers to comment. But the app does not have that feature.
  • 89. 88 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First In Their Own Words: Digital Departures Why did you leave The Times? “I looked around the organization and saw the plum jobs — even ones with explicitly digital man- dates — going to people with little experience in digital. Meanwhile, journalists with excellent digi- tal credentials were stuck moving stories around on section fronts.” “When it takes 20 months to build one thing, your skill set becomes less about innovation and more about navigating bureaucracy. That means the longer you stay, the more you’re doubling down on staying even longer. But if there’s no leadership role to aspire to, staying too long becomes risky.” “I didn’t want to be a straight-up news reporter or even a straight news editor. I always felt a little bit outside of what was most core to The Times, and what The Times was most proud of.” “I felt stifled by the hierarchy of the organization; meetings predicated upon meetings that did not lead to resolution or clear next steps.” What was appealing about life outside The Times? “The BuzzFeeds of the world have strong central leadership with clear digital visions not tied down by fiefdoms and legacy products.” “I wanted to learn a lot from a purely digital com- pany that didn’t have complicated print legacy requirements. I still feel to some extent that The Times, or large parts of The Times, have a be- grudging acceptance of technology.” “I could pursue my passion and grow as a leader faster elsewhere, in an environment with less rigid roles and a deeper understanding of the possibili- ties of true digital journalism.” What can The Times to do retain digital leaders? “Young digital talent is rarely motivated by mon- ey. Typically they are motivated by the potential to make impact at an organization that speaks to their values. This is the NYT trump card and should be played as often as possible.” “Figure out a way to take a big chance on some- one. In 1992, the ‘Today’ show was already a 40- year American institution when NBC appointed 26-year-old Jeff Zucker as its executive producer. We all know the success that happened after that. But can you imagine something like that happen- ing at The New York Times?” “Young people have many opportunities and only the rarest of the bunch will be willing to wait 20 years for the opportunity to truly be a leader. But find a way to give someone some real authority, and you may be onto something.” The Times is strong enough to withstand the loss of any one journalist. But when a talented digital col- league departs, it can feel more disruptive because our bench is not as deep. We asked five people who left digital jobs at The Times to explain their departures. Some of the reasons are well known, such as the lack of growth opportunities. But they also expressed frustration that their work was not fully understood or appreciated by the leadership. And they complained that their efforts to elevate our digital report were hindered by tradition and bureaucracy. Everyone we interviewed said they were passionate about The Times but could not turn down more au- tonomy, creativity and influence elsewhere. Tellingly, none expressed regret that they left. We Interviewed: Soraya Darabi: Launched social media at The Times. Founded a startup that was sold for $10 million and featured on the cover of Fast Company. Alice DuBois: Former deputy of digital platforms at The Times now director of editorial product at BuzzFeed. Jonathan Ellis: Former senior editor for mobile platforms at The Times. Joined Mashable to become managing editor for the growing newsroom. Liz Heron: Former social media editor at The Times. Joined Facebook after serving as head of audience engagement at The Wall Street Journal. Zach Wise: Former senior multimedia producer for The Times. Now Associate Professor, The Medill School of Journalism at Northwestern University.
  • 90. 89 largely reactive. The newsroom should think about our hiring needs — including jobs we need to create — for the next five to 10 years. Our current approach overvalues journalistic skills for digital hires and undervalues digital skills for journalism hires — often because that reflects how most editors know how to evaluate talent. In- deed, many people hired into purely digital roles said their clips were the most important factor in landing their jobs. One department head warned that we must change our mindset from hiring people “to continue the legacy we’ve established” to hiring people “to shake things up.” This is true for our traditional journalism posi- tions, as well. We need more reporters and editors with an intuitive sense of how to write for the web, an interest in experimenting with mobile and social storytelling, a proficiency with data,adesiretoengagewithread- ers on and off our site, and a nu- anced understanding of the shift- ing competitive landscape. We have people like Jenna Wortham and Mike Luo but there are far too few of them. This is particularly true in the edit- ing ranks, where many desks lack editors who even know how to evaluate digital work. This is one of our most pressing needs. We also must find ways to develop and empower our existing digital talent so that they can help shape strategy. The complaints from digital staffers in our news- room are, by now, familiar to our leadership: they feel their expertise isn’t put to good use, have few growth opportunities and believe their bosses do not understand their skills. The reason producers, platform editors and de- velopers feel dissatisfied is that they want to play creative roles, not service roles that involve admin- istering and fixing. It would be like reporters com- ing here hoping to write features but instead we ask them to spend their days editing wire stories into briefs. As a result, some of our brightest digital staffers have either left or asked to transition into reporting or editing because those roles offered a clearer path for career growth. This creates a troubling dynamic — we retain our best digital players by putting them in positions that don’t take advantage of their skill sets. These are clear signs of our newspaper mindset trumping our digital mindset. A number of people who left The Times recently said they saw only a small number of senior roles to grow into, and when those positions do open up, they are often handed to traditional journalists. This only compounds the problem: Because of the short- age of digital natives in senior leadership, we have trouble knowing who should be promoted. Collaborative efforts in the newsroom help de- velop and empower digital talent, and they provide more opportunities for our digital colleagues to dis- tinguish themselves with current leaders. For example, Sam Sifton said the most transformative part of his experience working on the Cooking product has been sitting side-by-side with software devel- opers. If he raises a question, a developer will overhear it and start searching for a solution. Prototypes are created in an afternoon, not a month. Kevin Delaney, a former top editor at The Wall Street Journal who founded Quartz, said that his technologists and journalists all sit together. “My conviction is that traditional organizations separate this process, which really greatly handicaps innova- tion,” he said. “The developer understands the pro- cess because they are involved. Developers are not order-takers.” Bringing someone from Product, Design, Tech- nology or one of our other Reader Experience units into the newsroom would make it far easier for them to spot problems and offer solutions — people like Renda Morton and Libby Gery, the user-experience designers who invented the forthcoming “Watch- ing” feature on our home page. Or someone like Paul Yorke, who has played a crucial role in build- ing our news-alert system into one of the most ef- Digital staffers want to play creative roles, not service roles.
  • 91. 90 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First PAGE ONE The newsroom is unanimous: We are focusing too much time and energy on Page One. This concern — which we heard in virtually every interview we conducted, including with reporters, desk heads, and masthead editors — has long been a concern for the leadership. And yet it persists. Page One sets the daily rhythms, consumes our focus, and provides the newsroom’s defining metric for success. The recent announcement from Tom Jolly to focus the Page One meeting more on the web report is a great step in the right direction, but many people have voiced their skepticism that it will truly change our focus. Here is a typical complaint from a Washington reporter who frequently appears on A1: “Our internal fixation on it can be unhealthy, disproportionate and ultimately counterproductive. Just think about how many points in our day are still oriented around A1­­­­­— from the 10 a.m. meeting to the summaries that reporters file in the early after- noon to the editing time that goes into those summa- ries to the moment the verdict is rendered at 4:30. In Washington, there’s even an email that goes out to the entire bureau alerting everyone which six stories made it. That doesn’t sound to me like a newsroom that’s thinking enough about the web.” fective broadcast devices in journalism. There have been some initial efforts along these lines, with Erin Grau, Kelly Alfieri, James Robinson and others, and they are worth building on. In another promis- ing sign, Ian Fisher is bringing developers into the newsroom. However, our producers provide a case study for how dispersing digital talent is insufficient without a clear plan for using them. Many work in a vague, catch-all position that can be best described as a “digital person on a desk who is not a reporter or editor.” First, their bosses need to better understand their skills and how they could be put to use. “You can’t take new talent and put them in old structures where they are second-class citizens,” said the editor of one competing newspaper. “That is not real change. You must change the structure of power.”
  • 92. 91 Winning The Talent Wars In the 1990s, the paper of record decided to add more sparkle to its just-the-facts approach to pro- ducing the daily report. We started recruiting writ- ers with voice and style from publications we had long overlooked, like New York magazine and The Observer. Color photos soon followed. Then more engaging graphics. Now we take it for granted that The Times is a magnet for the best writers, photographers and graphics editors in the business. We’ve arrived at a similar moment. The only way to ensure that our report keeps pace is to build a newsroom with a deeper and broader mix of digital talents: technologists, user experi- ence designers, product manag- ers, data analysts and, most of all, digitally inclined reporters and editors. Or, to set aside those labels and put our needs in more ba- sic terms, we want makers, who build tools to streamline our newsgathering; entrepreneurs, who know what it takes to launch new digital ef- forts; reader advocates, who ensure that we are de- signing useful products that meet our subscribers’ changing needs; and zeitgeist watchers, who have a sixth sense for the shifting technology and behavior. Most of all, we need those rare — and sought after — talents who can check off many of those boxes. And we need them now. While we receive ac- colades for our digital efforts like “Snowfall,” we nevertheless are at risk of becoming known as a place that does not fully understand, reward and celebrate digital skills. And many our competitors — including The Wall Street Journal, The Guardian, The Financial Times and The Washington Post — are ahead of us in making such hires a top priority. Recruiting the right talent is imperative because the success rate of hiring a digital native — the peo- ple who have grown up in a digital world, rather than adjusted to it — is far higher than moving tra- ditional journalists into digital posts. It’s not just a matter of possessing a particular skill set. They have an intuitive sense of how to adapt to the changing demands of technology and reader behavior. “You need to build a whole new culture, a whole new talent base that’s completely dedicated to the new,” said Justin Smith, the C.E.O. of Bloomberg News, who earned his stripes transforming The Atlantic from a money-losing magazine to a thriv- ing and profitable digital operation. “Don’t trust that people are ever going to be able to transition.” Similarly, editors at The Financial Times and USA Today told us that the most important move they have made in recent years was to aggressively bring in digital talent. In both cases, they used buyouts to make room for new hires, with a focus on clearing out reporters and editors who were actively opposing changes. Digital media startups don’t have to worry about retraining their staffs. “Every year our talent pool gets bet- ter and better,” said Henry Blodget, who founded Business Insider. “A new generation of writers and reporters grew up in digital, and it’s second nature to them.” Attracting digital talent will take more work than we might think. We assume, rightly so, that ambi- tious journalists want to work at The Times. But our storied brand is less of a draw among digital natives. They are drawn to opportunities to create something, experiment and solve problems, and re- think how news is made — without the guardrails and bureaucracy of a legacy organization. It doesn’t help that we often can’t compete on wages for top digital talent. But we can compete by pitching our- selves as a great Internet success story, selling po- tential hires on the satisfaction of helping transform a world-class, mission-driven organization. We need makers, entrepreneurs, reader advocates and zeitgeist watchers.
  • 93. 92 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First Here are potential steps to attract digital talent: Identify our skills gaps and aggressively recruit to fill them. Make sure our hiring managers understand the demands of the jobs they’re trying to fill, and can assess the skills of applicants. Put less emphasis on traditional journalism skills in our digital hires, and put more emphasis on digital skills in our journalism hires. To bring in new ideas, hire fewer people from traditional competitors, and recruit more from innovative start-ups. Use our journalism as a recruiting and retention tool, by letting talented technologists, user-expe- rience designers, product managers and digital strategists work more closely on the report. Empower and develop our digital talent by asking them to help shape, rather than simply imple- ment, strategy. Consider hiring top digital talent at a senior level to send an important signal about our priorities to potential recruits. Mark Suppes An Interactive News developer, Suppes is almost certainly the only Times employee who has built a nuclear fusion reactor with about $35,000 in spare parts. He also built Gucci’s website. Mike Bostock A graphics editor in the San Francisco bureau, Bostok created a library of graphics code used by publications all over the world. In the tech commu- nity, he is a revered figure. Chris Wiggins A top data scientist from Columbia University, Wig- gins is working to bring more data scientists to The Times at a time when experts in this field are in short supply and high demand. Jeremy Ashkenas Ashkenas created CoffeeScript, a programming language. His reputation helps us attract top talent. “He influences how things are built on the web,” a colleague said. Grooming Digital Leaders We need more digital talent over all, but we also need more digitally inclined leaders. This shortfall stems from several longstanding biases. We rarely hire outsiders directly into lead- ership positions. We have struggled to groom our digital journalists for leadership, in part because we don’t fully know how to use their skills. And we have a tendency to move traditional journalists into top digital roles. It’s critically important to have traditional jour- nalists involved in crafting and implementing our digital strategy. But having so many of these posts filled by traditional journalists deprives us of deep expertise to push our digital efforts to the next level. We need to understand the demands of such roles and the skills they require, and to be clear-eyed about the trade-offs when pushing journalists into such jobs without relevant experience. This pattern of promotion risks, among other things, sending the message that the only way to move up in the compa- ny is through traditional journalism, even on digital career paths. When our competitors hire for critical digital positions, they don’t seek people with print expe- rience; they seek people with the most impressive resumes. An important shift happened recently with the promotion of Aron Pilhofer and Steve Duenes to the masthead. The promotions paid off quickly: Both are responsible for hiring much of our best digital talent and for launching ambitious digital initia- tives. They watch competitors and notice trends — making the conversation about our mobile efforts or new products richer. Digital Stars Many our of digital colleagues are famous in their fields, though few in the newsroom are aware of their talents and reputations.
  • 94. 93 Assessing The Newsroom’s Digital Needs Before we can embrace many of the opportunities described in this report, we must first have better un- derstanding of our current digital capabilities and where we need to improve. We have identified five areas that warrant more investment: strategy, analytics, product, platforms and audience development. Our competitors — old and new — have been staffing up in these disciplines, and we must join the battle to better meet our digital needs and to build a deeper bench of digital talent. What follows is an assessment of these needs, rather than a proposed organizational chart for new hires in these areas. The precise structure matters less than insuring they have a central role in the newsroom. STRATEGY Need: Strategy is an implicit part of many jobs but planning is not centralized. Masthead editors and desk heads have little time to focus on long-term strategy. The newsroom does not have a list of pri- orities to coordinate with the business side. Without a deep understanding of competitors’ digital strate- gies, we lag behind on best practices. Innovators in the newsroom have trouble translating their needs and executing their ideas. Opportunity: Create a newsroom strategy team that would apprise the masthead of changing reader be- havior and strategy shifts by new and traditional competitors. It would help prioritize and commu- nicate the newsroom’s digital initiatives. The team could conduct studies to answer strategic questions. PRODUCTS Need: The Times’s digital products, especially mo- bile, no longer set the standard for digital journal- ism. People who serve as product editors are focused on short-term fixes rather than long-term editorial vision. Other products, like email, are neglected. Be- cause the team is understaffed and has little guid- ance from the masthead, their efforts are focused on business-side initiatives to generate revenue, not newsroom needs . Opportunity: Hire and empower more product edi- tors to help develop reader-facing products for the website, mobile apps, email, video and community platforms, as well as the reader-facing features of cross-platform products, such as breaking news and personalization. They would work closely with their product-manager counterparts on the business side and represent the newsroom’s interests in new- product initiatives. IN DEMAND Journalism job postings show that the demand for digital talent far outstrips the supply.
  • 95. 94 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First PLATFORMS Need: There is no single newsroom owner of our content-management system, Scoop, which is where all our digital content is created. As a result, our CMS lags behind systems at the The Huffington Post, BuzzFeed and Vox in terms of functionality, ease of use and speed. Our Interactive News department is a big driver of innovation, but their work is often not replicable because it is not built into journalist- facing technology. Because the newsroom leader- ship has not set clear priorities, the CMS technology team is forced to address minor fixes, often for indi- vidual desks, instead of focusing on major editorial innovation. New-product teams, like NYT Now, had to work around our publishing systems because they couldn’t get their work prioritized. Opportunity: Create platform editor positions to serve as the newsroom leads on internal products like Scoop, working closely with colleagues in In- teractive News and Technology to identify problems with our publishing systems and prioritize and build solutions. Platform editors also could identify suc- cessful one-off projects that could be turned into replicable templates. They could also advocate for and develop models for structured data and tagging. Platform editors could work with product editors to identify how reader-facing product innovations — for example, a feature to help readers follow a story — can be absorbed into newsroom workflows and publishing systems. AUDIENCE DEVELOPMENT Need: We are not aggressive enough about pro- moting our work so that our content reaches its maximum natural audience. We lack a presence on important social platforms, and our Twitter and Facebook accounts are managed by different depart- ments. Our website editors do not use some strate- gies for maximizing traffic that are standard prac- tice elsewhere, even though these approaches would not conflict with our editorial values. A number of valuable tools like repackaging, personalization, op- timization, and direct outreach are not being used strategically. Opportunity: We need to focus on growing our au- dience and keeping our existing readers on our site longer. This comes through optimization of our web site and off-site distribution, especially in social media. Our content needs a newsroom-driven pro- motion strategy ahead of and just after publication. Raising our game in audience development would help us win back the traffic around our own content that other sites like Huffington Post are stealing from us. The need is particularly urgent given the declining number of people reaching us through our home page. ANALYTICS Need: We don’t regularly use data to inform our de- cisions in the newsroom, which means we are miss- ing out on an opportunity to better understand read- er behavior, adjust to trends and drive traffic to our journalism. This makes it more difficult to set goals and assess progress. A strong analytics operation is essential to every one of these digital needs. Opportunity: Analytics skills are needed in many parts of the newsroom, including for top-level strat- egy as well as desk-level decision-making. We need to hire analytics experts to work with news, plat- form, and product editors, newsroom strategists and the people trying to grow our audience. We need to also work closely with data scientists in the Con- sumer Insight Group.
  • 96. 95 Shift the newsroom’s center of gravity away from Page One. Creating additional measures of suc- cess, using metrics like traffic, sharing and en- gagement could help. Assess our processes, workflow, staffing and tra- ditions. Changing what we do will be difficult without changing how we do it. This means look- ing critically at every element of how we work. A first step is listing ways in which we are optimized for print rather than digital. Ask our editors to read more like our readers. Each desk should have at least one staff member monitoring its report on the mobile web, and on our mobile and tablet apps. Eventually this will become second nature. DE-EMPHASIZE PRINT Rethink the “competition.” Ask every department to develop a list of new competitors for their sec- tions, and encourage their backfield to familiarize themselves with new apps and digital-only sites. Make digital a key part of evaluations. Reviews should include sections for digital as well as print performance. This should be the case for the whole newsroom, particularly for leaders. Has their desk developed a smart strategy for social media? Are they open and enthusiastic about ex- perimenting? Are they making smart, digitally fo- cused hires? To do this, we must first clearly com- municate digital expectations to our employees. How to Get There Reevaluate our current digital needs and create new positions. These range from the top (head of audience development, head of analytics) to the lower ranks (developers who build tools to streamline our reporting processes, a strategist to manage our undervalued email newsletters). Assess the digital capabilities of various desks and fill the holes. We would notice quickly if National lacked a strong investigative reporter or if Metro didn’t have a rewrite ace. Similarly, we should track whether these desks have strong digital tal- ent — not just as producers but reporters and edi- tors. Those with such skills should be encouraged to share best practices within their desks. Build the newsroom out of Legos, not bricks. The right structure for today won’t be the right struc- ture for tomorrow. Our needs will change quickly and our skills will become out of date. More than ASSESS DIGITAL NEEDS anything we need to make ourselves adaptable. That means constantly assessing needs, recruit- ing talent and changing structures. And that means sometimes creating jobs with expiration dates to help us in transitional moments. Add digital specialists to our staffing committee. Once we have a sense of our needs, we need to fill them, and a digital specialist who participates in vetting new hires and promotions would help us identify gaps and the people best positioned to fill them. Janet has already recommended such a move. Maintain a list of the best talents in digital media and begin courting them. Right now other com- panies are aggressively bringing in digital talent. Because the Times newsroom is behind on many fronts, like analytics and audience development, it is even more important that we identify game-
  • 97. 96 Strenghtening Our Newsroom | Digital First changing and game-improving talent. Accept that digital talent is in high demand. To hire digital talent will take more money, more persuasion and more freedom once they are within The Times — even when candidates might strike us as young or less accomplished. Develop- ers, product managers, user-experience design- ers and smart digital thinkers are commanding a significant premium. Find ways to empower our current digital staff. We want a culture of experimentation in the newsroom. For example, we could give producers responsibility for more testing, and then ask them to share their findings with the organization. Let employees transfer easily between newsroom and operational units. In many cases, the best positions for valued digital employees already ex- Consider a task force to explore what it will take to become a digital-first newsroom. We’ve seen a number of other newspapers take this approach and more people are discussing this possibility in our newsroom. Examining what it would take to become digital-first is a major effort and may eventually require stand-alone group to lead it. Consider creating a digital fellowship program. One way to bring top digital talent into the news- EXPLORE MORE SERIOUS STEPS room without paying Facebook wages would be to create a fellowship program in partnership with a university like MIT and its Media Lab. Infusing desks with digital trailblazers can lead to fruitful digital collaboration. Once they’re in the door, we have a better chance of retaining top performers. We can recruit “visiting professors” from Google, Facebook and other companies. Such efforts also serve as powerful recruiting tools for top talent. ist — on the business side. It is in our interest for Product, R&D, Design, Technology and Consum- er Insight to have, and to help retain, top talent. Such moves are often logical extensions of jobs in the digital newsroom. This would create a huge new range of senior positions. It would also open up another pool of future leaders for us. Identify the rising digital stars in the newsroom. Show them they are appreciated, and solicit ideas from them on how The Times can be better. Help develop their careers and have them help us iden- tify more talent. Make a star hire. Talent attracts talent, and few steps would send a better signal than getting an- other respected digital leader into a senior posi- tion. This would also help generate new ideas and strategies.